Nemo Handy-Walker Air 4.51 User Guide

Keysight Nemo Handy
User Guide
Notices U.S.Government Rights Warranty
Copyright Notice The Software is “commercial computer THE MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS
software,” as defined by Federal DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED “AS IS,”
© Keysight Technologies Finland Ltd Acquisition Regulation (“FAR”) 2.101. AND IS SUBJECT TO BEING
2022 Pursuant to FAR 12.212 and 27.405-3 CHANGED, WITHOUT NOTICE, IN
No part of this manual may be and Department of Defense FAR FUTURE EDITIONS. FURTHER, TO
reproduced in any form or by any means Supplement (“DFARS”) 227.7202, the THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
(including electronic storage and retrieval U.S. government acquires commercial BY APPLICABLE LAW, KEYSIGHT
or translation into a foreign language) computer software under the same DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES,
without prior agreement and written terms by which the software is EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH
consent from Keysight Technologies, as customarily provided to the public. REGARD TO THIS MANUAL AND ANY
governed by United States and Accordingly, Keysight provides the INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN,
international copyright laws. Software to U.S. government INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
customers under its standard IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
Manual Part Number commercial license, which is embodied MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
in its End User License Agreement FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
NTH00000A-90018 (EULA), a copy of which can be found KEYSIGHT SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
at FOR ERRORS OR FOR INCIDENTAL
Edition http://www.keysight.com/find/sweula. OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN
The license set forth in the EULA CONNECTION WITH THE
Edition 1, May 30, 2022
represents the exclusive authority by FURNISHING, USE, OR
Documents Software Version 4.51
which the U.S. government may use, PERFORMANCE OF THIS DOCUMENT
modify, distribute, or disclose the OR ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED
Published by: Software. The EULA and the license HEREIN. SHOULD KEYSIGHT AND
Keysight Technologies Finland, Ltd. set forth therein, does not require or THE USER HAVE A SEPARATE
Elektroniikkatie 10 permit, among other things, that WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH
90590 Oulu Keysight: (1) Furnish technical WARRANTY TERMS COVERING THE
information related to commercial MATERIAL IN THIS DOCUMENT THAT
Technology Licenses computer software or commercial CONFLICT WITH THESE TERMS, THE
computer software documentation that WARRANTY TERMS IN THE
The hardware and/or software described is not customarily provided to the SEPARATE AGREEMENT WILL
in this document are furnished under a public; or (2) Relinquish to, or CONTROL.
license and may be used or copied only otherwise provide, the government
in accordance with the terms of such rights in excess of these rights
license. customarily provided to the public to
use, modify, reproduce, release,
Declaration of Conformity perform, display, or disclose A CAUTION notice denotes a hazard. It
commercial computer software or calls attention to an operating procedure,
Declarations of Conformity for this product
commercial computer software practice, or the like that, if not correctly
and for other Keysight products may be
documentation. No additional performed or adhered to, could result in
downloaded from the Web. Go to
government requirements beyond damage to the product or loss of
http://www.keysight.com/go/conformity those set forth in the EULA shall apply,
and click on “Declarations of Conformity.” important data. Do not proceed beyond a
except to the extent that those terms, CAUTION notice until the indicated
You can then search by product number to
rights, or licenses are explicitly conditions are fully understood and met.
find the latest Declaration of Conformity. required from all providers of
commercial computer software
pursuant to the FAR and the DFARS
and are set forth specifically in writing
elsewhere in the EULA. Keysight shall A WARNING notice denotes a hazard. It
be under no obligation to update, calls attention to an operating procedure,
revise or otherwise modify the practice, or the like that, if not correctly
Software. With respect to any performed or adhered to, could result in
technical data as defined by FAR personal injury or death. Do not proceed
2.101, beyond a WARNING notice until the
pursuant to FAR 12.211 and 27.404.2 indicated conditions are fully understood
and DFARS 227.7102, the U.S. and met.
government acquires no greater than
Limited Rights as defined in FAR
27.401 or DFAR 227.7103-5 (c), as
applicable in any technical data.
2
Do not operate Nemo Handy without reading the User Guide, including its warnings,
for the devices used by Nemo Handy.
Always stop using Nemo Handy and switch off the Nemo Handy device(s) when it is
forbidden to use radio equipment or when it may cause interference or danger.
Never use Nemo Handy in an aircraft. The use of mobiles in an aircraft may be
dangerous.
Do not use the Nemo Handy device(s) in a hospital. It may interfere with nearby
electronic devices.
Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in gas stations, fuel depots,
chemical plants, or sites where blasting operations are in progress.
When using the Nemo Handy devices, the battery operation time is reduced from
normal use. The best operation times will be achieved when the batteries are
regularly charged and discharged as instructed in the device user manual. See also
other instructions and hints from the device user manual regarding the battery use.
Note that the local laws and/or regulations may set limitations, restrictions or other
obligations on the use of the Nemo Handy and/or the test devices. Observe the laws
and regulations of the country (as well as of any other relevant jurisdiction) where the
Nemo Handy and/or test device is used. Keysight Technologies Finland, Ltd.
assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the failure to comply with the local
laws and/or regulations.
Is the software of your Nemo Handy up-to-date?

Keysight will periodically release software updates to fix known defects and incorporate product
enhancements. To search for software updates for your product, go to the Keysight Software
Manager website at:
www.keysight.com/find/softwaremanager
3
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Table of Contents
Keysight Nemo Handy ................................................................................................................................... 0

User Guide.................................................................................................................................................................. 0
Table of Contents .................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Quick Guide ..................................................................................................................................................... 16
2 Introduction..................................................................................................................................................... 17
Important ............................................................................................................. 17
3 Nemo Handy System Overview .............................................................................................................. 18
Low data throughput with Android applications...................................................... 18
4 Nemo Handy Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 19
Installing Nemo Handy using SD card .................................................................... 19
Installing Nemo Handy from Keysight Software Manager (KSM) .............................. 19
Nemo Handy OTA (Over-the-air) update................................................................. 20
Installing Nemo Handy license............................................................................... 20
Superuser request ................................................................................................ 21
Temporary airplane mode on VoLTE devices........................................................... 21
Connecting an external GPS .................................................................................. 21
5 During Measurements ................................................................................................................................ 22
Manual application testing .................................................................................... 22
Manual voice call testing .......................................................................................... 22
Manual video call ...................................................................................................... 22
Manual SMS testing .................................................................................................. 23
Manual SMS receiving testing.................................................................................. 23
Manual MMS testing ................................................................................................. 23
Manual HTTP testing................................................................................................. 24
Manual HTML browsing testing................................................................................ 24
Manual FTP testing ................................................................................................... 25
Manual SFTP testing ................................................................................................. 26
Manual ICMP Ping ..................................................................................................... 26
Manual TWAMP testing ............................................................................................ 27
Manual IPerf testing .................................................................................................. 27
Manual IPerf 2 testing ............................................................................................... 28
Manual IPerf 3 testing ............................................................................................... 28
Manual Facebook testing.......................................................................................... 29
Manual YouTube testing ........................................................................................... 42
Manual Netflix testing ............................................................................................... 43
Manual Twitter testing .............................................................................................. 44
4
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Manual Instagram testing ......................................................................................... 44

Manual LinkedIn testing............................................................................................ 52
Manual Dropbox testing............................................................................................ 52
Manual Google Drive testing .................................................................................... 52
Manual Email testing ................................................................................................ 53
Manual scanning ....................................................................................................... 53
Manual external application start............................................................................. 54
Manual Viber testing ................................................................................................. 54
Manual WhatsApp testing ........................................................................................ 55
Manual BiP Messenger testing ................................................................................. 55
Manual LINE testing .................................................................................................. 56
Manual Zalo testing .................................................................................................. 57
Manual trace route testing ....................................................................................... 58
Manual 5GMARK crowd testing ............................................................................... 58
Manual 5GMARK pro testing .................................................................................... 60
Notifications............................................................................................................... 61
Scripted application testing................................................................................... 63
Creating scripts ......................................................................................................... 64
Scripted voice calls ................................................................................................... 66
Scripted video calls ................................................................................................... 67
Scripted call answer.................................................................................................. 68
Scripted FTP transfer ................................................................................................ 68
Scripted SFTP transfer .............................................................................................. 69
Scripted HTTP transfer.............................................................................................. 69
Scripted HTML browsing .......................................................................................... 70
Scripted ICMP Ping ................................................................................................... 71
Scripted TWAMP testing........................................................................................... 71
Scripted IPerf TCP/UDP ............................................................................................ 71
Scripted IPerf 2 TCP/UDP ......................................................................................... 72
Scripted IPerf 3 TCP/UDP ......................................................................................... 73
Scripted SMS sending............................................................................................... 73
Scripted SMS receiving............................................................................................. 74
Scripted MMS send................................................................................................... 74
Scripted E-mail testing ............................................................................................. 74
Scripted Netflix testing ............................................................................................. 75
Scripted YouTube testing ......................................................................................... 75
Scripted Facebook testing ........................................................................................ 76
Scripted Twitter testing ............................................................................................ 76
Scripted Instagram testing ....................................................................................... 76
5
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Scripted LinkedIn testing .......................................................................................... 76

Scripted Dropbox testing .......................................................................................... 77
Scripted Google Drive testing .................................................................................. 77
Scripted LINE testing ................................................................................................ 77
Scripted Zalo testing................................................................................................. 78
Scripted trace route testing...................................................................................... 80
Scripted 5GMARK crowd testing.............................................................................. 80
Scripted 5GMARK pro testing .................................................................................. 81
Scripted scanning...................................................................................................... 81
Wait ............................................................................................................................ 81
Loop ........................................................................................................................... 82
Airplane mode ........................................................................................................... 83
Band lock ................................................................................................................... 83
Channel lock .............................................................................................................. 83
Change APN............................................................................................................... 83
Textual user note (TNOTE) ........................................................................................ 83
AMR lock .................................................................................................................... 83
Scripted external application start ........................................................................... 84
Scripted Viber testing ............................................................................................... 84
Scripted WhatsApp testing....................................................................................... 85
WiFi Enable/Disable .................................................................................................. 86
Scripted BiP testing .................................................................................................. 86
Nested script ............................................................................................................. 87
Automated testing ................................................................................................ 87
Automated testing settings ...................................................................................... 87
Maintenance FTP....................................................................................................... 89
Maintenance SFTP .................................................................................................... 90
Scheduling maintenance and measurement sessions manually............................ 90
Manual start and stop ............................................................................................... 92
Access point for maintenance and scripted connections ....................................... 93
Nemo Cloud work orders .......................................................................................... 93
Voice quality testing ............................................................................................. 94
POLQA NB/SWB mode selection ............................................................................. 95
Voice quality testing in uplink+downlink mode....................................................... 95
PEVQ-S video quality testing.................................................................................... 95
Nemo Server remote configuration.......................................................................... 95
Forcing features.................................................................................................... 96
System lock ............................................................................................................... 96
Band lock ................................................................................................................... 96
6
Nemo Handy
User Guide
GERAN/GSM carrier lock .......................................................................................... 96

UTRAN/WCDMA carrier lock .................................................................................... 97
EUTRAN/LTE carrier lock, LTE cell lock ................................................................... 97
AMR codec activation ............................................................................................... 97
Supported chipsets ............................................................................................... 97
Forcing features of Samsung Shannon chipset ....................................................... 98
GSM channel lock (ARFCN) ...................................................................................... 98
WCDMA carrier lock (UARFCN) ................................................................................ 98
LTE carrier lock (EARFCN/PCI) ................................................................................. 98
Forcing features with Samsung Shannon chipset-based devices with ICD 5.11 or
newer 99
IP capture............................................................................................................. 99
Indoor measurements ........................................................................................... 99
Importing maps and defining map settings........................................................... 100
Performing Indoor Measurements.......................................................................... 102
iBwave Planner ........................................................................................................ 108
Distributed antenna systems (DAS) ....................................................................... 111
BTS Editor view ....................................................................................................... 113
Outdoor measurements....................................................................................... 114
BTS information on a map ...................................................................................... 115
Line drawing on the map for serving cell............................................................... 116
Use case 1 – A map with route, BTS, and notification icons ................................ 117
KML files displayed on a map ................................................................................. 117
Site verification testing ........................................................................................... 118
Navigation application ............................................................................................ 122
Nemo Handy Site Check ......................................................................................... 125
Defining route parameters................................................................................... 130
File explorer........................................................................................................ 134
Playback ............................................................................................................ 135
Copying files....................................................................................................... 135
6 Nemo Handy measurement views ......................................................................................................136
Parameter menu ................................................................................................. 136
Set scale .................................................................................................................. 136
Auto scale ................................................................................................................ 136
Number format ........................................................................................................ 137
Status view......................................................................................................... 137
Agent state view (only with Nemo Walker Air Agents) ........................................... 138
Script view ......................................................................................................... 139
GPS view............................................................................................................ 140
Notification history view ...................................................................................... 140
7
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Map View ........................................................................................................... 142

BTS view ............................................................................................................ 144
YouTube view ..................................................................................................... 144
YouTube parameters view ................................................................................... 144
Facebook view .................................................................................................... 144
LinkedIn view...................................................................................................... 144
Twitter view........................................................................................................ 144
Instagram view ................................................................................................... 145
Statistics views................................................................................................... 145
Netflix parameters view....................................................................................... 146
Signaling view .................................................................................................... 146
Voice quality view ............................................................................................... 146
WiFi view............................................................................................................ 147
WiFi Spectrum view ............................................................................................ 147
Transaction log view ........................................................................................... 147
Nemo Cloud view................................................................................................ 148
E2E view............................................................................................................. 148
Analysis of RF ingress view.................................................................................. 148
RLC Throughput view .......................................................................................... 148
GSM views ......................................................................................................... 149
Summary views for GSM......................................................................................... 149
Cell measurements view for GSM .......................................................................... 149
GSM cell table / GSM hopping channels............................................................... 150
GSM inter-system cells........................................................................................... 150
GSM view ................................................................................................................. 150
Throughput view for GSM ....................................................................................... 150
PPP throughput view for GSM................................................................................ 150
IPerf for GSM ........................................................................................................... 150
IPerf 2 for GSM ........................................................................................................ 151
IPerf 3 for GSM .................................................................................................... 151
GPRS view for GSM ............................................................................................. 151
WCDMA views .................................................................................................... 151
Summary view for WCDMA .................................................................................... 151
WCDMA cell measurements................................................................................... 153
WCDMA cell table ................................................................................................... 153
WCDMA inter-system cells..................................................................................... 153
WCDMA MIMO ........................................................................................................ 153
WCDMA/WCMA power control view ..................................................................... 153
Throughput view for WCDMA................................................................................. 153
PPP throughput for WCDMA .................................................................................. 154
8
Nemo Handy
User Guide
IPerf for WCDMA ..................................................................................................... 154

IPerf 2 for WCDMA .............................................................................................. 154
IPerf 3 for WCDMA .............................................................................................. 154
HSDPA view for WCDMA .................................................................................... 154
WCDMA HSUPA views ........................................................................................ 155
LTE views ........................................................................................................... 155
Summary view for LTE ............................................................................................ 155
LTE Cell Measurements view.................................................................................. 158
LTE cell table ........................................................................................................... 158
LTE inter-system cells............................................................................................. 158
LTE MIMO SNR/P .................................................................................................... 158
LTE MIMO................................................................................................................. 159
Application throughput view for LTE...................................................................... 159
PPP throughput view for LTE .................................................................................. 159
IPerf view for LTE..................................................................................................... 159
IPerf 2 view for LTE.............................................................................................. 159
IPerf 3 view for LTE.............................................................................................. 160
LTE link adaptation downlink.............................................................................. 160
LTE link adaption uplink ...................................................................................... 160
LTE CA cells ......................................................................................................... 160
LTE CA throughput .............................................................................................. 161
ROHC view ........................................................................................................... 161
CDMA/EVDO views ............................................................................................. 162
Summary view for CDMA/EVDO............................................................................. 162
Cell measurements view for CDMA/EVDO ............................................................ 164
IPerf view for CDMA/EVDO ..................................................................................... 165
IPerf 2 view for CDMA/EVDO.................................................................................. 165
IPerf 3 view for CDMA/EVDO.................................................................................. 166
RX power view for CDMA/EVDO ............................................................................ 167
Power control view for CDMA/EVDO ..................................................................... 167
Application throughput view for CDMA/EVDO ...................................................... 168
PPP throughput view for CDMA/EVDO .................................................................. 169
NR views ............................................................................................................ 169
NR Summary............................................................................................................ 169
NR packet link adaptation ...................................................................................... 170
NR RLC/PDCP throughput ...................................................................................... 170
NR MAC throughput................................................................................................ 170
NR physical channel throughput ............................................................................ 171
NR cell measurements ............................................................................................ 171
9
Nemo Handy
User Guide
NR cell table ............................................................................................................ 171

NR TX power ............................................................................................................ 172
Application/Physical Throughput ........................................................................... 172
Application/MAC Throughput............................................................................. 172
NR CQI/DCI .......................................................................................................... 172
NR MAC BLER ...................................................................................................... 172
Custom view....................................................................................................... 172
Create split .............................................................................................................. 174
Custom display example ......................................................................................... 175
7 Settings ...........................................................................................................................................................177
Page settings...................................................................................................... 177
General settings ................................................................................................. 177
Logins ................................................................................................................ 178
Charging settings ............................................................................................... 178
Display & Sound settings..................................................................................... 179
Notifications............................................................................................................. 180
Logging settings ................................................................................................. 182
Background logging ................................................................................................ 184
Log file splitting ....................................................................................................... 184
Defining measurement upload configurations ...................................................... 185
Real-time reporting............................................................................................. 186
GPS settings....................................................................................................... 186
Map settings....................................................................................................... 187
Google Map ............................................................................................................. 187
Indoor settings......................................................................................................... 187
BTS settings ....................................................................................................... 188
Serving info parameters.......................................................................................... 188
Serving info bar ....................................................................................................... 189
Voice quality settings .......................................................................................... 189
Nemo Server config settings................................................................................ 190
Call sequencer settings ....................................................................................... 190
Nemo Cloud settings........................................................................................... 192
Nemo Walker Air settings.................................................................................... 192
Scanner settings................................................................................................. 193
Site verification settings ...................................................................................... 193
8 Feedback ........................................................................................................................................................194
9 DRT4311B Scanner....................................................................................................................................195
Installing Mps Scanner Service and license .......................................................... 195
Installing Mps Scanner Service Air using SD card ................................................ 195
Installing Mps scanner service ............................................................................... 195
Installing Mps Scanner Service from KSM ............................................................ 195
10
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Installing Mps Scanner Service license ................................................................. 196

Bluetooth pairing ................................................................................................ 196
Scan types ......................................................................................................... 197
GSM Frequency Scan.............................................................................................. 197
UMTS pilot scan ...................................................................................................... 197
LTE OFDM scan ....................................................................................................... 197
CDMA pilot scan...................................................................................................... 198
EVDO pilot scan....................................................................................................... 198
CW (continuous wave) RSSI scan .......................................................................... 198
Blind scan ................................................................................................................ 198
Scanning results...................................................................................................... 199
PCTEL Gflex/HBflex/IBflex Scanners .........................................................................................................202
Installing PCTEL SeeGullConnect service ............................................................. 202
Installing PCTEL Scanner Service using SD card .................................................. 202
Installing Scanner Service ...................................................................................... 202
Installing Scanner Service from KSM..................................................................... 202
Scan types ......................................................................................................... 203
Top N WiFi Signal Scan .......................................................................................... 203
Frequency scan ....................................................................................................... 203
Pilot scan ................................................................................................................. 204
LTE OFDM scan ....................................................................................................... 204
Blind scan ................................................................................................................ 205
NR Top-N signal scan ............................................................................................. 205
10 Rohde & Schwarz TSMA6 Scanner .....................................................................................................208
Installing TSMA6 Scanner Service using SD card .................................................. 208
Installing Scanner Service ................................................................................... 208
Installing Scanner Service from KSM ................................................................... 208
Scan types ......................................................................................................... 210
GSM Frequency scan .............................................................................................. 210
Pilot scan ................................................................................................................. 211
WCDMA Top-N Pilot Scan (TSMA6 scan type: WCDMA Top-N Pilot Scan)........ 212
LTE OFDM scan ....................................................................................................... 213
NR Top-N signal scan ............................................................................................. 214
Spectrum Analysis Scan (TSMA6 scan type: RF Power Scan).............................. 216
Blind scan ................................................................................................................ 217
11
Nemo Handy
User Guide

Measuring 24-30 GHz/24-44 GHz bands with TSMA6 Scanner.............................. 220
Connecting the DC30 down converter with TSMA6 scanner ............................... 220
Connecting the DC44 down converter with TSMA6 scanner ............................... 220
Handling TSMA6 errors........................................................................................... 221
11 Ending Measurements..............................................................................................................................222
12 Nemo Instant Report .................................................................................................................................223
Creating Nemo Instant Report ............................................................................. 223
Generating a Nemo Instant Report ....................................................................... 223
Custom logo for Nemo Instant Report .................................................................. 224
13 Exporting Files .............................................................................................................................................225
Uploading log files on server ............................................................................... 225
Exporting files manually ...................................................................................... 225
14 Tips and Hints ..............................................................................................................................................226
Starting measurements ....................................................................................... 226
File locations ...................................................................................................... 226
Using the GPS receiver........................................................................................ 226
15 APPENDIX 1: Nemo Walker Air User Guide ....................................................................................227
Quick Guide........................................................................................................ 227
Introduction........................................................................................................ 228
Operating temperature range................................................................................. 228
Important ................................................................................................................. 228
Nemo Walker Air System Overview ...................................................................... 228
Low data throughput with Android applications ................................................... 229
Nemo Walker Air Setup....................................................................................... 229
Installing Nemo Walker Air using SD card............................................................. 229
Installing Nemo Walker Air from Keysight Software Manager (KSM).................. 229
Nemo Walker Air OTA (Over-The-Air) update ....................................................... 230
Installing Nemo Walker Air license ........................................................................ 230
Superuser request ................................................................................................... 231
Temporary airplane mode on VoLTE devices......................................................... 231
Bluetooth pairing..................................................................................................... 231
Agent options .......................................................................................................... 234
Connecting an external GPS................................................................................... 236
During Measurements ......................................................................................... 236
Scripted application testing ................................................................................... 236
Scripted application testing with Nemo Walker Air .............................................. 238
Voice quality testing with Nemo Walker Air .......................................................... 238
Forcing features with Nemo Walker Air ................................................................. 238
IP capture........................................................................................................... 238
12
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Indoor measurements ......................................................................................... 238

Performing indoor measurements.......................................................................... 241
Georeferenced indoor map ..................................................................................... 243
iBwave Planner ........................................................................................................ 245
Distributed antenna systems (DAS) ....................................................................... 247
BTS information on a map ...................................................................................... 249
Automated location mapping ................................................................................. 251
Outdoor measurements....................................................................................... 252
KML files displayed on a map ................................................................................. 252
Navigation application ............................................................................................ 253
Defining route parameters...................................................................................... 257
File Explorer ............................................................................................................. 258
Nemo Cloud work orders ........................................................................................ 260
File Explorer ............................................................................................................. 261
Copying files ............................................................................................................ 262
Nemo Walker Air measurement views .................................................................. 262
Settings .......................................................................................................... 262
Page Settings....................................................................................................... 262
General Settings .................................................................................................. 262
Logins ................................................................................................................... 264
Charging settings ................................................................................................ 264
Display & Sound settings .................................................................................... 265
Notifications (only in controllers) ....................................................................... 266
Logging settings .................................................................................................. 269
Defining measurement upload configurations .................................................. 270
Real-time reporting ............................................................................................. 271
GPS settings ........................................................................................................ 272
Map settings ........................................................................................................ 272
Google Map settings ........................................................................................... 272
Indoor settings..................................................................................................... 273
BTS settings......................................................................................................... 273
Serving info parameters...................................................................................... 274
Serving info bar ................................................................................................... 274
Nemo Server config settings .............................................................................. 274
Call sequencer settings....................................................................................... 276
OTA updates ........................................................................................................ 278
Nemo Walker Air settings ................................................................................... 278
E911 settings ....................................................................................................... 278
13
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Scanner settings.................................................................................................. 278

Feedback ........................................................................................................ 278
Scanner measurements with Nemo Walker Air.................................................. 279
Ending Measurements ..................................................................................... 279
Nemo Instant Report ....................................................................................... 279
16 Exporting Files .............................................................................................................................................280
Uploading log files on server ............................................................................... 280
Exporting files manually ...................................................................................... 280
Exporting and Converting Files ............................................................................ 280
Gathering log files from agents to controller using Bluetooth............................. 280
Nemo Walker Air Backpack ................................................................................. 280
Tips and Hints..................................................................................................... 281
File locations............................................................................................................ 281
Using the GPS receiver ........................................................................................... 282
17 APPENDIX 2: Nemo Handy IoT User Guide .....................................................................................283
Settings ............................................................................................................. 283
Page settings ........................................................................................................... 283
Display & Sound settings ........................................................................................ 283
Notifications............................................................................................................. 284
Logging Settings ..................................................................................................... 285
GPS settings ............................................................................................................ 286
Map settings ............................................................................................................ 286
Indoor settings......................................................................................................... 287
BTS settings............................................................................................................. 287
Nemo Handy IoT OTA (Over-the-air) updates settings......................................... 287
IoT settings .......................................................................................................... 288
Nemo Handy IoT Measurement Views .................................................................. 289
Status View.............................................................................................................. 290
GPS View ................................................................................................................. 290
Notification History View ........................................................................................ 290
Signaling View ......................................................................................................... 291
Summary View for IoT ............................................................................................. 291
Statistics Views ....................................................................................................... 293
IoT Parameters View ............................................................................................... 293
IoT Measurements View.......................................................................................... 294
IoT Config View........................................................................................................ 295
IoT AT Messages View......................................................................................... 295
Map View ............................................................................................................. 296
14
Nemo Handy
User Guide
BTS View .............................................................................................................. 297

Transaction Log View .......................................................................................... 298
Nemo Cloud View ................................................................................................ 298
18 APPENDIX 3: Nemo IoT Meter ..............................................................................................................299
Nemo IoT Meter Settings..................................................................................... 301
Starting a Measurement ......................................................................................... 305
Measurement Results View ................................................................................. 307
19 Technical support .......................................................................................................................................309
Nemo Support Portal .......................................................................................... 309
Phone and email support..................................................................................... 309
Locations for Keysight Technologies .................................................................... 309
15
Nemo Handy
User Guide
1 Quick Guide
This quick guide will explain briefly how to set up the Nemo Handy measurement system and
how to start the actual measurements.
Do not upgrade, root, or reflash your Nemo Handy measurement terminal firmware.
Doing so will cause the terminal to permanently lose its measurement capability!
Using Nemo Handy:
1. Open the Nemo Handy app on your device. Accept all permission before the
application launches. If you are unable to accept all permissions, please contact our
technical support. When using a Huawei HiSilicon chipset-based device, also accept
the Huawei User Terms Conditions. When launching Nemo Handy for the first time, you
must also accept the end-user license agreement. After this, you can review the privacy
notice and opt out of diagnostics and usage data collection if you wish to do so.
2. To start a scripted measurement, slide open the Control Center and tap Load and
Start Script. If there are no scripts created yet, tap the new script button ( ) on the
toolbar. Add script commands by tapping ADD on the bottom toolbar. For more
information, see Chapter “Creating scripts”).
3. Next, select a script file from the list of available scripts and tap Load & Run. The
selected script is loaded and started. If the Autologging option is selected, Nemo Handy
will start logging when the script is started.
4. To start recording manually, tap Start Measurement on the Control Center or tap the
play shortcut button ( ) on the Control Center.
5. You can browse the different views by dragging your finger horizontally across the
screen. If a view has several pages, you can move between the pages by dragging
your finger vertically across the screen. To activate forcing features, tap the Menu
button ( ) and select Forcing. Please note that unless you deactivate forcing
features, they will stay active even if you exit Nemo Handy.
6. While Nemo Handy is performing the measurement, you can use the mobile normally
for making calls, sending SMS messages, and so on. Tap the home button to switch
between different applications or to make a call.
7. Pause or stop the measurement by tapping ( ) on the Control Center and selecting
Pause or Stop. After pausing, you can continue the measurement by tapping Resume
Measurement. You can keep, rename, or delete the resulting log file.
8. Export the measurement file for post-processing.
16
Nemo Handy
User Guide
2 Introduction
Welcome to the User Guide for Nemo Handy. This user guide explains how to set up and
operate the Nemo Handy measurement tool software developed by Keysight Technologies
Finland Ltd.
Nemo Handy is a portable engineering tool for measuring and monitoring the air interface of
digital networks. Nemo Handy supports all mainstream cellular technologies.
Nemo Handy products provide you with the best real-time measurement visualization on the
handheld market. In addition to a rich variety of real-time displays, all RF and signaling data is
logged to the phone’s internal storage. Log files are made available in Nemo file format for
easy post-processing with Nemo post-processing tools or third-party post-processing tools.
Important
The test devices (smartphones etc.) tested and sold by Keysight Nemo Wireless Network
Solutions are intended for testing purposes only. Software changes in devices may limit their
normal use. Keysight Nemo Wireless Network Solutions does its best to provide test devices
without any limitations but it is not always possible. Keysight Nemo Wireless Network
Solutions assumes no liability if any commercial application or feature is blocked or limited due
to software or other device-related modifications.
If the test device is moved to another country or used in the network of another operator than
initially ordered, it is possible that the device does not support all network features. Keysight
Nemo Wireless Network Solutions assumes no liability in any cases.
The Nemo Handy user must be appropriately trained and should be familiar with the signaling
behind wireless technologies.
17
Nemo Handy
User Guide
3 Nemo Handy System Overview

The testing environment consists of a Nemo Handy compatible smartphone or tablet. The
package also includes the connecting cable and a Bluetooth GPS receiver (optional). For
connecting the GPS receiver to the system, please refer to the documentation in the GPS
receiver package. The Nemo Handy software is preinstalled in the device so you can start
measurements as soon as you receive the product package.
You can use the Nemo Handy device as a regular phone while Nemo Handy is logging in the
background: you can make calls, send SMS/MMS messages, make data transfers, and so
forth.
Low data throughput with Android applications

New Android-based smartphones with the Android version 6.0 have battery optimization
enabled by default. This will stop some CPU and network activity operating in the background
for Android apps, thus saving battery. The battery optimization activates when the handset is
left idle for a period of time while unplugged and with the screen off. The battery saving mode
interrupts background activity for Android applications, and with for example data transfers this
manifests as limited data throughput values. The battery saving option is disabled by default in
handsets delivered by Keysight Technologies. However, in case low data throughput is
experienced, the following settings should be checked and battery optimization should be
disabled for all applications. Please note that the settings menu varies depending on the
handset vendor and model. General step-by-step instructions are given below.
1. Select the phone's settings.
2. Select Battery from the device list and select Battery optimization from the menu icon
at the top-right of the screen.
3. Select all apps from the drop-down menu in the center of the display. Now you will see
all the apps that are Doze-enabled.
4. Select Don’t optimize for all apps and tap DONE.
18
Nemo Handy
User Guide
4 Nemo Handy Setup
Installing Nemo Handy using SD card

Nemo Handy mobiles are delivered preinstalled, but you may need to update Nemo Handy
yourself. Please follow these instructions carefully to install Nemo Handy.
Installing Nemo Handy:

1. Uninstall the old Nemo Handy version by going to Apps | Settings | More |
Application Manager and tapping Uninstall.
2. Connect the USB cable to the Nemo Handy mobile and to the computer where you
have the Nemo Handy installation files.
3. Select Disk drive/Media device (MTP) as the connection type.
4. Disconnect the data cable from the mobile.
5. Go to Apps | My Files | All Files | Nemo and select HandyRelease.apk file from the
list.
6. Select Install.
7. Installation is started and once it is finished, you can start using Nemo Handy.
Please note that you need to agree to the Keysight software end-user license
agreement (“EULA”) before you can start using Nemo Handy. The EULA will be
shown upon first launch of the software: read the agreement and tap Agree to
continue. If you select the Do not show this screen again option, the EULA will not be
displayed again.
Installing Nemo Handy from Keysight Software Manager (KSM)

Nemo Handy mobiles are delivered preinstalled but you may need to update Nemo Handy
yourself. Please follow these instructions carefully to install Nemo Handy.
Installing Nemo Handy from KSM:

1. Uninstall the old Nemo Handy version by going to Apps | Settings | More |
Application Manager and tapping Uninstall on your Nemo Handy mobile.
2. Start a browser on your Nemo Handy mobile and log in to KSM. You must have a valid
Technical Support Agreement and valid access codes (email address and password).
3. Select You can get updates and select the option Updates (Updated software and
licenses) in the dropdown list under ‘View'.
4. Download the version from the Product Family Nemo Handy in Keysight Software
Management site.
5. Select Apps | My Files | All Files | Download and tap the setup package (.apk) after
transfer is completed. (When using Samsung Galaxy Note 3 or Samsung Galaxy Note
3 T-Mobile see *)
6. Select Install.
7. Installation is started and once it is finished, you can start using Nemo Handy.
*) When using Samsung Galaxy Note 3 or Samsung Galaxy Note 3 T-Mobile, note that
installation of Superuser software is required prior to using Handy for the first time. Devices
have pre-installed Superuser software, so you only need to re-install the software if it has been
removed from the device. If you need the Superuser software, please contact Nemo Technical
support.
19
Nemo Handy
User Guide
displayed again.
Nemo Handy OTA (Over-the-air) update

Nemo Handy checks at every startup whether there is a newer version available. Notice that
your Technical Support agreement needs to be valid before a newer version will be detected.
To disable Nemo Handy from checking for newer version at every startup, deselect Check at
Startup in the OTA updates settings (Settings | OTA updates).
To check for available updates, go to OTA update settings in Nemo Handy and tap Check for
Updates. If a newer version is detected, you can choose to download and install it. Please
note that unit-specific OTA update settings made in Nemo Cloud overrule OTA updates
settings made in Nemo Handy, i.e. if in the Nemo Handy unit´s OTA Updates settings Update
automatically is disabled but in Nemo Clouds´s Resources | Units section OTA updates are
enabled for the unit, OTA updates will take place.
To enable silent install, i.e. automatically update the software version when a new software
update is released, select Update automatically. This is particularly useful with Nemo
Autonomous units since the software version in units on the field can be updated remotely.
You can define a version range for Nemo Handy Autonomous units in Nemo Cloud. Version
downgrades, i.e. updating Nemo Handy to an older version, can be performed, however this
causes all settings to reset. Note that silent install does not work when downgrading. After
downgrade, start Nemo Handy manually and accept all usage rights that Nemo Handy asks
for. For more information, see Nemo Cloud User Guide.
displayed again.
Under OTA updates you can also check for Nemo Browser/Navigation App updates and install
a new Nemo Browser/Navigation App version if there is one available through tapping Check
for Nemo Browser updates/Check for Navigation App Updates.
Installing Nemo Handy license

Nemo Handy mobiles are delivered preinstalled, but you may need to update the Nemo Handy
license. Nemo Handy retrieves the license automatically over the air when starting Nemo
Handy for the first time without a license. If you do not have the possibility to connect the
Nemo Handy mobile to internet via mobile connection or WiFi, please contact Nemo Helpdesk
for the license.
Please follow these instructions carefully to select the Nemo Handy license.
Selecting Nemo Handy license:
These instructions are meant to be followed when a license has been updated, for
example when a new product version containing new features requiring a license is
published or when a customer has purchased a new option for an existing license. A
new license is uploaded to the server by Nemo Technical Support and Nemo Handy
automatically connects to the server and retrieves the available licenses.
20
Nemo Handy
User Guide
1. In Nemo Handy, go to Menu | About | License and tap Browse licenses.

2. The License Browser view opens.
3. Tap Refresh to refresh the list of available licenses for Nemo Handy.
4. The currently used license is highlighted in green. A network license displays a product
variant, options, and expiration date. There is no additional information available for a
regular license. If there is a problem regarding the license, an error dialog box appears.
5. Select the correct license from the list by tapping it and selecting Load.
6. If you want to release a license, select Release.
7. You can now start using Nemo Handy.
Note that if the license expires during Nemo Handy runtime, you will get a notification dialog
box warning you that the application will shut down in ten minutes after the notification dialog
box is closed. Tap OK or the back button of the device to close the dialog box, which starts the
timer for application shutdown.
Superuser request
After installing Nemo Handy to a device for the first time, Superuser access will be requested.
It is recommended to select Remember choice forever.
Note that when using Note 3 and Note 3 T-Mobile devices, the Superuser software
must not be removed or Nemo Handy will not function.
Temporary airplane mode on VoLTE devices

Most VoLTE devices require a radio switch-off-switch-on before Nemo Handy can decrypt IMS
messages from packet capture. Therefore, if the airplane mode is not already enabled, Nemo
Handy asks to temporarily enable airplane mode at Nemo Handy startup.
If you wish to save your selection, select the Always use this selection option.
Tap Yes to enable temporary airplane mode.
This function is disabled in automated mode.
Connecting an external GPS

Nemo Handy uses an internal GPS receiver by default. If you want to use an external GPS,
you have to pair a Bluetooth GPS with the phone. Turn the Bluetooth GPS on. If you have
several devices, switch on only one GPS at a time to avoid an incorrectly paired system.
Bluetooth ID is not printed on the Bluetooth GPS case.
Choose Apps | Settings | Bluetooth and select the corresponding GPS. When you have a
connection to the GPS, the GPS view is visible. If you cannot see the GSP view, check that
you have chosen the correct GPS device.
21
Nemo Handy
User Guide
5 During Measurements
To start logging manually with Nemo Handy, tap Start Measurement on the Control Center.
Pause or stop the measurement by tapping ( ) on the Control Center and selecting Pause
or Stop. To continue logging after pausing, tap Resume Measurement on the Control Center.
Tap the device home button to switch between different applications or to make a call.
During measurements, calls and data transfers can be made and/or the phone can be left in
an idle state, during which time measurements are carried out. Measurement results are
stored into a file filename.nmf. You can view the measurement process in various views.
You can browse the various views by swiping the touchpad with your finger or by tapping the
page header and selecting from the list of displays in the popup shortcut menu. If a page has
several views, you can move between the views by dragging your finger vertically across the
screen. Note that the scales in the line graphs will change according to the active parameter in
the graph. You can change the active parameter from the parameter menu that pops up when
the parameter name is tapped and hold down on the screen. The different views are described
in detail in Chapter “Nemo Handy measurement views”.
Manual application testing

When performing manual data testing, select the access point that will be used in the
data measurement. Please follow the terminal manual to define access point.
Manual voice call testing

When testing voice calls manually, always make the calls from Nemo Handy. If you
make a call by entering the number using keypad and then tapping , phone
events (call attempt, call connected, and so forth) will not be written to log files.
To test voice calls manually, tap Start Test on the Control Center and select Voice Call.
Tap the phone number field and enter the phone number. Alternatively, you can or select an
existing contact from the address book by tapping the phone book icon. Tap RECENT to
access a list of previously used phone numbers. Finally, tap Call.
To end the call, tap the Hang Up Call on the Control Center.
You can adjust the volume by pressing the volume up or volume down key on the upper left-
hand side of the phone.
Nemo Handy supports Voice over LTE (VoLTE) and Voice over WiFi (VoWiFI) testing with
terminals that support these technologies. Manual video call testing is also supported with
terminals that support video calls. The process for video call testing is similar to voice call
testing.
With a separate license option, it is possible to measure Video Call Quality using a third-party
algorithm.
Manual video call

When testing video calls manually, always make the calls from Nemo Handy. If you
make a video call by entering the number using keypad and then tapping , phone
events (call attempt, call connected, and so forth) will not be written to log files.
To test video calls manually, tap Start Test on the Control Center and select Video Call.
22
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Enter a phone number by tapping the Phone number field. Alternatively, you can or select an
existing contact from the address book by tapping the phone book icon. Finally, tap Call.
To end the call, tap the Hang Up Call on the Control Center.
You can adjust the volume by pressing the volume up or volume down key on the upper left-
hand side of the phone.
With a separate license option, it is possible to measure Video Call Quality using a third-party
algorithm.
Manual SMS testing

Note that this functionality is available only if your Nemo Handy product option
supports it.
To manually test sending SMS messages, tap Start Test on the Control Center and select
Send SMS.
Select the Request delivery report option to receive a report about the message sending.
Select the End-to-end testing option to test end-to-end delivery time. Both terminals must use
GPS time (see Chapter “GPS settings”).
Custom service center defines a service center, other than the default service center, used to
send messages. If you leave this field empty, Nemo Handy will use the default service center.
Destination defines the recipient mobile number. Tap the folder icon to select the recipient
from address book.
Message refers to the test SMS message sent. Type here the test message.
Finally tap Send to send the test message.
Manual SMS receiving testing

supports it.
To manually test receiving SMS messages, tap Start Test on the Control Center and select
Receive.
Attempt timeout defines the maximum duration (in seconds) of the SMS receive attempt. Enter
the sender phone number by tapping the Sender number field. Alternatively, you can select an
existing contact from the address book by tapping the phone book icon. To view a list of phone
numbers from which your Nemo Handy device has previously received SMS messages, tap
Recent. To clear sender number from the sender number field, tap Clear.
Finally, tap Receive. To cancel receiving SMS, select Cancel All SMS.
Manual MMS testing

Note that to able to perform MMS testing, the MMS testing features must be selected
in General settings.
supports it.
23
Nemo Handy
User Guide
To manually test sending MMS messages, tap Start Test on the Control Center and select
Send MMS.
Select MMS file defines the MMS file that will be sent.
Compose allows composing the message. Enter phone number and subject, write a message
and add an attachment. To discard message, tap Discard.
Connection timeout (s) defines the maximum duration (in seconds) of the connection attempt.
Transfer timeout (s) defines the maximum duration (in seconds) of the transfer attempt.
Finally tap Send to send the test message.
Recent… displays recent MMS messages.
Manual HTTP testing

supports it.
Tap Start Test on the Control Center and select HTTP Transfer.
URL defines the file that will be downloaded. In upload, only path is defined. You can also
specify alternative port number, for example www.server.com:1234/path/file, in the URL field.
Attempt timeout defines the maximum duration (in seconds) of the transfer attempt.
Max duration (seconds) defines the maximum duration of the HTTP transfer.
Threads enables you to define the number of threads (value can be 1-20) for the HTTP
transfer. For example, if a 10 MB file is transferred with the thread value set to 3, 30 MB is
actually transferred.
Download/Upload defines the direction of transfer.
Select the Download dynamic data from Nemo Server option to download automatically
generated test data from Nemo Server.
Size (with uplink only) defines the size of the uploaded package in kilobytes
Http PUT (Uplink selected) defines that HTTP PUT is used as the file upload method instead
of HTTP POST (default).
When multiple threads are used in HTTP download, you can disable multipart transfer by
selecting Disable multipart transfer. When this option selected, the file is transferred x times
(i.e. the amount defined in Threads) instead of being split into smaller fragments.
Tap RECENT to access a list of previously used HTTP transfers. This way you can quickly
define HTTP connection settings and the file used in the transfer. If there are no previously
used transfer settings, tap Select host. Select HTTPS or HTTPS. On the Select HTTP/S
connection page, select one of the predefined HTTP/S connections and tap Select. To create
a new connection, tap Create New.
With scripted HTTP(S) transfers you can select the mode for stopping the transfer. The options
are Stop when completed and Force stop. To define the stop mode, add the command for
HTTP(S) transfer to the script and tap StopHTTPTransfer to open the Stop HTTP Transfer
dialog box. Select the stop style from the pulldown menu and tap Save.
The forced stop is useful with scripts that loop data transfers for a fixed amount of time, or
when the data transfer needs to be ended when a call is disconnected.
Manual HTML browsing testing

supports it.
Note that if you encounter problems with HTML browsing testing, update to the
newest version of the WebView provider application through Google Play Store. If
24
Nemo Handy
User Guide
the update is not completed successfully, go to Android settings and select Apps |
Google Play Store Storage and cache | Clear storage and reboot the device.
Finally, open Google Play and download the updates again.
Note that you need to install the Nemo Browser installation package (available in
KSM) separately to your Nemo Handy device to perform HTML browsing testing.
To obtain correct results, you should only perform HTML browsing testing on static
web pages, such as
https://portal.etsi.org/TBSiteMap/STQ/HTLMReferenceWebPage.aspx
If you test dynamic web pages, DCOMP event parameters (service access time, IP
termination time, TCP handshake time, payload access time, processing delay or
connection processing delay) might be missing or incorrect.
Tap Start Test on the Control Center and select Make HTML transfer. After defining the
settings, select Start to begin the data process.
URL defines the URL of the page that will be browsed.

Attempted timeout (s) defines the time of the attempt before timeout in seconds.
Max. duration (s) defines the maximum duration of the transfer in seconds. Once the maximum
duration is met, Nemo Handy stops the transfer and proceeds to the next script command.
Display browser window, when selected, displays the browser window while manual HTML
browsing testing is being performed.
Tap Choose previously loaded URL to select a URL that has been used before.
When the session starts, Nemo Handy opens an external Nemo Browser where the inserted
URL opens.
The orange line beneath the web address field indicates the browsing progress. When the web
page is loaded, the browser opens the Nemo Browser home page to indicate that the session
is completed. The Transaction log view displays the transaction results.
Manual FTP testing

supports it.
Go to Nemo Handy to define the FTP settings. Tap Start Test on the Control Center and
select FTP Transfer. After defining the settings, tap Start to begin the data process.
Server defines the IP address for the FTP server, for example, 12.34.56.78. Note that when
using an IPv6 address, the address must be in brackets.
Username and Password are required for the FTP server. Tap and hold to show
password.
Port defines the port number for the FTP server, for example, 21.
Passive, when selected, the passive mode is used. When cleared, the active mode is used.
Threads defines how many threads Nemo Handy transfers data with simultaneously (1-20).
For example, with one thread Handy creates one FTP session and with five threads it creates
five sessions.
Select whether the FTP file is Downloaded from the server or Uploaded from the phone to the
server.
Folder (with Uplink only) defines the destination folder for the transferred package. With
Browse you can browse the server for the destination folder.
File defines the name of the downloaded file (with Downlink only).
Browse allows browsing through and selecting files to be downloaded once the server address
has been set.
Max duration (seconds) defines the maximum duration of the FTP transfer.
25
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Transfer timeout (Use default/Define) defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Handy
waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue
within the defined time, transfer will fail. The default value is 30 seconds.
Tap RECENT to access a list of previously used FTP transfers. This way you can quickly
define FTP connection settings and the file used in the transfer. If there are no previously used
transfer settings, tap Select host. On the Select FTP connection page, select one of the
predefined connections and tap Select. To create a new connection, see Chapter “Creating
New FTP Connections”.
Manual SFTP testing

supports it.
Go to Nemo Handy to define the SFTP settings. Tap Start Test on the Control Center and
select SFTP Transfer. After defining the settings, select Start to begin the data process.
has been set.
Server defines the IP address for the SFTP server, for example, 12.34.56.78.
Server defines the IP address for the SFTP server, for example 12.34.56.78. Note that when
Username and Password are required for the SFTP server.
Port defines the port number for the SFTP server, for example, 21.
Select whether the SFTP file is Downloaded from the server or Uploaded from the phone to
the server.
Path (with Uplink only) defines the destination folder for the transferred package.
has been set.
File defines the name of the downloaded file.
Tap RECENT to access a list of previously used SFTP transfers. This way you can quickly
define SFTP connection settings and the file used in the transfer.
If there are no previously used transfer settings, tap Select host. On the Select SFTP
connection page, select one of the predefined connections and tap Select. To create a new
connection, see Chapter “Defining measurement upload configurations”.
Manual ICMP Ping

supports it.
Tap Start Test on the Control Center and select ICMP Ping. After defining the settings, tap
Start to begin the ICMP ping test.
Host defines the ping host address.

Repeats defines how many times the ping is repeated.
Packet size defines the size of the ping package in bytes.
Interval defines the interval in milliseconds between ping repeats.
26
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Timeout defines the maximum duration (in seconds) of the ping attempt.
Finally, select Start to begin the transfer.
Manual TWAMP testing

Note that this functionality is available only if your Nemo Handy license supports it.
Tap Start Test on the Control Center and select TWAMP.
Host defines the host address.

Packet Count defines the number of Test packets per Test session.
Packet Size defines the size of the packet in bytes.
Interval defines the interval in seconds between repeats.
Timeout defines the maximum duration (in seconds) of the attempt.
Max duration (seconds) defines the maximum duration of the transfer.
Tap Start to start the test.
TWAMP traffic profiles
With TWAMP testing, you can create traffic profiles and emulate typical use cases, such as
high-interactive e-gaming. It is possible to define in the profile the packet count, packet size
and the interval.
Manual IPerf testing

supports it.
Tap Start Test on the Control Center and select IPerf Transfer to define IPerf setting. Tapping
RECENT show transfers initiated from manual transaction.
27
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Select whether you are using TCP or UDP protocols, enter the server address and port, enter
the duration of the transfer, select the direction of the transfer (Download/Upload/Both), and
enter the TCP/UDP window size (KB), and attempt timeout. Finally, select Start to begin the
transfer.
Manual IPerf 2 testing

supports it.
Tap Start Test on the Control Center select IPerf 2 Transfer to define IPerf 2 setting.
Tapping RECENT show transfers initiated from manual transaction.

TCP/UDP defines whether you are using TCP or UDP protocols.
Server is the IP address used in Nemo Server.
Server Port refers to the port used by Nemo Server. For TCP and UDP protocols, the default
port is 5002.
Duration defines the length of the data transfer in seconds.
Upload defines the direction of the transfer.
TCP Window Size (KB) defines the size of the receive window during TCP/IP transmission. If it
is too small, it can decrease the maximum data throughput, and if it is too high it can increase
the retransmission round-trip time (RTT). To be able to avoid decrease of data throughput, the
window size should be at least the maximum throughput multiplied by RTT. For example, with
HSDPA with category 8 the maximum throughput is about 7.3 Mbit/s and RTT is about 100
ms. To avoid reduction of the throughput the TCP window size should be set at least to 7.3
Mbit/s * 0.1 s = 730 kbit = 91.25 kB.
Connection Timeout (s) defines the maximum duration (in seconds) of the connection attempt.
Transfer Timeout (s) defines the maximum duration (in seconds) of the transfer attempt.
Buffer Length:
-When using UDP: Defines the socket buffer length. When not defined, the default
socket buffer length of the operating system is used.
-When using TCP: Defines the buffer length written or read to and from the stream.
Tunnel Address defines the local address and network interface used by IPerf 2 binary. When
not defined, tunnel address is assigned automatically by the operating system.
Listen Port defines the local port that IPerf 2 binary uses. When not defined, is assigned by the
operating system automatically.
Manual IPerf 3 testing

supports it.
Tap Start Test on the Control Center select IPerf 3 Transfer to define IPerf 3 setting.
Tapping RECENT show transfers initiated from manual transaction.

TCP/UDP defines whether you are using TCP or UDP protocols.
Server port refers to the port used by Nemo Server. For TCP and UDP protocols, the default
port is 5001.
Download/Upload defines the direction of the transfer.
TCP window size (KB) defines the size of the receive window during TCP/IP transmission. If it
28
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Mbit/s * 0.1 s = 730 kbit = 91.25 kB.
Buffer length:
Tunnel address defines the local address and network interface used by IPerf 3 binary. When
Listen port defines the local port that IPerf 3 binary uses. When not defined, is assigned by the
Manual Facebook testing

supports it.
To be able to test the Facebook application, you will need to set up a Facebook page and
create a Facebook app. First, set up a Facebook developer account and create an app. See
“Setting up a Facebook developer account for Facebook testing” for instructions.
First, make the Instagram page visible by going to Settings | Page Settings | Instagram.
Select Show page and tap the Back key of the device.
Select Settings | Logins. Turn Login Instagram On. A dialog box allowing you to log on to
your Instagram account opens.
Tap Start Test on the Control Center and select Instagram. Tap Get Self Feed to load
Instagram home feed.
Setting up a Facebook developer account for Facebook testing
1. Go to Facebook and create a new Facebook account.
2. After you have created an account, go to https://developers.facebook.com/ and

create a developer account. Click on Get Started.
29
Nemo Handy
User Guide
3. After you have created and verified your developer account, click on Create First
App or go to My Apps - Create App if you have created apps before.
4. In the Select an app type dialog, select None and click Continue.
30
Nemo Handy
User Guide
5. In the Create a New App ID dialog, enter a name for your app and the app
contact email. Finally click Create App.
31
Nemo Handy
User Guide
6. Next, you need to create a Facebook page. Log in to Facebook with your regular
account and select Create - Page.
32
Nemo Handy
User Guide
7. Define a name and category for your page and click Create Page. You can skip
the steps of adding a profile and cover photo and just click Save.
33
Nemo Handy
User Guide
8. Your new page is created. Copy or write down the page ID (a string of numbers)
from the URL of the page as you will need it later on.
9. Return to the Facebook for Developers site (https://developers.facebook.com/)

and log in with your developer account. Select More – Tools.
34
Nemo Handy
User Guide
10. Select Graph API Explorer.
11. In the Graph API Explorer, you will see the Access Token settings on the right.
Select your app in the Facebook App field.
12. Select Get Page Access Token from the User or Page drop-down menu. Allow
Facebook to use cookies and similar technologies placed on other apps and
websites.
35
Nemo Handy
User Guide
13. Log in to Facebook and provide access to the page you created for this purpose.
Click Next.
36
Nemo Handy
User Guide
14. Check that both options are selected and click Done and OK. Facebook will link
the app to the page.
37
Nemo Handy
User Guide
15. Return to the Graph API Explorer view. Check that your app is still selected in the
Facebook App field and that your Facebook page is selected in the User or Page
field.
16. In the Add a Permission menu, expand the Events Groups Pages item and
select the following permissions:
• pages_read_engagement
• pages_manage_metadata
• pages_read_user_content
• pages_manage_ads
• pages_manage_posts
• pages_manage_engagement
• public_profile
17. Finally click the Generate Access Token button. If clicking the button changes the
selected page to User Token, you must select Pages Access Token again,
however, do not click the Generate Access Token button again.
When new permissions are added, the permissions appear with green text. Wait until
all permissions turn grey.
38
Nemo Handy
User Guide
18. Click the icon in the Access Token field. In the Access Token Info dialog,
click the Open in Access Token Tool button.
19. In the Access Token Debugger view, click the Extend Access Token button.
Check that Type is Page. If the Type is User, the configuration has failed, and you
must go back to step 12. Enter your FB password if asked. Click Extend Access
Token to generate the extended access token ID.
39
Nemo Handy
User Guide
20. The extended token ID (valid for two months) appears at the bottom of the view.
Copy or write down the token ID.
21. Create a text file (fb_id.txt) with Notepad and type in the Page ID (see step 8) and
the extended token (see step 20) in their own separate lines.
22. Place fb_id_text. file to the Nemo Handy root folder (nemo/handy).
Renewing the access token

The Facebook access token needs to be renewed every two months.
1. Log in to the Facebook for Developers site (https://developers.facebook.com/) with your
developer account.
2. Select More – Tools.
3. Select Graph API Explorer.
40
Nemo Handy
User Guide
4. In the Graph API Explorer, you will see the Access Token settings on the right.
5. Select your app in the Facebook App field.
6. In the User or Page field, select your Facebook page.

7. Click the icon in the Access Token field to open the Access Token Info view.
8. In the Access Token Info view, check that the Page ID matches the page ID of the
page for which you are renewing the token. You can find the current page ID from
the Nemo Handy Facebook Configuration dialog. If the page ID does not match,
check that you have selected the correct page in the User or Page field and the
correct application in the Facebook App field.
41
Nemo Handy
User Guide
9. Click the Open in Access Token Tool button.

10. In the Access Token Debugger view, click the Extend Access Token button.
Enter your FB password if asked.
11. The extended token ID (valid for two months) appears at the bottom of the view.
Copy or write down the token ID and update the extended toked ID on the fb_id.txt
file.
Manual YouTube testing

supports it.
42
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Note that Opticom PEVQ-S is available only if your Nemo Handy product license
option supports it.
Note that if you encounter problems with YouTube browsing testing, update to the
First, make the YouTube page visible by going to Settings | Page Settings | YouTube. Select
Show Page and tap the Back key of the device.
Tap Start Test on the Control Center and select YouTube.
Tap Search video to search for a video from YouTube. Select among the following options:
search video, most popular, latest, and most viewed. Select a video from the list and tap
SELECT to start playing the video.
Opticom PEVQ-S enables the selection of an Opticom PEVQ-S preloaded video for video
quality testing. Select Opticom PEVQ-S, tap the text field under it and select a previously
created YouTube test from the pulldown menu. The measurement initiates automatically, and
the Nemo Browser displays it in the background. The video plays in the Nemo Browser view.
Video following streaming related parameters are displayed in the YouTube view.
Init displays the video initialization time in seconds.

min s / min s displays the current point and the duration of the video.
Width defines the width of the video view in pixels.
Height defines the height of the video view in pixels.
Format displays the YouTube media encoding option that defines the size and encoding of the
video (for example, MPEG-4, H.264, or VP8). A list of options can be found, for example, in
Wikipedia (http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/YouTube).
Mos displays the MOS value.
Manual Netflix testing

This feature requires the older Netflix version 4.16.1.
You need an active Netflix account to test the Netflix application.
Do not exit from the Netflix application before the video has been run.
For Netflix testing, turn off the screen lock of your Nemo Handy device from the
device settings.
Before you can perform Netflix testing, you need to log in to Netflix separately before you
launch the Nemo Handy application. After you have logged in to Netflix, close the Netflix
application. Nemo Handy will launch the application when the test begins.
Tap Start Test on the Control Center and select Netflix. Select the duration of the Netflix test
among the options on the list or define the duration yourself with the User defined option (with
this option you need to insert the video ID and the track ID for the test.
Tap Start to start the manual Netflix test.
43
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Manual Twitter testing

supports it.
First, make the Twitter page visible by going to Settings | Page Settings | Twitter. Select
Select Settings | Logins. Turn Login Twitter On. A dialog box allowing you to log on to your
Twitter account opens.
Tap Start Test on the Control Center and select Twitter. Select one of the options from the list
(Homepage loading/Profile loading/Following a Twitter feed/Text tweet/Photo tweet)
Manual Instagram testing

supports it.
To be able to test the Instagram application, you will need to set up an Instagram page and
create an Instagram app. See “Setting up a Facebook developer account for Instagram
testing” for instructions.
First, make the Instagram page visible by going to Settings | Page Settings | Instagram.
Select Show page and tap the Back key of the device.
Select Settings | Logins. Turn Login Instagram On. A dialog box allowing you to log on to
your Instagram account opens.
Tap Start Test on the Control Center and select Instagram. Tap Get Self Feed to load
Instagram home feed.
Setting up a Facebook developer account for Instagram testing
First, set up a Facebook for Developers account and create an app. To do this, follow the
instructions below.
1. Go to Facebook and create a new Facebook account.

2. After you have created an account, go to https://developers.facebook.com/ and create a
developer account. Click on Get Started.
44
Nemo Handy
User Guide
3. After you have created and verified your developer account, click on Create App or go to
My Apps - Create App if you have created apps before.
45
Nemo Handy
User Guide
4. In the Select an app type dialog, select None and click Next.
5. In the Create a New App ID dialog, enter a name for your app and the app contact email
address. Finally click Create App.
46
Nemo Handy
User Guide
6. After successfully adding a new app, you are redirected to a new page where you can
configure Instagram Basic Display. In addition, you can add a tester to generate Access
Token. Under Instagram Basic Display, click Set up.
7. Scroll down to the bottom of the page and click Create New App.
47
Nemo Handy
User Guide
8. Choose the name you created in Step 5 as the name of the App. The name should be
automatically displayed. Click Create app.
9. The Basic Display section opens. You must now add an Instagram tester, i.e., test user, to
generate an Access Token. Scroll down the view ja click Add or Remove Instagram
Testers.
48
Nemo Handy
User Guide
10. The Roles section opens. In the Instagram Testers box, click Add Instagram Testers.
11. Enter the username of the Instagram account you want to add and click Submit.
12. Log in to the Instagram account of the username added as the Instagram Tester.
49
Nemo Handy
User Guide
13. Go to Settings – Apps and Websites.
14. Click on the Tester Invites tab. Click Accept.
15. Return to the Facebook for Developers site (https://developers.facebook.com/) and log in
with your developer account. Select the app you have created and navigate to Basic Display.
50
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Scroll down to the User Token Generator section. Click Generate Token. Note that you might
be required to log in to the Instagram account again and allow specific permission.
16. Copy the Access Token from the pop-up window.
17. Finally, go to the Instagram tab of your dashboard and copy the Access Token to the input
box provided. You are now ready to display your Instagram feed on your website.
51
Nemo Handy
User Guide
18. Copy and save access token to file named inst_id.txt. Place the file in the Nemo Handy
root directory.
Manual LinkedIn testing

supports it.
First, make the LinkedIn page visible by going to Settings | Page settings | LinkedIn. Select
Show page and tap the Back key of the device.
Select Settings | Logins. Turn Login LinkedIn On. A dialog box allowing you to log on to your
LinkedIn account opens.
Tap Start Test on the Control Center and select LinkedIn. Tap a testing options from the list
to begin testing.
Manual Dropbox testing

supports it.
Select Settings | Logins. Turn Login Dropbox On. A dialog box allowing you to log on to your
Dropbox account opens.
Tap Start Test on the Control Center and select Dropbox. The Dropbox view with Download
and Upload options opens.
In Download view you choose which file will be downloaded. Enter the file and path either by
tapping Browse to select a file or by tapping the text field and typing the path and filename.
If tapping Browse, tap on a file from the list and tap Select.
Recent opens a view displaying recent transfers. Transferred files can be selected or deleted
in this view.
Clear empties the File field.
In Upload view, enter the folder path by tapping on the text field and typing the path.
Define the file size in KB by tapping on the text field.
Tap Start to begin the uploading process.
Manual Google Drive testing

supports it.
Select Settings | Logins. Turn Login Google Drive On. A dialog box allowing you to log on to
your Dropbox account opens.
Tap Start Test on the Control Center and select Google Drive. The Google Drive view with
Download and Upload options opens.
In Download view you choose which file will be downloaded.
Select a file by tapping BROWSE, selecting a file from the list and tapping Select.
Alternatively, tap the text field and type the filename.
In Upload view, select a file by tapping BROWSE, selecting a file from the list and tapping
Select. Alternatively, tap the text field and type the filename.
Define the file size in KB by tapping on the text field.
52
Nemo Handy
User Guide
RECENT opens a view displaying recent transfers. Transferred files can be selected or
deleted in this view. CLEAR empties the File field.
Tap Start to begin the uploading process.
Manual Email testing

supports it.
Tap Start Test on the Control Center and select Email.

In the Test type field you can select whether to send email or to receive email.
Send Email
Test type defines whether you want to test sending email or receiving it.
User name defines the user name of the email account. The form and length of the user name
is email account server dependent.
Password defines the password of the email account.
When Gmail is tapped, Nemo Handy searches the device for previously configured email
account settings and inserts the account information automatically.
SMTP host defines the SMTP host identification/code. SMTP is a protocol used for sending
emails.
SSL, when selected, activates the SSL (Secure Socket Layer) encrypted link.
Port defines the port used for email testing.
Attachment defines whether an attachment is sent with the email. The options are None (no
attachment is sent); File (a file browsed from the device is sent as an attachment); and
Generate (Nemo Handy generates the attachment of user-definable size).
From defines the sending email address of the test email.
To defines the recipient email address of the test email.
Subject defines the content of the subject field of the test email.
Message defines the content text displayed in the text field of the test email.
Send sends the test email.
Clear clears all inserted data from the Email window.
Receiving Email
Receiving protocol defines the receiving protocol, POP3 or IMAP. POP3 and IMAP protocols
are used for receiving emails.
POP3/IMAP host defines the host for respective protocols.
Count defines the number of latest received messages imported for the receive email testing.
Receiving initiates the email testing process.
Clear clears all inserted data from the Email window.
Manual scanning
Note that this functionality is available only in Broadcom-based terminals
53
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Tap Start Test on the Control Center and select Scanning. After defining the settings, select
Start to begin scanning.
To select scanning type, tap Add New. Scanning type dialog box opens.
Tap Scanning type to select among GERAN band scan, GERAN ARFCN scan, UTRAN band
scan, and UTRAN UARFCN scan.
Tap Band to select band.
Max reported cells allows selecting from 10 to 80 maximum reported cells.
Bsic decoding allows enabling or disabling the base station identity code.
When a new scan type has been added, tap Start to begin scanning. To discard added scan,
tap the recycle bin icon. To edit scanning type, tap the wheel icon. To clear the list of added
scans, tap Clear all.
To view scanning results, go to Settings | Page Settings to allow UMTS Pilot Scan Results
page or GSM Frequency Scan Results page, depending on the selected type of scan.
Manual external application start

It is possible to launch an external application test manually in Nemo Handy.
Tap Start Test on the Control Center and select Start Application. Select the application from
the pulldown menu and select Start to start the application.
Force stop application after test forces the application to shut down when the test is over. It is
recommended to select this option.
Start initiates the application test.
Manual Viber testing

Note that when performing application testing with devices, such as Samsung
Galaxy S9, Samsung Galaxy S8 and Samsung Galaxy S8+, that allow user to hide
the navigation bar when using applications, the navigation bar must be set visible
always. I.e., you must tap “Tap here to fill entire screen” at the bottom of the screen.
Note that you must have a Viber Messenger downloaded to your Nemo Handy
device and a configured Viber account to perform Viber testing.
Note that when testing Viber VoIP calls, during call connecting the device´s display
must be on, therefore do not close the proximity sensor of the device. If the display
turns off, Nemo Handy cannot detect when the call has been connected.
With Nemo Handy, you can perform Viber chat message and VoIP call testing. The test
measures the quality of data transfer. See Nemo File Format documentation for more detailed
information on logged parameters.
Tap Start Test on the Control Center and select Viber.
Select the test type and tap the phone book button to select an existing phone number from
the contacts. The selected phone number appears in the enter contact number field. You can
also enter the number manually. When testing chat message sending, enter a message.
Tap Recent to access a list of previously used transfers. This way you can quickly define Viber
testing connection settings and used in the transfer.
When testing chat message sending to a selected contact, tap Send to start the test. When
testing making a VoIP call to a selected contact, tap Call to start the test. To end the call, tap
the Hang Up Call on the Control Center.
54
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Manual WhatsApp testing

Note that you must have a WhatsApp Messenger downloaded to your Nemo Handy
device and a configured WhatsApp Messenger.
always. I.e. you must tap “Tap here to fill entire screen” at the bottom of the screen.
Note that when testing Whatsapp VoIP calls, during call connecting the device´s
display must be on, therefore do not close the proximity sensor of the device. If the
display turns off, Nemo Handy cannot detect when the call has been connected.
With Nemo Handy, you can perform WhatsApp chat message, VoIP and video call testing. The
test measures the quality of data transfer. See Nemo File Format documentation for more
detailed information on logged parameters.
Tap Start Test on the Control Center and select WhatsApp.
also enter the number manually.
Message (only with chat message) defines the content text.
Add image (only with chat message) allows you to add an image to the chat message.
Tap Browse to browse for an image in the device memory.
Tap Recent to access a list of previously used transfers. This way you can quickly define
WhatsApp testing connection settings and used in the transfer.
Manual BiP Messenger testing

Note that you must have a BiP Messenger downloaded to your Nemo Handy device
and a configured BiP Messenger account to perform BiP testing.
Note that when testing BiP VoIP calls, during call connecting the device´s display
55
Nemo Handy
User Guide
With Nemo Handy, you can perform chat message, VoIP, and video call testing. The test
measures the quality of data transfer. See Nemo File Format documentation for more detailed
Tap Start Test on the Control Center and select BiP Messenger.
also enter the number manually.
Tap Browse to browse for an image in the device memory.
Tap Recent to access a list of previously used transfers. This way you can quickly define the
BiP testing connection settings and used in the transfer.
Manual LINE testing

Note that you must have the LINE app downloaded to your Nemo Handy device and
a configured LINE account.
Galaxy S9, Samsung Galaxy S8, and Samsung Galaxy S8+, that allow user to hide
Note that when testing VoIP calls, during call connecting the device´s display must
be on, therefore do not close the proximity sensor of the device. If the display turns
off, Nemo Handy cannot detect when the call has been connected.
With Nemo Handy, you can perform LINE chat message, chat sticker, chat photo, VoIP and
video call testing. The test measures the quality of data transfer. See Nemo File Format
documentation for more detailed information on logged parameters.
Tap Start Test on the Control Center and select LINE.
Select the test type and enter a contact name as written on the LINE contact list. Tap CALL to
start the test. To end the call, tap the Hang Up Call on the Control Center.
Chat message (only with chat message) defines the content text.
Chat Sticker allows sending a chat sticker. Note that the sticker is selected from a list of
previously used stickers, therefore there must be at least one sticker on the list for you to be
able to perform chat sticker testing.
Chat Photo allows sending a chat photo. Tap Browse to browse for an image in the device
memory.
Tap Recent to access a list of previously used transfers. This way you can quickly define LINE
testing connection settings and used in the transfer.
56
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Manual Zalo testing

Note that you must have a configured Zalo application downloaded to your Nemo
Handy device.
Galaxy S9, Samsung Galaxy S8, and Samsung Galaxy S8+, that allow the user to
hide the navigation bar when using applications, the navigation bar must be set
visible always. I.e., you must tap “Tap here to fill entire screen” at the bottom of the
screen.
Note that when testing Zalo VoIP calls, during call connecting the device´s display
With Nemo Handy, you can perform Zalo VoIP call, video call, and chat message testing. The
test measures the quality of data transfer. See Nemo File Format documentation for more
Tap Start Test on the Control Center and select Zalo.
When testing sending a chat message to a selected contact, tap SEND.
When testing making a VoIP call to a selected contact, tap CALL to start the test. To end the
call, tap the HANG UP CALL on the Control Center.
Select the test type and enter a contact name as written on the Zalo contact list.
Tap RECENT to access a list of previously used transfers. This way you can quickly define
Zalo testing connection settings used in the transfer.
57
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Manual trace route testing

With Nemo Handy, you can conduct trace route testing and trace the servers pinged along the
way to the target server. Ping trace route testing can be used to help troubleshooting network
or Internet connections. The ping utility tests responsiveness between two hosts, etc. With
ping trace route testing it is also possible to check responsiveness and trace the path of the
packet from one host to another. In case the network does not respond to ping or trace route
requests with trace route testing, it is possible to show the location right before the host that is
not responding.
Tap Start Test on the Control Center and select Trace Route.
Host defines the IP address or URL of the target server of the trace route measurement, for
example, www.keysight.com.
Timeout determines the maximum timeout seconds since the beginning of the operation.
HOP Timeout defines the maximum amount of time to wait for an individual hop to complete.
HOP Count Limit defines the maximum number of servers to be pinged along the way to the
target server.
trace route testing connection settings used in the transfer.
Tap START to start the manual trace route test.
Manual 5GMARK crowd testing

Note that you must have the 5GMARK crowd app downloaded to your Nemo Handy
device from the Google Play store.
5GMARK is an application to test and verify the end-user Quality of Experience (QoS). In
addition to data throughput testing, the application can also perform streaming (YouTube) and
web-browsing tests. The 5GMARK application is controlled via intents in Nemo Handy scripts.
In addition to mobile network testing, the application can perform tests in WiFi networks.
Tap Start Test on the Control Center and select 5GMarkCrowdTest.
58
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Select the location type and test type from a drop-down menu and tap Start to start the test.
The 5GMARK app is opened and the test is running.
Once the test is complete, the display screen automatically returns to Nemo Handy.
59
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Manual 5GMARK pro testing

Note that you must have the 5GMARK pro debug version downloaded and
installed into your Nemo Handy device from the 5GMARK website
(https://release.5gmark.com/pro). Use your 5GMARK Pro username and
password to login to the site.
Tap Start Test on the Control Center and select 5GMarkProTest.
Select location type from a drop-down menu and enter the team name, team secret, and
scenario ID. You can also optionally enter user reference, user comments, and user
observation. Tap Start to start the test. Once the test is complete, the display screen
automatically returns to Nemo Handy.
60
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Once the test is complete and the results are posted, the measurement events are written by
Nemo Handy to an NMF file.
Notifications
Select Settings | Display & Sound | Notifications to access the Notifications page. Here you
can activate/deactivate, edit existing, and create new notifications. See Chapter “Custom
notifications” for more information on editing and creating new notifications.
There are three types of notifications: audio, icon, and popup. Audio notifications will play an
audio file when triggered. Notifications with icons will appear as icons on the measurement
route on a map and in line graphs. A popup message can be selected for both types of
notifications. The popup appears briefly at the bottom of the screen. If you have a smartwatch
or other wearable with an Android operating system, you can select wearable to display
notifications on your wearable device.
With the buttons at the top you can select/clear all icons, audio files, popups, and wearable. By
tapping each parameter, you can select individual notifications.
Notification Icon Audio Trigger

<user-defined description> User- User-defined
defined
GPS Fix Lost yes
GPS Fix Acquired yes
GPS Disconnected yes
GPS Connected yes
61
Nemo Handy
User Guide

Service received yes
Service lost yes
LAC Changed yes
Cell ID Changed, Channel yes
Changed, System Changed, CDMA
System Changed
Voice Call Attempt
Voice Call Connected
Voice Call Failed
Voice Call Disconnected
Voice Call Dropped
C/I L yes C/I under 12
UL Power Up High yes Percentage of uplink power up commands

over 60
TX Power High yes TX power over 14
BLER High yes Block error rate downlink over 5
DL Power Up High yes Percentage of downlink power up commands
over 60
Best RSCP Low yes Active set received signal code power under
-95
RX Quality Bad yes RX quality over 4
Best Ec/N0 Low yes Active set Ec/N0 under -15
RX Level Low yes RX level under -95
FTP Connection Attempt

HTTP Connection Attempt
WhatsApp Connection Attempt
Viber Connection Attempt
BiP Connection Attempt
FTP Connection Success
HTTP Connection Success
WhatsApp Connection Success
Viber Connection Success
BiP Connection Success
FTP Connection Failed
HTTP Connection Failed
WhatsApp Connection Failed
Viber Connection Failed
BiP Connection Failed
FTP Connection Disconnected
HTTP Connection Disconnected
62
Nemo Handy
User Guide

WhatsApp Connection
Disconnected
Viber Connection Disconnected
BiP Connection Disconnected
FTP Connection Dropped
HTTP Connection Dropped
WhatsApp Connection Dropped
Viber Connection Dropped
BiP Connection Dropped
FTP Transfer Attempt
HTTP Transfer Attempt
WhatsApp Transfer Attempt
Viber Transfer Attempt
BiP Transfer Attempt
FTP Transfer Success
HTTP Transfer Success
WhatsApp Transfer Success

Viber Transfer Success
BiP Transfer Success
FTP Transfer Failed
HTTP Transfer Failed
WhatsApp Transfer Failed
Viber Transfer Failed
BiP Transfer Failed
Scripted application testing

supports it.
It is possible to use script files to run measurements with Nemo Handy. When a script is used,
Nemo Handy makes voice calls and data transfers automatically.
Scripts can be created and edited with Nemo Handy’s integrated Script Editor functionality
(see Chapter “Creating scripts”). Script files can be stored on the internal memory
(sdcard/Nemo/Handy/Script).
Please use only the folder specified above for storing scripts.
First define your access point. Please follow the terminal manual for further instructions. To
start a scripted measurement, tap Load and Start Script on the Control Center. If there are no
scripts created yet, tap the new script ( ) button on the toolbar. Add script commands by
tapping ADD on the bottom toolbar. For more information, see Chapter “Creating scripts”).
Select a script file from the list of available scripts and tap Load & Run. The selected script is
loaded and started. If the Autologging option is selected, Nemo Handy will start logging when
the script is started.
63
Nemo Handy
User Guide
A new Script view appears with information about the selected script.
If you did not start the script directly when it was loaded, select Load instead of Load & Run,
the loaded script appears under Current Script. Tap the script name and tap the play button (
next to the script . Nemo Handy starts making the calls/data transfers as defined in the
script file. The Script view displays the script status.
The script will finish automatically. Pause or stop the measurement by tapping ( ) on the
Control Center and selecting Pause or Stop.
If the Autologging option is activated, Nemo Handy will stop logging and save the file.
You can follow the script by scrolling down all the way to the end of the script view. The script
history view displays the progress of the script from beginning to end.
Creating scripts
You can create scripts with Nemo Handy’s integrated Script Editor.
Defining access point
First, define your access point. If you do not select the access point, Nemo Handy will use the
default access point. To change access point name, select Change APN from the list. Please
follow the terminal manual for further instructions on configuring the mobile data connections.
To avoid WLAN connections during measurements, user should disable WLAN connections
before making measurements.
Creating scripts
To start a scripted measurement, tap Load and Start Script on the Control Center. If there
are no scripts created yet, tap the new script button ( ) on the toolbar. Add script
commands by tapping ADDon the bottom toolbar. When you select a command from the Add
menu, a page with settings specific to the selected command is opened. Those pages are
described in the following chapters.
You can edit the command by double-tapping the active command. You can move, edit, delete
and add commands with the buttons at the bottom of the page.
64
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Nemo Handy will ask confirmation for deleting the command, tap Yes to delete the command.
Tap and hold on one of the commands to enter a multi-selection mode, where you can copy
and paste a block of commands with the corresponding buttons. The commands will be pasted
at the end of the script, and you can relocate them with up and down buttons. Unselect all
commands or tap the Back button to disable selecting commands.
Save a script by tapping the Save button ( ) on the toolbar, enter filename and tap OK.
Tap the Menu button ( ) at the top right corner of the screen and select Script Options to
define repeats, duration and max duration.
Parallel scripting of data transaction
Nemo Handy supports parallel scripting of data transactions. This can be used to simulate real
world user scenarios with multiple active data transactions of different type, such as,
simultaneous uplink and downlink data transfers. Another application is the maximum
throughput testing. To rule out possible effects of the test server, data can be downloaded
simultaneously from multiple servers. To perform parallel data transfers in the script, add
multiple transactions, such as FTP transfers, into the script. Interleave the start and end lines
of the transactions so that the start lines of the transactions appear consecutively in the script
transaction list and after that the end lines, respectively.
Starting a script
To start a script from the script list, select the script and tap Load & Run from the dialog box
that opens.
To start a script later, select the script and tap Load from the dialog box that opens. The script
will now appear under Script File. Tap the script name and tap the play button ( next to
the script. The Timing Script button is now displayed on the Control Center. Tap the button to
define the starting time.
You can also search for a specific script from the list by filtering. Tap the Filter text field and
type in the desired filter(s). Tap Done to activate the filter.
To create a script that is repeated, select a script from the list, tap Edit, and tap on Repeats.
Define how many times the script is repeated. In addition, you can set a maximum duration for
the script. To define a minimum duration for the script, select the Duration option and enter
the duration in minutes.
System lock allows locking a script to a specific system. To select system lock, tap System.
Select the Max duration option and define how many minutes the script will be run. The script
will be stopped either after the script has been repeated the defined number of times or the
maximum duration is reached. Tap Save.
65
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Verifying and saving a script

Before saving a script, it is advised that the script is verified, that is, Nemo Handy will check
that the script is valid and the script commands are in the correct order. Tap the Verify button
( ) on the toolbar. If the script is valid, a Verified message is displayed. If there are errors
in the script, Nemo Handy will tell you where the problem is. Tap the save ( ) button to
save a script.
To save the script, select Menu | Save As. Enter a name for the script file and tap OK.
Scripted voice calls

If you wish to perform scripts with both VoLTE and CSFB calls, you can
manually turn on/off the VoLTE capability by tapping the Tools button on
the toolbar and selecting Disable/Enable IMS. This feature is currently only
available with Android devices that have IMS.
To add a script command for voice call, select Add | Voice call in the Script Editor main view.
Phone number defines the recipient phone number.
Random duration enables randomizing the call duration of the call(s). When Random duration
is selected, every time this script is run a new value for call duration is randomized.
Call duration defines the duration (in seconds) of the call, unless used with Call End Condition
(see below).
Attempt timeout defines the maximum duration (in seconds) of the call attempt.
Call end condition defines an end condition for the call based on the active system (Until
system is GSM/UMTS/LTE), that is, the call is terminated when a specific system becomes
active.
If a call end condition is defined, call duration countdown will begin only after the call
end condition terminates the call. Thus it is recommended that also call duration is
defined. This is to ensure that the events after the handover are logged as well.
Call end conditions are supported with voice calls only.
Proceed to next command (after call is completed/immediately): When after call is completed
is selected, Nemo Handy waits for the voice call to end before moving to next command.
When immediately is selected, Nemo Handy moves to next command while the voice call is
still active.
Voice quality mode defines the voice quality mode. Always use the same mode between
mobile originating and mobile terminating device.
When On: caller initiated (default) is selected, the Caller (Mobile Originating device) first sends
an audio sample to uplink and the Callee (Mobile Terminating device) waits for sync tone,
records sample and then sends its own sync and sample to uplink. This is the default mode
except with CDMA calls.
When On: callee initiated is selected, Caller (Mobile Originating device) begins listening to the
line and when it detects sync tone, it will capture the sample and send its own sample to
uplink. This is useful for example in CDMA networks where MO device does not receive
information on when MT device has answered the call and call is truly connected. Select this
option with CDMA calls.
Sample file (visible when Caller initiates voice quality/Caller responds voice quality is selected)
defines the voice sample file used in the voice quality testing. There are two types of samples:
wideband and narrowband. If the sample filename has a wb postfix, the sample is wideband.
Otherwise it is narrowband.
66
Nemo Handy
User Guide
MOS threshold (visible when Caller initiates voice quality/Caller responds voice quality is
selected) can be used to limit the number of samples saved to the measurement file. For
example, only samples with a MOS score below 3 are saved.
Uplink volume (visible when Caller initiates voice quality/Caller responds voice quality is
selected) defines the uplink volume level. When selecting Default, the default volume level is
used. Selecting Define enables the user to set the volume level.
POLQA Version (visible when Caller initiates voice quality/Caller responds voice quality is
selected) defines which POLQA version is used (POLQA 1.1/POLQA 2.4/POLQA 3.0).
Scripted video call testing is also supported with terminals that support video calls. The
process for video call testing is similar to voice call testing.
Scripted video calls

To add a script command for video call, select Add | Video call in the Script Editor main view.
Phone number defines the recipient phone number.

Random duration enables randomizing the call duration of the call(s). When Random duration
is selected, every time this script is run a new value for call duration is randomized.
Call duration defines the duration (in seconds) of the call, unless used with Call End Condition
(see below).
Attempt timeout defines the maximum duration (in seconds) of the call attempt.
Call end condition defines an end condition for the call based on the active system (Until
system is GSM/UMTS/LTE), that is, the call is terminated when a specific system becomes
active.
If a call end condition is defined, call duration countdown will begin only after the call
end condition terminates the call. Thus it is recommended that also call duration is
defined. This is to ensure that the events after the handover are logged as well.
Call end conditions are supported with voice calls only.
is selected, Nemo Handy waits for the voice call to end before moving to next command.
When immediately is selected, Nemo Handy moves to next command while the voice call is
still active.
Voice quality mode defines the voice quality mode. Always use the same mode between
mobile originating and mobile terminating device.
records sample and then sends its own sync and sample to uplink. This is the default mode
information on when MT device has answered the call and call is truly connected. Select this
option with CDMA calls.
Sample file (visible when Caller initiates voice quality/Caller responds voice quality is selected)
defines the voice sample file used in the voice quality testing. There are two types of samples:
wideband and narrowband. If the sample filename has a wb postfix, the sample is wideband.
Otherwise it is narrowband.
MOS threshold (visible when Caller initiates voice quality/Caller responds voice quality is
selected) can be used to limit the number of samples saved to the measurement file. For
67
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Uplink volume (visible when Caller initiates voice quality/Caller responds voice quality is
selected) defines the uplink volume level. When selecting Default, the default volume level is
used. Selecting Define enables the user to set the volume level.
POLQA Version (visible when Caller initiates voice quality/Caller responds voice quality is
selected) defines which POLQA version is used (POLQA 1.1/POLQA 2.4/POLQA 3.0).
Scripted call answer

Timeout defines the maximum time in seconds that Nemo Handy waits for an incoming call
before moving to next script command.
Max duration (seconds) defines the maximum duration of the call (in seconds) before Nemo
Handy ends the call. With the default value 0 Nemo Handy does not restrict the duration of the
call but waits for the counterparty to end the call.
Server duration (seconds) defines the length of a call made by the server.
Answer delay (milliseconds) defines the delay in milliseconds before answering an incoming
call.
is selected, Nemo Handy waits for the voice call to end before moving to the next command.
When immediately is selected, Nemo Handy moves to the next command while the voice call
is still active.
Voice quality mode defines the voice quality mode.
records sample and then sends its own sync and sample to uplink.
information on when MT device has answered the call and call is truly connected.
Sample file defines the voice sample file used in the voice quality testing. There are two types
of samples: wideband and narrowband. If the sample filename has a wb postfix, the sample is
wideband. Otherwise it is narrowband.
MOS threshold can be used to limit the number of samples saved to the measurement file. For
Uplink volume default value varies depending on the device in use.
POLQA Version (visible when On: caller initiated/On: callee initiated is selected) defines which
POLQA version is used (POLQA 1.1/POLQA 2.4/POLQA 3.0).
Scripted FTP transfer

Add a script command for FTP transfer by selecting Add | FTP transfer in the Script Editor
main view.
Server defines the IP address for the FTP server, for example, 12.34.56.78. Note that when
Username defines the host site logon user name.
Password defines the host site logon password.
Port defines the host port.
Passive mode option defines whether passive mode is used or not.
has been set.
File (with Download only) defines the file name of the downloaded file.
Path (with Upload only) defines the destination folder for the transferred package.
Size (with Upload only) defines the size of the uploaded package in kilobytes.
68
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Threads defines how many threads Nemo Handy transfers data with simultaneously (1-20).
For example, with one thread Nemo Handy creates one FTP session and with five threads it
creates five sessions.
Tap Recent to access a list of previously used FTP transfers. This way you can quickly define
FTP connection settings and the file used in the transfer.
If there are no previously used transfer settings, tap Select host. On the Select FTP
connection page, select one of the predefined connections and tap Select. To create a new
connection, see Chapter “Creating New FTP Connections”.
With scripted FTP transfers you can select the mode for stopping the transfer. The options are
Stop when completed and Force stop. To define the stop mode, add the command for FTP
transfer to the script and tap StopFTPTransfer to open the Stop FTP Transfer dialog box.
Select the stop style from the pulldown menu and tap Save.
Scripted SFTP transfer

To add a script command for SFTP transfer, select Add | SFTP Transfer in the Script Editor
main view.
Server defines the IP address for the SFTP server, for example, 12.34.56.78. Note that when
Username defines the host site logon user name

has been set.
File (with Download only) defines the file name of the downloaded file.
Path (with Upload only) defines the destination folder for the transferred package.
Size (with Upload only) defines the size of the uploaded package in kilobytes.
Max duration (seconds) defines the maximum duration of the SFTP transfer.
Tap Select recent transfer to access a list of previously used SFTP transfers. This way you
can quickly define SFTP connection settings and the file used in the transfer.
With scripted SFTP transfers you can select the mode for stopping the transfer. The options
SFTP transfer to the script and tap StopSFTPTransfer to open the Stop SFTP Transfer dialog
box. Select the stop style from the pulldown menu and tap Save. The forced stop is useful with
scripts that loop data transfers for a fixed amount of time, or when the data transfer needs to
be ended when a call is disconnected.
Scripted HTTP transfer

To add a script command for HTTP transfer, select Add | HTTP transfer in the Script Editor
main view.
69
Nemo Handy
User Guide
URL defines the file that will be downloaded. In upload, only path is defined. You can also
specify alternative port number, for example www.server.com:1234/path/file, in the URL field.
Max duration (seconds) defines the maximum duration of the HTTP transfer.
Threads enables you to define the number of threads (value can be 1-20) for the HTTP
transfer. For example, if a 10 MB file is transferred with the thread value set to 3, 30 MB is
actually transferred.
Download/Upload defines the direction of transfer.
Select the Download dynamic data from Nemo Server option to download automatically
generated test data from Nemo Server.
Size (with uplink only) defines the size of the uploaded package in kilobytes
Http PUT (Uplink selected) defines that HTTP PUT is used as the file upload method instead
of HTTP POST (default).
When multiple threads are used in HTTP download, you can disable multipart transfer by
selecting Disable multipart transfer. When this option selected, the file is transferred x times
(i.e. the amount defined in Threads) instead of being split into smaller fragments.
Tap Recent to access a list of previously used HTTP transfers. This way you can quickly
define HTTP connection settings and the file used in the transfer. If there are no previously
used transfer settings, tap Select host. Select HTTPS or HTTPS. On the Select HTTP/S
connection page, select one of the predefined HTTP/S connections and tap Select. To create
a new connection, tap Create New.
With scripted HTTP(S) transfers you can select the mode for stopping the transfer. The options
HTTP(S) transfer to the script and tap StopHTTPTransfer to open the Stop HTTP Transfer
dialog box. Select the stop style from the pulldown menu and tap Save.
Scripted HTML browsing

Note that you need to install the Nemo Browser installation package (available in
KSM) separately to your Nemo Handy device to perform HTML browsing testing.
Note that if you encounter problems with HTML browsing testing, update to the
To obtain correct results, you should only perform HTML browsing testing on static
web pages, such as
https://portal.etsi.org/TBSiteMap/STQ/HTLMReferenceWebPage.aspx
If you test dynamic web pages, DCOMP event parameters (service access time, IP
termination time, TCP handshake time, payload access time, processing delay or
connection processing delay) might be missing or incorrect.
To add a script command for HTML browsing, select Add | HTML browsing in the Script
Editor main view.
URL defines the URL of the page that will be browsed.
Attempted timeout (s) defines the time of the attempt before timeout in seconds.
Max. duration (s) defines the maximum duration of the transfer in seconds. Once the maximum
duration is met, Nemo Handy stops the transfer and proceeds to the next script command.
Tap Choose previously loaded URL to select a URL that has been used before.
70
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Scripted ICMP Ping

To add a script command for ICMP ping, select Add | ICMP ping in the Script Editor main
view.
Host defines the ping host address.
Repeats defines how many times the ping is repeated.
Packet size defines the size of the ping package in bytes.
Interval defines the interval in seconds between ping repeats.
Timeout defines the maximum duration (in seconds) of the PING attempt.
Scripted TWAMP testing

To add a script command for TWAMP, select Add | TWAMP in the Script Editor main view.
Host defines the host address.
Packet Count defines the number of Test packets per Test session.
Packet size defines the size of the packet in bytes.
Interval defines the interval in seconds between repeats.
Timeout defines the maximum duration (in seconds) of the attempt.
Max duration (seconds) defines the maximum duration of the transfer.
Tap Save to save the script.
It is also possible to create traffic profiles and simulate typical use cases. See “TWAMP traffic
profiles” for more information.
Scripted IPerf TCP/UDP

To add a script command for using IPerf TCP or IPerf UDP, select Add | IPerf TCP
transfer/IPerf UDP transfer in the Script Editor main view.
port is 5001.
Data size defines the length of the total data transfer in kilobytes; that is, the transfer finishes
when the defined amount of data has been transferred.
Define whether you are sending (Upload) or receiving (Download) data or both.
Mbit/s * 0.1 s = 730 kbit = 91.25 kB.
UDP datagram size defines the size of the UDP packet in bytes. It should be smaller than the
maximum packet size of the lower layers to be able to avoid packet fragmentation in the lower
layers. Packet fragmentation has a huge negative impact to the achieved data throughput and
it should be avoided. On the other hand, if too small UDP packet size is used the portion of the
UDP and IP header increases which decreases the amount of transmitted user data with the
result of smaller data throughput. Normally good maximum value for UDP datagram is a little
bit less than maximum Ethernet packet size which is 1,500 bytes. A good default value for the
UDP datagram size is 1,460 bytes.
UDP bandwidth (kbps) defines how much data is attempted to be transmitted. Since UDP does
not guarantee successful data transmission, it is not limited by maximum throughput of the
lower layers. If higher bandwidth is used, the packet error rate (PER) increases. For example,
if lower layers are capable of transmitting 100kbit/s and UDP bandwidth is configured to
71
Nemo Handy
User Guide
400kbit/s, there should be a 75% packet error rate (only every fourth packet has been
transmitted successfully). Naturally UDP bandwidth should not be configured too small since it
limits the maximum throughput, which is not usually desired.
Attempt timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Handy waits for the
connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time,
connection attempt will fail.
Scripted IPerf 2 TCP/UDP

To add a script command for using IPerf 2 TCP or IPerf 2 UDP, select Add | IPerf 2 TCP
transfer/IPerf 2 UDP transfer in the Script Editor main view.
Server port refers to the port used by Nemo Server.
Mbit/s * 0.1 s = 730 kbit = 91.25 kB. Note that when TCP Window size is not defined, IPerf 2
uses the default socket buffer size of the operating system.
Parallel streams defines the amount of parallel data transfers there are in the script.
Buffer length:
72
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Scripted IPerf 3 TCP/UDP

To add a script command for using IPerf 3 TCP or IPerf UDP, select Add | IPerf 3 TCP
transfer/IPerf 3 UDP transfer in the Script Editor main view.
port is 5001.
Mbit/s * 0.1 s = 730 kbit = 91.25 kB. Note that when TCP Window size is not defined, IPerf 3
uses the default socket buffer size of the operating system.
Parallel streams defines the amount of parallel data transfers there are in the script.
Buffer length:
Scripted SMS sending

To add a script command for Send SMS, select Add | Send SMS in the Script Editor main
view.
Destination defines the receiving phone number.
Service center defines the service center address.
Attempt timeout defines the maximum duration (in seconds) of the SMS send attempt.
Select the End-to-end testing option to test end-to-end delivery time. Both terminals must use
GPS time (see Chapter “GPS settings”).
73
Nemo Handy
User Guide
In the Message field you can type the test message to be sent.
Scripted SMS receiving

To add a script command for Receive SMS, select Add | Receive SMS in the Script Editor
main view.
Tap Recent to view a list of recently received SMS messages.
Attempt timeout defines the maximum duration (in seconds) of the SMS receive attempt. Enter
the sender phone number by tapping the Sender number field. Alternatively, you can select an
existing contact from the address book by tapping the phone book icon.
Tap Save.
Scripted MMS send

Note that to able to perform MMS testing, the MMS testing features must be turned
on in General settings.
supports it.
To add a script command for Send MMS, select Add | Send MMS in the Script Editor main
view.
Select MMS file defines the MMS file that will be sent.
Compose allows composing the message. Enter phone number and subject, write a message
and add an attachment. To discard message tap Discard.
Scripted E-mail testing

To add email testing to the script, tap Add and select E-mail from the popup menu. The E-mail
view opens.
In the Test type field, select whether to send email or receive email.
Send E-mail
SMTP host defines the SMTP host identification/code. SMTP is a protocol used for sending
emails.
Attachment defines whether an attachment is sent with the email. The options are None (no
attachment is sent); File (a file browsed from the device is sent as an attachment) and
Generate (Nemo Handy generates the attachment of user-definable size).
From defines the sending email address of the test email.
To defines the recipient email address of the test email.
Subject defines the content of the subject field of the test email.
Message defines the content text displayed in the text field of the test email.
Cancel empties the script.
74
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Receive E-mail
Receiving protocol defines the receiving protocol, POP3 or IMAP. POP3 and IMAP protocols
are used for receiving email.
POP3/IMAP host defines the host for respective protocols.
Count defines the number of latest received messages imported for the receive email testing.
Receiving initiates the email testing process.
Clear clears all inserted data from the E-mail window.
Scripted Netflix testing

This feature requires the older Netflix version 4.16.1.
In order to be able to test the Netflix application, you need an active Netflix account.
Before you can perform Netflix testing, you need to log in to Netflix separately before you
launch the Nemo Handy application. After you have logged in to Netflix, close the Netflix
application. Nemo Handy will launch the application when the test begins.
You can add Netflix testing as a part of a script. To add a script command for Netflix testing,
select Add | Netflix in the Script Editor main view.
Select the duration of the Netflix test among the options on list, or define the duration yourself
with the User defined option (with this option you need to insert the video ID, the track ID, the
duration of the video in seconds, and the timeout for the test attempt in seconds for the test.
Once you have made your selection, tap Save, and the Netflix testing is added to the script.
Do not exit from the Netflix application before the video has been run.
For Netflix testing, turn off the screen lock of your Nemo Handy device from the
device settings.
Scripted YouTube testing

Note that if you encounter problems with YouTube testing, update to the newest
version of the WebView provider application through Google Play Store. If the update
is not completed successfully, go to Android settings and select Apps | Google Play
Store Storage and cache | Clear storage and reboot the device. Finally, open
Google Play and download the updates again.
With Nemo Handy you can stream videos from YouTube.

To add a script command for streaming videos from YouTube, select Add | YouTube in the
Script Editor main view.
URL defines the link to the YouTube video.
YouTube ID defines the ID of the selected video.
75
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Video duration defines for how long (in seconds) the video is streamed.
Attempt timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Handy waits for the
connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time,
connection attempt will fail.
Tap Search to search for a video from YouTube. Select from the following options: search
video, most popular, latest, or most viewed. Select a video from the list and tap the still image
to add it to the script. When you run the script, the video will play for the defined duration.
Opticom PEVQ-S enables the selection of an Opticom PEVQ-S preloaded video for video
quality testing. Select Opticom PEVQ-S, tap the text field next to it and tap on a video from
the pulldown menu to add it to the script. When you run the script, the video will play for the
defined duration.
Scripted Facebook testing

To be able to test the Facebook application, you will need to set up a Facebook page and
create a Facebook app. See “Setting up a Facebook developer account for Facebook testing”
for more information.
Test type defines whether you want to get wall feed, post status update, or to post a photo, a
generated photo, or a video.
Number of items allows you to enter the number of shown items.
Time range allows you to define the time frame from which the results are retrieved, e.g.
messages from the last five days.
Attempt timeout defines the maximum duration (in seconds) of the attempt.
Please note that image and video files you wish to upload to Facebook must be in your Nemo
Handy device´s local memory.
Scripted Twitter testing

Test type defines whether you are testing homepage loading, profile loading, following a
Twitter feed, text tweet, or photo tweet.
Number of items allows you to enter the number of shown items.
Scripted Instagram testing

To be able to test the Instagram application, you will need to set up a Facebook developer
account. See ”Setting up a Facebook developer account for Instagram testing” for more
information.
Test Type defines the test type.

Number of Items allows you to enter the number of shown items.
Attempt Timeout defines the maximum duration (in seconds) of the attempt.
Scripted LinkedIn testing

Test type defines whether you are testing profile loading by public URL, share text and URL, or
loading my info.
76
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Scripted Dropbox testing

Select Uplink or Downlink.
In the Download view, browse for the folder path be tapping Browse.
In the Upload view, insert the folder path by tapping on the text field and typing the path.
Size (KB) defines the size of the file.
Select recent transfer enables you to choose a file from a list of recently transferred files.
In the Downlink view you choose which file will be downloaded. Insert the file and path either
by tapping Browse to select a file from a list, or by tapping the text field and typing the path
and filename.
Attempt timeout (s) defines the maximum duration (in seconds) of the attempt.
Scripted Google Drive testing

supports it.
Select Settings | Logins. Turn Login Google Drive On. A dialog box allowing you to log on to
your Dropbox account opens.
To add a script command for using Google Drive, select Add | Google Drive in the Script
Editor main view.
Select Uplink or Downlink.
In the Download view, browse for the folder path be tapping Browse.
In the Upload view, insert the folder path by tapping on the text field and typing the path.
Size (KB) defines the size of the file.
In the Downlink view you choose which file will be downloaded. Insert the file and path either
by tapping Browse to select a file from a list, or by tapping the text field and typing the path
and filename.
RECENT opens a view displaying recent transfers. Transferred files can be selected or
deleted in this view. CLEAR empties the File field.
Scripted LINE testing

Note that Nemo firmware must support LINE voice quality.
Note that you must have the LINE app downloaded to your Nemo Handy device and
a configured LINE account.
Note that when testing LINE VoIP calls, during call connecting the device´s display
77
Nemo Handy
User Guide
With Nemo Handy, you can perform VoIP call, video call, and VoIP call answer testing with
LINE. The test measures the quality of sound. See Nemo File Format documentation for more
You can run a LINE test as part of the script. To add a script command, select Add | LINE in
the Script Editor main view. Select the test type. When selecting VoIP call or video call, note
that the contact name must be written the same way as in the LINE app´s contact list.
Call attempt timeout (s) (only with VoIP and video call) defines the maximum duration (in
seconds) of the call attempt.
Call duration (only with VoIP and video call) defines the duration of the call in seconds.
Answer wait time (only with Answer VoIP call) defines how many seconds Nemo Handy waits
for a call answer before hanging up call.
Voice quality mode (only with VoIP call) defines the voice quality mode:
When On: caller initiated (default) is selected, the Caller (Mobile Originating
device) first sends an audio sample to uplink and the Callee (Mobile
Terminating device) waits for a sync tone, records a sample and then sends
its own sync and sample to uplink.
When On: callee initiated is selected, Caller (Mobile Originating device)
begins listening to the line and when it detects a sync tone, it will capture the
sample and send its own sample to uplink. After selecting a sample file, you
can save the sample to Nemo Server if needed by selecting the Save
sample checkbox.
Sample file (visible when On: caller initiated (default)/On: callee initiated is selected)
defines the voice sample file used in the voice quality testing. There are two types of
samples: wideband and narrowband. If the sample filename has wb as postfix, the
sample is wideband. Otherwise the sample is narrowband.
MOS threshold (visible when On: caller initiated (default)/On: callee initiated is
selected) can be used to limit the number of samples saved to the measurement file.
For example, only samples with a MOS score below 3 are saved. After selecting a
sample file, you can save the sample to Nemo Server if necessary, by selecting the
Save sample option.
In the Prefix for the received sample files field you can enter a prefix for the received
sample.
Uplink volume (visible when On: caller initiated (default)/On: callee initiated is
selected) defines the uplink volume level. When selecting Default, the default volume
level is used. Selecting Define enables the user to set the volume level.
POLQA Version (visible when Caller initiates voice quality/Caller responds voice
quality is selected) defines which POLQA version is used (POLQA 1.1/POLQA
2.4/POLQA 3.0).
POLQA measurements can be done in Super Wideband (SWB) or in Narrowband
(NB) mode. The mode is selected automatically based on the sample, that is, if a wb
sample is selected, SWB POLQA measurement mode will be used. Respectively, if
NB sample file is selected, NB POLQA measurement mode will be used.
Scripted Zalo testing

78
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Note that you must have a configured Zalo application downloaded to your Nemo
Handy device.
Galaxy S9, Samsung Galaxy S8, and Samsung Galaxy S8+, that allow the user to
hide the navigation bar when using applications, the navigation bar must be set
visible always. I.e., you must tap “Tap here to fill entire screen” at the bottom of the
screen.
Note that when testing Zalo VoIP calls, during call connecting the device´s display
With Nemo Handy, you can perform chat message, VoIP call, video call, and VoIP call answer
testing with Zalo. The test measures the quality of data transfer and quality of sound. See
Nemo File Format documentation for more detailed information on logged parameters.
You can run a Zalo test as part of the script. To add a script command, select Add | Zalo in
the Script Editor main view.
Call duration (only with VoIP and video call) defines the duration of the call (in seconds).
for a call answer before hanging up the call.
Voice quality mode (only with VoIP and video calls) defines the voice quality mode:
When On: Caller initiated (default) is selected, the Caller (Mobile Originating
Terminating device) waits for a sync tone, records a sample, and then sends
When On: Callee initiated is selected, Caller (Mobile Originating device)
79
Nemo Handy
User Guide
sample checkbox.
sample is wideband. Otherwise, the sample is narrowband.
sample file, you can save the sample to Nemo Server, if necessary, by selecting the
Save sample option.
In the Prefix for the received sample files field, you can enter a prefix for the received
sample.
Uplink Volume (visible when On: caller initiated (default)/On: callee initiated is
2.4/POLQA 3.0).
Message (only with chat message) defines the content text of the chat message.
Scripted trace route testing

With Nemo Handy, you can conduct trace route testing and trace the servers pinged along the
way to the target server. Ping trace route testing can be used to help troubleshooting network
or Internet connections. The ping utility tests responsiveness between two hosts, etc. With
ping trace route testing it is also possible to check responsiveness and trace the path of the
packet from one host to another. In case the network does not respond to ping or trace route
requests with trace route testing, it is possible to show the location right before the host that is
not responding.
You can run a trace route test as part of the script. To add a script command, select Add |
Trace Route in the Script Editor main view.
Host defines the IP address or URL of the target server of the trace route measurement, for
example, www.keysight.com.
Timeout determines the maximum timeout seconds since the beginning of the operation.
HOP Timeout defines the maximum amount of time to wait for an individual hop to complete.
HOP Count Limit defines the maximum number of servers to be pinged along the way to the
target server.
trace route testing connection settings used in the transfer.
Scripted 5GMARK crowd testing

80
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Note that you must have the 5GMARK crowd app downloaded to your Nemo Handy
device from the Google Play store.
To add a script command, select Add | 5GMARK in the Script Editor main view. Select the
location type and test type from the drop-down menu. Tap Save to save the script.
Scripted 5GMARK pro testing

Note that you must have the 5GMARK pro debug version downloaded and
installed into your Nemo Handy device from the 5GMARK website
(https://release.5gmark.com/pro). Use your 5GMARK Pro username and
password to login to the site.
To add a script command, select Add | 5GMARK in the Script Editor main view. Select
location type from the drop-down menu. Enter the username, password and Scenario ID. In
addition, you can also enter demo user comment, observation, and reference if needed. Tap
Save to save the script.
Scripted scanning
Note that this functionality is available only in Broadcom-based terminals.
To select scanning type, tap Add new. The Scanning type dialog box opens.
Tap Scanning type to select among GERAN band scan, GERAN ARFCN scan, UTRAN band
scan, and UTRAN UARFCN scan.
Tap Band to select band.
Max reported cells allows selecting from 10 to 80 maximum reported cells.
Bsic decoding allows enabling or disabling the base station identity code.
When a new scan type has been added, tap Save to save scan type. To discard an added
scan, tap the recycle bin icon. To edit scanning type, tap the wheel icon. To clear the list of
added scans, tap Clear all.
To view scanning results, go to Settings | Page settings to allow UMTS Pilot Scan Results
page or GSM Frequency Scan Results page, depending on the selected scan type.
Wait
To add a wait period in the script, click Add and select Wait from the popup menu. The Wait
Properties view opens.
81
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Time synchronization point (seconds), when selected, enables accurate time synchronization
on both A- and B-sides with multiple devices. This option should be used when a certain
command must be executed exactly after an elapsed time (t=0) with more than one device.
Each time the script runs into a time synchronization point, it checks the elapsed time from the
previous time synchronization point and waits until the wait time condition is met. This way the
script engine keeps the original reference time point of (t=0) regardless of script iteration in
order to prevent time from drifting. For example, the end-to-end voice call script commands
below are repeated three times:
1. Make call (duration=30 sec)
2. End call
3. Wait (time synchronization point 60 sec)
4. Receive call (timeout=45 sec)
5. Wait (time synchronization point 90 sec)
Round #1:
Time synchronization point #1: Check if (60) secs have been elapsed since (t=0)
Time synchronization point #2: Check if (60+90) secs have been elapsed since (t=0)
Round #2:
Time synchronization point #1: Check if (60+90+60) secs have been elapsed since (t=0)
Time synchronization point #2: Check if (60+90+60+90) secs have been elapsed since (t=0)
Round #3:
Time synchronization point #1: Check if (60+90+60+90+60) secs have been elapsed since
(t=0)
Time synchronization point #2: Check if (60+90+60+90+60+90) secs have been elapsed since
(t=0)
Random wait time enables randomizing the wait duration. If Random wait time is selected,
every time this script is run a new value for wait time is randomized.
Wait time (s) defines the wait period in seconds.
But at most value is the maximum wait time in seconds if the defined notification does not
appear.
Wait Condition defines a wait condition based on the active system (Until system is GSM/Until
system is UMTS/Until system is LTE/Custom condition), i.e. the wait period continues until a
specific system becomes active. Select Custom condition to use more than one condition by
using AND / OR command. For instance, you could wait until the terminal is alerting and
trigger the next script command from that call state.
Note: If both Wait Condition and Wait (s) are defined, the Wait (s) countdown will
begin only after the Wait Condition is met.
Wait from enables you to select one of the following options:

Current time enables you to define a pause between items in the script. For example, you can
set a 10 second pause after a voice call is finished and before the next call starts.
The options Call Attempt, Video Call Attempt, and Context Activation Attempt enable you to
define a wait period after the selected event notification. For example, you can make the script
pause for 60 seconds after a call attempt event. This will prevent the script from continuing
before the call attempt has completed.
If a Wait Condition is defined, it is recommended that also a wait period (Wait) be

defined. This is to ensure that logging starts only after handover has successfully
occurred.
Loop
It is possible to repeat selected script commands within the script by placing those commands
within a loop. To add a loop in the script, click Add and select Loop from the popup menu.
The Loop dialog box opens.
82
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Loop time defines the duration of the loop (in seconds). Select Loop time and set the value
(minimum duration 1, maximum duration one week).
Loop count defines the number of loops executed. Select Loop count and set the value
(minimum number of loops 1, maximum number of loops 1000000).
Loop until, when selected, enables Nemo Handy to repeat a script command until the condition
is met. For instance, if Ping test fails, you can set it to be re-run multiple times.
Tap the CONDITION button to open the Custom Condition dialog. Add a condition by tapping
+CONDITION. To use more than one condition, use +AND/+OR buttons.
Place the commands you wish to loop between the LoopStart and LoopStop commands.
Airplane mode
Airplane mode can be switched on and off. When the script run is complete, the airplane mode
returns to the state is was in before the script was started. Airplane mode can be used to
check how the LTE detach and attach to the network is working.
Notice that the Bluetooth connection will also be turned off when this is enabled. This means
that for instance the connection to the possible Bluetooth GPS will be disabled.
Band lock
To add a band lock to the script, tap Add and select Band lock from the popup menu. The
Band lock view opens.
Tapping on the Bands field opens a list of bands. Select the band(s) and tap Save.
Channel lock
To add a channel lock to the script, tap Add and select Channel lock from the popup menu.
The Channel lock view opens.
ARFCN allows you to define the GSM carrier and band where to lock the UE.
UARFCN allows you to define the WCDMA carrier and scrambling code where to lock the UE.
LTE PCI allows you to define the LTE carrier and physical cell identity (PCI) where to lock the
UE.
Change APN
To change APN (Access Point Name) in Nemo Handy script, tap Add and select Change APN
from the popup menu. The Change APN view opens.
Tap Browse to select the access point name from a list or tap the text field and type the APN
name. Tap Save.
Textual user note (TNOTE)

To add a textual user note (TNOTE) in Nemo Handy script, tap Add and select Textual marker
from the popup menu. The textual marker view opens.
Type text and tap Save.
AMR lock
To add an AMR lock to the script, tap Add and select AMR lock from the popup menu. The
AMR lock view opens.
83
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Tapping on the AMR codecs field opens a list of AMR codecs. Select a codec and tap Save.
Scripted external application start

You can record the terminal onscreen touch activity to create recordings of touch command
sequences. This allows you to control third-party applications from Nemo Handy and run them
with scripts. At the same time all RF information is recorded to the measurement file. You must
record the touch command sequences and add them to the script. Notice that the touch
command sequence is different if you use different devices due to different screen resolution.
Also, the touch event recording differs depending on whether you use the device in portrait or
landscape mode.
It is possible to add a recording of an external application test as a script command. To add an
external application start to the script, tap Add and select Start application from the popup
menu. The Start application dialog box opens.
Select application allows you to select the application for the test. Please note that only
applications installed by the user are displayed in the pulldown menu.
Force stop application after testing forces the application to shut down when the test is over. It
is recommended to select this option.
Record file displays the file currently recorded.
Start initiates the selected application and the recording session.
Cancel empties the script.
Scripted Viber testing

Note that you must have a Viber Messenger downloaded to your Nemo Handy
device and a configured Viber account to perform Viber testing.
Note that when testing Viber VoIP calls, during call connecting the device´s display
turns off, Handy cannot detect when the call has been connected.
With Nemo Handy, you can perform chat message and VoIP call testing. The test measures
the quality of data transfer. See Nemo File Format documentation for more detailed
You can run a Viber test as part of the script. To add a script command, select Add | Viber in
the Script Editor main view.
Select the test type. When testing chat messages, VoIP calls, and tap the phone book button
to select an existing phone number from the contacts. The selected phone number appears in
the enter contact number field. You can also enter the number manually.
Call attempt timeout (s) (only with VoIP call) defines the maximum duration (in seconds) of the
call attempt.
Call duration (only with VoIP call) defines the duration of the call in seconds.
84
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Add image (only with chat message) allows you to add an image to the chat message. Tap
Browse to browse for an image in the device memory.
Scripted WhatsApp testing

Note that Nemo firmware must support WhatsApp voice quality.
Note that you must have a WhatsApp Messenger downloaded to your Nemo Handy
device and a configured WhatsApp account to perform WhatsApp testing.
Note that when testing WhatsApp VoIP calls, during call connecting the device´s
display must be on, therefore do not close the proximity sensor of the device. If the
display turns off, Nemo Handy cannot detect when the call has been connected.
With Nemo Handy, you can perform chat message, VoIP call, video call, and VoIP call answer
testing with WhatsApp. The test measures the quality of data transfer and quality of sound.
See Nemo File Format documentation for more detailed information on logged parameters.
You can run a WhatsApp test as part of the script. To add a script command, select Add |
WhatsApp in the Script Editor main view.
Select the test type. With chat message/VoIP/video call testing and tap the phone book button
to select an existing phone number from the contacts. The selected phone number appears in
the enter contact number field. You can also enter the number manually.
Voice quality mode (only with VoIP call) defines the voice quality mode:
When On: caller initiated (default) is selected, the Caller (Mobile Originating
Terminating device) waits for a sync tone, records a sample and then sends
sample checkbox.
sample is wideband. Otherwise the sample is narrowband.
85
Nemo Handy
User Guide
sample file, you can save the sample to Nemo Server if necessary, by selecting the
Save sample option.
sample.
Uplink volume (visible when On: caller initiated (default)/On: callee initiated is
2.4/POLQA 3.0).
Add image (only with chat message) allows you to add an image to the chat message. Tap
Browse to browse for an image in the device memory.
WiFi Enable/Disable
WiFi Enable enables WiFi connection on the device. Go to the WiFi Spectrum page on Nemo
Handy to check available WiFi connections.
WiFi Disable disables WiFi connection on the device.
Scripted BiP testing

Note that you must have a BiP Messenger downloaded to your Nemo Handy device
and a configured BiP Messenger account to perform BiP testing.
Note that when testing BiP VoIP calls, during call connecting the device´s display
With Nemo Handy, you can perform chat message, VoIP call, video call, and call answer
testing with BiP. The test measures the quality of data transfer. See Nemo File Format
documentation for more detailed information on logged parameters.
You can run a BiP test as part of the script. To add a script command, select Add | BiP in the
Script Editor main view. Select the test type. When testing chat messages, VoIP and video
calls, and tap the phone book button to select an existing phone number from the contacts.
The selected phone number appears in the enter contact number field. You can also enter the
number manually.
86
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Nested script
A nested script is a script inside a script. Nested scripts enable you to run automated
measurements combining multiple scripts. You can use nested scripts to run several scripts
one after another.
You can use nested scripts for example to make 10 voice calls followed by 10 data transfers
and repeat that for 1000 times, without having to define 20 transactions in the script. Instead,
create a script that makes one voice call with a repeat of 10, and another script with 1 data
transfer with repeat of 10, and put them both as nested scripts in the same parent script.
To add a script command for a nested script, select Add | Nested script in the Script Editor
main view.
Please note that nested scripts can be only added in scripts that do not have other
transactions than other nested scripts.
Script defines the script file that will be nested. Tap the field and select a script from the list.
Run condition defines how long the script will be run. If you select Until finished, the script will
be run until it is finished. If you select Max time, you will need to define in minutes the
maximum duration of the script.
Repeats defines how many times the script is repeated.
Automated testing
Please note that automated testing requires the automated testing license option.
Nemo Handy offers the automated testing mode, that is, the ability to schedule Nemo Handy to
perform measurements automatically using the Automated testing status view. During the
automated testing mode, the data views are viewable, but you will not be able to control the
measurement or use forcing features. Also, the log files can be automatically sent to an FTP or
HTTPS server.
In addition to running standalone automated testing, Nemo Handy can be connected to the
Nemo Handy Autonomous system is remotely configured and controlled by Nemo Cloud. For
more information on the Nemo Handy Autonomous system, please refer to the Nemo Cloud
User Guide.
Automated testing settings

Select Settings | General and select Automated Testing to activate the automated testing
mode.
Next, select Settings | Automated Testing to open the Automated Testing settings page.
Phone Number defines the phone number of the Nemo Handy mobile terminal.
Maintenance Data Protocol defines the protocol for uploading maintenance data. For more
information, see Chapter “Maintenance data protocol” (Not available in Autonomous Probe
mode).
87
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Startup Maintenance defines whether maintenance is performed automatically when Nemo

Handy is starting. During maintenance sessions, Nemo Handy unit uploads reports and
measurement files to an FTP/HTTPS server if server is configured.
Upload Config enables configuration upload.
Low Maintenance Priority defines the priority of a maintenance session, that is, maintenance
can be delayed if a new measurement session is set to run immediately after the previous one,
or if a measurement is still running when a maintenance session is scheduled to take place.
Maintenance by WiFi, when selected, WiFi is used for maintenance. When the setting is
selected, WiFi is automatically switched on for maintenance and any available configured
network is used.
Maintenance Interval defines in minutes how often maintenance is performed if the
measurement is in idle mode.
With the Nemo Handy Autonomous license, the phone will be automatically restarted after
every 10th maintenance session.
Note that Auto start must be switched on for the mobile to restart.
Unit Name defines the name of the unit (defined here or in Nemo Cloud). The name is shown
in the Automated testing status view and in Nemo Cloud. If the unit name is defined here, it will
be updated to Nemo Cloud along with reports.
Unit Prefix defines the prefix attached to the measurement file name.
Status SMS Number defines the number where SMS reports are sent to. SMS status
messages are sent when measurement session is started and stopped, and when doing
maintenance.
Error SMS Number defines the number where error reports are sent to. Applicable only when
Nemo Handy is used with the Nemo Autonomous Probe system. The possible error messages
are:
• No Packet Connection: check that APNs are configured correctly
• No Contact FTP: check that IP address is correct and that the server is running
• Cannot Login FTP: check that the server is running
• Invalid Configuration: check measurement configuration
• Configuration Not Found: check that the configuration file is available on the server
Measurement APN defines which APN is used for measurements.
Maintenance APN defines which APN is used for maintenance.
Use Session Color, if selected, displays a colored background on Automated testing views
(except when the color displays a status of for work example a work order from Nemo Cloud. If
this setting is not selected, the background of the view is white.
Nemo Autonomous Probe Mode, if selected, activates the Autonomous Probe mode (reboot
required). For more information, see Chapter “Nemo Autonomous Probe mode”.
When Periodic Restart is selected, the device is restarted after every 10th maintenance.
(Applicable only when Nemo Handy is used with the Nemo Autonomous Probe system)
Auto Start, if selected, automatically starts Nemo Handy in phone startup.
Maintenance data protocol
The protocol for maintenance data upload can be defined in the Maintenance data protocol
view. Define the protocol by selecting FTP, HTTPS, Dropbox, or SFTP.
If HTTPS is selected, there might be a need to create a configuration to define settings needed
for the file upload. In this case, please see Chapter “Defining measurement upload
configurations” for further information.
Nemo Autonomous Probe mode
When the Nemo Autonomous Probe mode is selected, tethering is turned on automatically
when application is started. Maintenance is always performed to local computer on the Nemo
Autonomous Probe (Embedded Linux) using the tethered connection. Server addresses in
configuration (FTP and SFTP) are not displayed in the Nemo Autonomous Probe mode,
configurations are made in the new settings described below. Otherwise operation is similar to
normal automated testing. Real-time reporting is switched on automatically when the Nemo
88
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Autonomous Probe mode is enabled and the Automated testing view displays the Nemo
Autonomous Probe addresses. The reporting interval is fixed to one minute.
When the Nemo Autonomous Probe mode is enabled, the GPS source is automatically
switched to Nemo Autonomous Probe GPS. This can be changed in Settings | GPS | GPS
Source by tapping the desired GPS source option.
When the Autonomous Probe mode is activated, new settings allowing the user to configure
Autonomous Probe remote server address, port, username, and password appear in the
Automated testing settings. In addition, when selecting Cloud Data Routing, all data traffic from
the device to Nemo Cloud is routed through Nemo Autonomous Probe.
These settings are written to an autoconfig file, and you can select whether to send the
settings to local server (Embedded Linux) using FTP connection. Note that if the Autonomous
Probe mode is used with Nemo Cloud, these settings are overwritten by the settings
configured in Nemo Cloud.
Maintenance FTP
The FTP server address needs to be entered manually. Select Menu | Settings |
Maintenance FTP and enter the FTP server information. If no server is set up, the log files will
be stored on the Nemo Handy terminal.
Address defines the IP address of the server.
Mode defines whether active or passive mode is used in FTP connection.
When this is done, tap Add Sessions on the Automated Testing Status and select
Maintenance as the session type and tap OK to initiate a maintenance session.
The Automated testing status view should look as the image below. Tap the Page Mode button
to switch between the different calendar and status views.
If the unit has never been used with the Nemo Server before, the Self-check view will look like
in the screen below.
89
Nemo Handy
User Guide
After about ten minutes, the unit has been automatically registered to server and is ready for
use. You can now copy new autoconfig.xml file to sdcard\Nemo\Handy manually.
Maintenance SFTP
The SFTP server address needs to be entered manually. Select Settings | Maintenance
SFTP and enter the SFTP server information. If no server is set up, the log files will be stored
on the Nemo Handy terminal.
Address defines the IP address of the server.
Scheduling maintenance and measurement sessions manually

Go to the Automated testing status view and tap Add Session to create a new maintenance or
measurement session. In the opening dialog box, select the session type from a drop-down
menu and tap OK.
Selecting the measurement session type opens the Measurement Session settings dialog box:
Start date, Start time, End date, and End time define the start and end date and time of the
measurement session.
Tap Session name to name the measurement session.
Tap Description to define description for the measurement session.
Script file opens a list of all available scripts, allowing you to select the script you want to run. If
there are no scripts in the view, you can browse for them. Select a script by tapping Select.
Select BTS File
Script repeats defines how many times the script will be run, defining the length of the
measurement session based on repeats rather than a fixed end time. For example, a voice call
can be defined to be performed 100 times after a defined start time. After the repeats have
been performed, Nemo Handy will upload the measurement file to the server. If script repeat is
set to
-1, the script is repeated for the duration the measurement session.
90
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Upload files after nested script defines whether measurement files are uploaded to the server
after nested script.
Wait after nested script upload (sec) defines the wait period in seconds after measurement
files have been uploaded to the server after nested script.
Measurement split duration (min) defines in minutes the splitting of the measurement session
into multiple log files. When set to -1, the whole measurement session will be gathered in one
log file.
Immobile limit (minutes) defines the measurement to be stopped after the probe has been
immobile for the defined time. The feature is disabled if the limit is set to 0 or if the GPS does
not have a fix.
No GPS fix limit (minutes) defines the measurement to be stopped after the GPS fix has been
lost for the defined number of minutes.
Logging
Answer incoming calls option allows Nemo Handy to answer incoming calls in automated
mode. Needed in mobile to mobile call testing.
Packet capture (Off/Enabled) When packet capture is enabled, Nemo Handy can utilize the
packet capture interface for getting certain specific KPIs without actually storing the PCAP log.
Use packet capture filter defines whether the packet capture filter is used
Packet capture filter – packet capture filtering is based on the Wireshark filters. For more
information, please refer, for example, to https://wiki.wireshark.org/CaptureFilters.
Session prefix defines the prefix of the measurement file created during the new measurement
session.
Capture When packet capture is in capture mode, a pcap log will be written together with the
measurement file
Session start SMS info, when set to Yes, defines an SMS to be sent to Nemo Cloud when the
measurement session has begun/ended. Applicable only when Nemo Handy is used with the
Nemo Autonomous Probe system.
Everyday session defines whether the measurement session is to be repeated every day (until
a different measurement configuration is received).
Manual mode allows you to define the measurement as a manual measurement session. In
manual mode, the measurement is started when an SMS command is sent to the terminal, or
Start is tapped on the calendar status view.
Send report to server defines whether a status report is to be uploaded to the server during the
maintenance session.
Send measurements to server defines whether measurement files are to be sent to the server
after the measurement session.
Load next config from server defines whether a configuration file is to be downloaded from the
server during the maintenance session.
Allow script connection defines when the phone is allowed to make voice calls and data
transfer attempts.
Always – The phone will make voice calls and data transfer attempts always, also in roaming
situation.
In service – The phone will make voice calls and data transfer attempts only when it finds a
network.
In home network – The phone will make voice calls and data transfer attempts only when it is
in the home network.
After the session settings have been defined, tap the Back button on your mobile device. A
dialog box prompting whether you want the changes saved to the server during the next
maintenance is displayed. Select Yes.
Selecting Maintenance session type opens the Maintenance Session settings dialog box.
Start date, Start time, End date, and End time define the start and end date and time of the
maintenance session.
The maintenance or measurement session is now displayed in the Session properties view
within the Automated testing status view. To edit an existing maintenance or measurement
session, tap Edit in the Session properties view. To delete a session, select Delete in the
Session properties view.
91
Nemo Handy
User Guide
The session is also displayed in the monthly and weekly view within the Automated testing
status view as a time scale, ranging from the start time to the end time. Tap Page Mode to
switch between views. To initiate a maintenance session manually, tap Maintenance in the
Control Center.
Manual start and stop

To enable manually-triggered measurements, set Manual mode to Yes in the Session settings
in Nemo Handy.
Tap Start in the session dialog box on the Calendar view to start the measurement and Stop
to stop the measurement and automatically perform maintenance.
SMS commands
When Nemo Handy is in automated testing mode, you are also able to start and stop
measurements, reboot the device, and perform maintenance remotely via SMS. Set Nemo
Handy to automated testing mode by selecting Settings | General and selecting the
Automated testing option. After this, schedule a measurement session from Session Settings
by going to the Calendar view and tapping . Set manual mode to Yes and select the script
you wish to run. SMS commands are sent to the phone number of the addressed field unit.
The message text defines the command. Available commands are listed below:
• Start measurement SMS:

• !SM prefix
Prefix defines the prefix added to the file name. Prefix can also be left blank, in which
case no prefix is added to the file name.
• Stop measurement SMS:

• !EM
• Device reboot SMS:

• !DR
92
Nemo Handy
User Guide
• Maintenance SMS:
• !N
You must specify in the following order which parts of the maintenance will be
performed: config loading, measurement file sending, report sending. 1=yes, 0=no.
E.g. !N1,1,1. Use commas to separate items.
Access point for maintenance and scripted connections

To change the Internet Access Point used for data connections during maintenance
(measurement file transfer and configuration file retrieval), please follow the terminal manual.
A valid Internet access point on the phone is required for Nemo Handy operations. If your
service contract does not include an access point, you will need to contact your service
provider. By default, Nemo Handy will use the phone's default access point.
Nemo Cloud work orders

This feature requires Nemo Cloud Work Order option on your Nemo Handy license.
Configuring automatic and work order projects and performing measurements of requires
enabling the automated testing mode in Nemo Handy.
In a work order project, the measurement project configuration is done fully in Nemo Cloud. In
a work order project, you configure all the needed scripts, inbuilding files, maps, and so on, to
the work orders. The engineer on the field can concentrate on performing the actual
measurements without the need to configure anything on the field. The difference between
automatic projects and work order projects is that instead of fixed measurement sessions, in a
work order project the end-user of the measurement device can select which work order to
perform at a chosen time, which gives more flexibility within the measurement project. Nemo
Cloud Work Orders can also be started and stopped from Nemo Cloud. This feature is
particularly useful when using, for instance, UAVs (drones) to perform measurements.
You can monitor the status of the measurement units and the actual work order project in
Nemo Cloud. You can also view and select work orders set in Nemo Cloud in the Automated
testing status view in Nemo Handy. Note that you must log into Nemo Cloud with the Nemo
Handy terminal.
Note that you need to perform the maintenance session manually in Nemo Handy
before you can view measurement sessions or work orders from Nemo Cloud.
To perform maintenance, go to the Status view in the Nemo Handy device and tap the
maintenance button ( ).
To view work orders from Nemo Cloud, go to the Automated testing status view. This view
displays the work orders assigned to this Nemo Handy unit. In the example below, there are
four work orders assigned to the Nemo Handy unit.
93
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Tapping Details displays information regarding the work order (configured in Nemo Cloud).
Return back to the view displaying the work orders by tapping twice (tapping this button
once displays the automated testing status).
Tap Activate to activate a work order. You can manually deactivate the work order by tapping
Complete after tapping Activate to select another work order. Note that tapping Complete
changes the work order state to Measurement done, and only after the measurement files are
sent to Nemo Cloud the work order state becomes Completed. Nemo Handy displays the work
orders activated once or more times in yellow.
The process flow with work orders starts with activating the work order. After activating the
work order, perform the measurements needed. After the measurement is done, the state of
the work order changes to Measurement done (displayed in yellow), and the measurement
files are uploaded to Nemo Cloud during a maintenance session. When the file upload is
successfully finished, the status of the work order changes to Completed (displayed in grey).
Work order statuses can be seen in Nemo Cloud as well. A completed work order can be
activated again if needed.
Voice quality testing

Please note that voice quality testing requires the voice quality license option.
Nemo Handy supports voice quality measurements based on POLQA (ITU-T Rec. P.863)
algorithm both in uplink and downlink directions. SWB (Super Wideband) and NB
(Narrowband) POLQA measurement modes are supported. Results are reported on MOS
(Mean Opinion Score) scale. The POLQA MOS scores are calculated in real-time in Nemo
Handy and displayed on the screen.
Please note that the Use dialer for calls option in Settings | General must be enabled with
voice quality measuring.
Go to Settings | Voice quality. Define the voice quality mode and select the sample file (see
Chapter “Voice quality settings”). Voice quality testing can also be performed using scripts.
With scripted voice quality testing, please ensure that the sample file used in the script is
available. If it is not available, the voice quality script command is skipped. To turn voice
quality testing off, select Off in the Voice quality mode field.
94
Nemo Handy
User Guide
POLQA NB/SWB mode selection

POLQA measurements can be performed in Super Wideband (SWB) or in Narrowband (NB)
mode. The mode is selected automatically based on the sample used, that is, if a wb sample is
selected, SWB POLQA measurement mode will be used. Respectively, if NB sample file is
selected, NB POLQA measurement mode will be used.
Note that SWB POLQA measurement mode should only be used with voice calls
where WB AMR codecs are used. WB AMR is used only in mobile-to-mobile voice
calls where in both ends the mobile is WB AMR capable and the WB AMR codec is
enabled in the network. Also, AMR WB codec must be activated from the AMR
codecs selection in forcing menu.
Voice quality testing in uplink+downlink mode

If you select the Uplink+downlink voice quality mode, you will need two terminals or one
terminal and a Nemo Server. Make sure you have the same settings (mode and sample) in
both ends. Also, activate the auto-answer mode in the terminals (Settings | General | Answer
incoming calls).
Make a voice call from one unit to the other. The units will be sending and receiving the
sample in turns until the voice call ends.
PEVQ-S video quality testing

Please note that PEVQ-S video quality testing requires the PEVQ-S video quality
testing license option.
PEVQ-S is an advanced framework algorithm developed by OPTICOM for full-reference video

quality analysis in adaptive streaming environments. It combines FR high accuracy video
quality measurements with real-time measurements.
Video quality measurement models can be classified into three categories:
• Full Reference (FR): Original uncompressed source (reference) is available to the
model
• Reduced Reference (RR): Only partial information about the reference is available to
the model
• No Reference (NR): No reference information is available to the mode.
In Nemo Handy PEVQ-S measurements can be performed within YouTube testing either
manually or in scripted testing.
Once the PEVQ-S testing is enabled, you can select among three preloaded video files placed
in phone\Nemo\Handy\Pevqs and run the measurement.
Nemo Server remote configuration

Nemo Handy can optionally communicate with Nemo Server to perform synchronized voice
quality testing. Communication is done over packet data connection using Nemo Server API
interface (HTTP API).
To perform communication with Nemo Server, go to Settings | Nemo Server config and
enable Nemo server configuration. For more Nemo server config settings, see Chapter “Nemo
Server Config Settings”.
In scripts, the Make Voice Call command sends Nemo Server a ServerWaitCall command that
includes the Nemo Server configuration settings, call duration, and an automatically generated
unique Call ID.
95
Nemo Handy
User Guide
The Receive Voice Call command sends Nemo Server a ServerMakeCall command that
includes the Nemo Server configuration settings, call duration, and an automatically generated
unique Call ID.
Forcing features
Nemo Handy supports band locking, cell locking, system locking, channel locking, scrambling
code (SC) locking, physical cell identity (PCI), and AMR codec activation.
Support for the locks is terminal-specific, so please refer to the Nemo Handy data sheet to see
which locks are supported by your test device. Please note that unless you deactivate forcing
features, they will stay active even if you exit Nemo Handy.
Note that the forcing function settings differ slightly when the terminal’s ICD version
is 5.11 or newer. You can check the ICD version of your terminal under Device
information in Menu | About | Version.
Select Menu | Forcing.
The Forcing page opens with fields for system lock, band lock, channel lock, GSM channel
lock, scrambling code lock, and AMR codec activation.
Note that some of these functionalities are available only if your Nemo Handy device
supports them.
The Status view displays the status for the different locks.
System lock
To activate the system lock, tap the System field. Next, select a system from the pop-up
menu. Tap Activate to lock the device to the selected system(s).
Note that GSM WCDMA and GSM WCDMA Auto both do the same thing. There is
no difference between how they function.
Band lock
To activate the band lock, tap the Bands field. Select a band and/or system from the Select
bands dialog box.
All supported bands from the systems supported by the terminal are displayed. However, the
terminal does not necessarily support all the listed bands. If you are trying to lock the phone to
a band that the phone does not support, the phone will revert back to default. Band lock
overrides the system lock when used simultaneously. For example, if you lock to the WCDMA
2100 band, you cannot choose the GSM system lock.
Tap Activate to confirm the selection.
Please note that the lock is not released by rebooting the device or by exiting Nemo
Handy. The lock can only be released with Nemo Handy. If the device requires a
reboot, a notification is displayed automatically.
GERAN/GSM carrier lock

Phone locks to a GSM carrier based on the selected carrier and band. To activate the carrier
lock, tap the ARFCN field.
In the GERAN carrier lock dialog box you can select the GSM carrier and the band.
96
Nemo Handy
User Guide
If your serving system is currently GMS, tapping PICK opens a dialog box in which you can
select the target cell where to lock the UE.
UTRAN/WCDMA carrier lock

Phone locks to a WCDMA carrier and scrambling code. To activate the carrier lock, tap the
UARFCN field. In the UTRAN carrier lock dialog box you can select the WCDMA carrier and
the scrambling code where to lock the UE.
If your serving system is currently WCDMA, tapping PICK opens a dialog box in which you can
EUTRAN/LTE carrier lock, LTE cell lock

Phone locks to LTE cell based on selected Channel and PCI (Physical Cell ID). To activate cell
lock, tap LTE PCI field. In LTE PCI lock dialog box you can define values for EARFCN and
PCI.
If your serving system is currently LTE, tapping PICK opens a dialog box in which you can
Please note that system lock to LTE only must be activated prior to activating LTE
PCI lock.
Please note that LTE cell lock works with selected terminals, such as Samsung
Galaxy S4 4G+, Samsung Galaxy Note 3, Samsung Galaxy Note 3 (T-Mobile) and
Note 10.1 2014 Edition.
Please note that both channel and PCI must be selected. Only cell lock is supported,
not LTE channel/ carrier lock.
AMR codec activation

To activate the AMR codec, tap the AMR codecs field.
Select AMR codec from the Select AMR codecs dialog box and tap the return button.
Please note that some device models need to be powered off and on to activate the
AMR Codec. If the device requires a reboot, a notification is displayed automatically.
Supported chipsets
Nemo Handy supports Qualcomm and Samsung Shannon chipsets. The locking features (see
*) differ between the two chipsets:
Qualcomm Samsung Shannon

System lock (RAT) System lock (RAT)
Band lock Band lock
ARFCN ARFCN/ GSM carrier
UARFCN + scrambling code UARFCN + scrambling
code/ UMTS carrier
EARFCN + PCI EARFCN + PCI/ LTE carrier
AMR codec
97
Nemo Handy
User Guide
*The forcing/locking features are device specific.
Forcing features of Samsung Shannon chipset

Select Menu | Forcing. Select the system, band, and other forcing features if desired, and tap
ACTIVATE. System lock is used the same way as with Qualcomm. For more info, see Chapter
“System lock”.
Please note that your locking settings may take some time to load.
Select the system you wish to lock. The options are: GSM WCDMA, GSM Only, WCDMA,
GSM WCDMA Auto, LTE GSM WCDMA, and LTE Only. In band lock it is possible to select
only one band at a time.
GSM channel lock (ARFCN)

With GSM Channel Lock Nemo Handy can be locked on a GSM channel. Select Menu |
Forcing | ARFCN. Tap the Not Locked field to activate GSM channel lock.
The Geran carrier lock dialog box opens. Enter the number of the channel that you want to
lock to and tap OK. To select a GSM band, tap the Band field.
Note that System must be switched to GSM Only for ARFCN lock to show as an
option. For channel lock the device must be in idle mode.
WCDMA carrier lock (UARFCN)

With the WCDMA Carrier Lock the mobile can be locked on a UMTS carrier and a scrambling
code. Select Menu | Forcing | UARFCN/SCR. Tap the Not Locked field to activate the
WCDMA carrier lock. Scrambling code may get an undefined value: the device changes
scrambling code freely, while being locked to a specific carrier.
The Utran carrier lock dialog box opens. Enter the number of the carrier (UARFCN) and the
scrambling code that you want to lock to, and tap Lock. Tap Pick to pick a cell.
Note that System must be switched to WCDMA for UARFCN/SCR lock to show as
an option. For WCDMA carrier lock the device must be in idle or connected mode.
LTE carrier lock (EARFCN/PCI)

Device reboot required.
With the LTE carrier Lock the mobile can be locked to a carrier. Select Menu | Forcing |
EARFCN. Select Menu | Forcing | EARFCN. Tap the Not Locked field to activate the carrier
lock. PCI may get an undefined value: the device changes PCI freely, while being locked to a
specific carrier.
The Eutran carrier lock dialog box opens. Enter the number of the carrier (EARFCN) and the
PCI that you want to lock to, and tap Lock. Tap Pick to pick a cell.
98
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Note that System must be switched to LTE for EARFCN lock to show as an option.
For carrier lock the device must be in idle or connected mode.
Forcing features with Samsung Shannon chipset-based devices with ICD 5.11 or
newer
In Samsung Shannon chipset terminals with ICD version 5.11 or newer, the forcing functions
need to configured slightly differently.
Once you select the system, Nemo Handy automatically displays all the system-specific bands
supported by the terminal in question.
Note that only one lock can be active at a time, if you set another lock the previous
one will be released when the new lock becomes active.
You can define either the channel number or the cell number, it is not possible to define both
at the same time.
IP capture
Application-level data can be captured with Nemo Handy. The data is collected in a separate
log file in .pcap format. Pcap files can be processed with Nemo Outdoor, Nemo Analyze, or
Wireshark. By default, full IP capture, including IP and all above layers are captured. Pcap log
files can be very large if no filtering is applied. Therefore, it is practical in most cases to apply
filtering to capture only the protocol layers of interest. Capture filter rules are read from a text
file. Rules must be defined in the standard Wireshark filter format.
IP capture enables/disables IP packet capturing.
When packet capture is enabled, Nemo Handy can utilize the packet capture interface for
getting certain specific KPIs without actually storing the PCAP log.
When packet capture is in capture mode, a pcap log will be written together with the
measurement file.
IP capture interfaces enables selecting which interface to use for IP capture. Note that if
WLAN is selected and the device´s WLAN is then turned off, the selected interface´s mode
changes to default mode “any”.
IP capture max packet size defines how many bytes to capture from each packet.
IP capture filter defines whether captured packets are filtered.
IP capture filter rules allows you to define IP capture filter rules. The rules must be placed in
the root directory (/Nemo/Handy/) as a text file with .txt ending.
IP capture is started whenever you start logging with Nemo Handy and stopped when logging
is stopped. You can upload IP capture files to a server by selecting Upload packet capture
files in the Log file name dialog box that appears when you stop logging.
Indoor measurements
You can view indoor maps in Nemo Handy and plot the measurement route on the map with
markers or use GPS if available.
99
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Importing maps and defining map settings

If this is the first time you are performing indoor measurements with Nemo Handy, you will
need to import an indoor map (i.e. a floorplan) to Nemo Handy as an image file. The supported
formats are .jpeg, .gif, and .png.
Transfer the image file (for example Floorplan.jpg) to the phone/Nemo/Handy/Maps folder on
the internal memory card of your Nemo Handy terminal by using for example a Bluetooth or a
cable connection.
You can also take a photo of, for example, an emergency exit plan with the Nemo Handy
mobile phone camera and use it as an indoor map.
In Nemo Handy, tap the Menu button ( ) and select Settings | Indoor | Floorplans. Tap
ADD to choose .tab file, import a map or take a picture to be used as floorplan.
Once you have selected a file or a map, a dialog box prompting whether you want to copy floor
position from another floorplan is displayed.
• When selecting Yes, a list of previously imported floorplans is opened, and you can
choose the floorplan from which the floor position is copied to the new floorplan.
• When selecting No, the dialog box closes, and the new floorplan is imported without
added floor position information.
If this is the first time you are performing indoor measurements, Nemo Handy will generate a
MapInfo file (.tab) based on the image file. Next time you make measurements and use the
same map, Nemo Handy will use the .tab file automatically. A MapInfo map always consists of
two files: a MapInfo .tab file and an image file.
The resulting floorplan (.tab) will be listed on the Floorplans page. You can have several
floorplans loaded at the same time. For example, you can have a floorplan from each of the
floors of a building. Select a file and tap UP and DOWN to rearrange to order of the floors on
the map. When Use map name as floor name option is selected, added floors are
automatically named after the floorplan file. If the option is not selected, the floors are named
in the following manner: “Floor 1”, “Floor 2”, etc.
If there already exist added floors with different names that do not match with the map file
name and Use map name as floor name is selected, a dialog prompting whether the user
wants to change the floor names to match the map file names appears. By clicking Yes, all
added floor names will be renamed.
Floorplan settings
On the Floorplan settings page you can define the dimensions of the floorplan and select a
route plan. The page is opened by selecting a floorplan on the Floorplans page and tapping
Edit.
100
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Layer Name defines the floorplan name. The name can be edited.
Select the Display Route Plan option to display a route plan on the indoor map.
Route Plan defines the route plan file (.rpf) displayed on the indoor map.
File Type (Metric/Geodetic) defines whether the floorplan dimensions are defined in meters
(width/height) or in geodetic coordinates.
Width defines the floorplan width in meters. Nemo Handy enters a default value (number of
pixels in the image divided by ten) for the field, but you should enter the correct value.
Height defines the floorplan height in meters. Nemo Handy enters a default value (number of
The following settings are only visible when the file type is set as geodetic:
Longitude defines the geodetic coordinates of the left and right sides of the map.
Enter coordinates in decimal degrees (for example, 25.4714).
Latitude defines the geodetic coordinates of the top and bottom sides of the map.
When adding new indoor maps (that is, floorplans) in Indoor settings, you can define a
georeferenced indoor map position on the world map by tapping Georegister. See
“Georeferenced indoor map” for more information.
Next, define indoor settings, see Chapter “Indoor settings” for more information.
After this, you are ready to begin measurements.
Importing iBwave maps
iBwave is a third-party indoor planning tool. iBwave has a proprietary indoor map format
(.ibwc) with floorplans for every floor of a building, indoor coverage overlay, and antenna
array/cabling visualization.
101
Nemo Handy
User Guide
If this is the first time you are performing indoor measurements with iBwave maps, you will
need to import iBwave map files (.ibwc) to Nemo Handy. Please refer to iBwave
documentation on how to create iBwave maps that can be imported to Nemo Handy. Transfer
the files to the phone/Nemo/Handy/Maps folder on the internal memory card of your Nemo
Handy terminal by using for example a Bluetooth connection, or a cable connection.
In Nemo Handy, select Settings | Indoor and tap Import iBwave maps to choose or import a
map (.ibwc file). If the map file contains several buildings, choose one of them.
The floorplans (.tab) are listed on the Floorplans page. Select a floorplan and tap UP and
DOWN to rearrange to order of the floors on the map. Select a floor/tab file and tap Edit.
On the floorplan settings page you can select a route plan to be displayed on the map.
Next, define indoor settings, see “Indoor settings” for more information. After this, you are
ready to begin the measurements.
Performing Indoor Measurements

First, make the map page visible by going to Settings | Page Settings | Map. Select Show
Page and tap the back key.
Next, in controller tablet, load the floorplan on top of the map in Settings | Indoor | Floorplan.
Tap and hold the button on the upper left corner of the map view displaying the name of the
floorplan and select the floor from the opening menu. Tapping EXIT BUILDING removes the
floorplan from the map but leaves the floorplan area marked in red. To reopen the floorplan,
tap and hold the red area.
Tapping the name of the floorplan locates the floorplan on the map. If the floorplan is not
visible, zoom in on the map. The zoom level may have to be over 17 for the floorplan to be
displayed. You can rotate the map/floorplan by placing two fingers on the screen and turning
the fingers in a circular movement on the screen. Center the map on your current location by
tapping .
To start, pause and stop a measurement, slide up the Control Center and select Start
Measurement/Pause/Stop. After pausing you can resume logging by tapping Resume
Measurement on the Control Center.
You can also use the shortcut buttons visible on the Control Center to start, pause and stop
measurements, take screenshots, and add markers and favourite pages.
Adding markers
You can add markers to the log file to mark points of interest during the measurement. A good
practice in indoor measurement is to add a marker when starting walking and when stopping
walking, and, when starting walking again, adding a new marker in the same location.
When logging, you can draw a route on the map by placing markers along the route by tapping
on the toolbar. Tap and hold on top of a location to add a marker. Alternatively, position
the green cross on top of the location and tap . You can also add different types of
102
Nemo Handy
User Guide
markers by selecting Add Marker | Add Marker/Add Textual Marker/Add Predefined

Marker/Add Photo Marker on the Control Center.
You are also able to see the marker sequence number at any time by tapping on the marker.
To remove last added marker, tap .
If the Draw route setting is selected in the Map settings, the markers will be connected to form
a route. Note also that Nemo Handy must be logging for you to be able to place markers on
the route.
You can view the measured route with color-coded parameter values in real-time on indoor
maps. You can also observe the values of user-configurable network parameters from the
route coloring on the map and define which color refers to which parameter value.
Note that if the Parameter item is not visible in the indoor map menu, go to Settings
| Map and enable Indicate Parameter on Route Color, tap Route Color to define the
route color, and select a route parameter.
Select a parameter and the route will be colored accordingly.
Route Plan Editor
Route Plan Editor view is available only with the additional Advanced Indoor Analysis
license option.
You can create a predetermined route before indoor measurements in the Route Plan Editor.
Once you have selected the floorplan you need, on the map view, tap More Actions ( )|
Route Plan Editor.
The Route Plan Editor opens.
103
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Insert markers to indicate the route to be measured. The latest added marker is identified with
the black-and-white flag to indicate the direction of the route.
Once you have created the route, save the route by tapping on the save icon. Name the route
file and tap OK.
You can create a new route by tapping the icon. Once you have created and saved all the
routes you wish to create, select Menu | Close Route Plan Editor.
To edit existing route plans, open the route plan editor, tap Menu | Import file and select the
file you wish to edit. The route is opened on the route plan editor and you can edit the route.
Note that you need to select Draw route in the Indoor map settings to be able to view the
route. Once the route plan editor is closed, the route you created is displayed on the floorplan
in grey.
Start logging by tapping Start Measurement in the Control Center. The first marker of the
route is displayed in red. Once you have moved to the location of the second marker, tap the
add marker button ( ). The second marker is now displayed in red. By each marker, tap
the add marker to move to the next marker on the map.
Once the measurement is stopped, name and save the file as usual. You can view the results
on the route.
Tap Menu | Close Route Plan Editor to close the Route Plan Editor.
Georeferenced indoor map
georeferenced indoor map position on the world map. When using georeferenced indoor
maps, indoor map and OpenStreet Map are displayed one upon another on the Map page.
In Nemo Handy, tap the Menu button ( ). Next, select Settings | Indoor and tap
Floorplans.
Select an indoor map from the list or add a new one by tapping ADD. Once an indoor map has
been selected, tap EDIT on the toolbar.
The tab file settings view opens. Select Geodetic as File type, if not defined yet. Scroll down
and tap Georegister.
104
Nemo Handy
User Guide
New map view activity opens with selected indoor map.
Select a map location by tapping and holding your finger on top of a map to move the floorplan
to the new location. Adjust the indoor map size using the arrow icons on each side of the map.
Alternatively, set the longitude and latitude in the tab file settings.
Tap the Map lock ( ) button to lock the OpenStreetMap map in its position. This enables
scaling, rotating, and moving the indoor map on top without accidentally moving the
OpenStreetMap.
While the map is locked, Go to GPS location, Go to building location and Go to address
location buttons are disabled.
Go to GPS location ( ) jumps to current building location, if there is no GPS fix shown.
Go to building location icon ( ) jumps to current building location.
Go to address location ( ) opens a dialog box in which you can define address location
(address, postal code, city, county, state, and country).
When tapping SAVE, a dialog box prompting whether you want to overwrite the last position
appears. Select NO/YES.
to the new location.
Displaying floorplan on a satellite map
To display the floorplan on a satellite map, select Menu ( ) | Settings | Map and select
Satellite as the Google Map type. Next, go to Settings | Indoor, tap Floorplans, select a
floorplan from the list and tap EDIT. Set file type as geodetic and tap Georegister.
Tap SAVE and select Yes to accept the new position to be written in the tab file. If there are
one or more floors added, a dialog box is shown prompting the user whether they want to copy
current floor position to all existing floor. To discard new position, tap the Back button of the
device and select Yes in the possible following dialog box. The dialog box opens when
information of the floorplan’s location or size has been changed without saving the changes. If
there have been no changes or the changes made have already been saved, tapping the Back
button of the device leads straight to Tab file settings.
105
Nemo Handy
User Guide
You can modify existing geocoded floorplans if needed by tapping EDIT again.
Automated location mapping

Automated location mapping automatically displays the actual test route and location when
performing indoor measurement.
1. Install the Neon Command setup and start the application. Sign in with the username and
password.
2. In Neon Command, upload and geocode your floorplan. For more information, see Neon
Command documentation.
3. Download NeonLocationServiceStandalone .apk file and install it on your handset. Accept
possible updates, power the external TRX Neon tracking module and pair the devices from
the handset´s Bluetooth settings.
4. Start Nemo Handy, go to Settings | GPS and make sure that Internal GPS is selected as
GPS Source.
5. For a first-time login to NeonLocationServiceStandalone, select Settings | Indoor | Neon
floorplan. Log in with your Neon Command username and password. Tap Neon settings
and select the TRX tracking device in Neon floorplan settings.
6. In Neon Floorplans view, click Add. A dialog box prompting whether to download Neon
Floorplan by Address or Current location opens. Select your method of download. This will
download the floorplan (i.e. a .tab file and a .pdf file created by Neoncommander.exe) to
Nemo Handy.
7. Name the file in the dialog box that opens.
8. Make sure the tracking module is attached to a belt, or the top of your pants. The tracking
module does not work as well when you place it in a pocket because it can move around
and affect the step detection. Neon tracks you best when the tracking module is mounted
to the front of your body where you would wear a pager, or in the center of the back.
9. Start the measurement by tapping Start Measurement in the Control Center. After starting
measurements indoors, manually pinpoint your initial location on the map by tapping the
pin icon. After this, define the heading by walking 10 meters and pinpoint your location
again by tapping the pin icon.
10. Once the starting point is set, start walking through the route. Stop logging by tapping
Stop in the Control Center. Once the logging is stopped, you can choose whether to keep,
rename, or delete the resulting log file. The saved log files along with captured
screenshots and indoor marker files are saved to File explorer (see Chapter “File explorer”
for more information).
Automatic indoor positioning using augmented reality sensors (ARcore)
This functionality is available only with the indoor positioning option.
To use this functionality, you must have a Google account configured and ARCore
Element package installed from the Google Play Store on your device.
Nemo Handy needs to be on foreground when this feature is being used. This
means, that e.g., YouTube and browser testing cannot be used during in-building
measurements.
Automatic indoor positioning enables locating a Nemo Handy device in spaces where GPS
cannot be used, i.e., indoors. Automatic indoor positioning significantly reduces the measuring
time when compared to placing markers manually as only two reference markers need to be
placed manually on map at the beginning of the measurement.
106
Nemo Handy
User Guide
1. Begin by creating a georeferenced indoor map, see “Georeferenced indoor map” for
instructions. Make sure you map the real-world coordinates correctly. Note that you can also
do this without an indoor map if the venue you are measuring is clearly visible on Google or
OSM maps. Even outdoor measurements by foot can be performed in a limited area.
2. Place the indoor map floorplan to the map as precisely as possible.
3. Start logging or scripting.
4. In Nemo Handy, go to the Map page. Tap More Actions ( ) and tap Start Indoor
Positioning.
5. The map view is opened. Move to a place that you can easily find in the real world, such as
a corner or close to a door. Display the environment to the device camera by moving the
device around in a calm manner while keeping the device at a 45-degree angle.
6. Very carefully, place two reference markers in locations at least a few meters, preferably
around 10 meters (around 32 feet) from each other and move your actual position accordingly.
Note that while the positioning is extremely accurate, if the two markers are not placed
accurately on the map, the exact location cannot be shown.
After the initial calibration, you can continue walking and the markers will be automatically
placed on the map as you walk.
107
Nemo Handy
User Guide
If the device informs you that the route has been lost, move backward to find the route. Th
route can be lost for example if the environment is too dark, if you go too close to a wall or to a
location where the camera cannot distinguish details of the surface. It can also be caused by a
user error, e.g., a finger placed in front of the camera.
iBwave Planner
Nemo Handy enables exchanging project information directly between iBwave Planner
and Nemo Handy. iBwave Planner and Nemo Handy both run on the same device, using the
IBWC file as a common medium. This enables the user to create a floor plan in iBwave
Planner, switch to Nemo Handy for the measurements and then switch back to iBwave
Planner to create preliminary design.
Please note that iBwave Planner should be installed on a terminal that has Nemo
Handy installed on it.
1. Start IBWave Planner (Nemo Handy can run on the background) to make your indoor
design planning.
108
Nemo Handy
User Guide
2. In iBwave Planner, tap on the survey button on bottom right corner to launch Nemo
Handy. In Nemo Handy, select the correct building from your project file (you can have
several buildings in your iBwave project file).
3. The Floorplan view opens. This view enables you to change the order of the floors or
remove entire floors if the building has several.
The Map page displays the floor that is highest on the list. If you wish to select another
floor to be displayed on the Map page, tap and hold a button displaying the name of the
floor, for example Floor 1, on the upper left corner of the Map page.
4. Tap OK to confirm your selection. The page that was previously viewed is automatically
opened in Nemo Handy. In Nemo Handy, start logging by tapping Menu | Start
logging.
5. Go to the Map page and place a marker by tapping and holding on top of the desired
location. Alternatively, tap . All current information is collected to the survey
whenever a marker is added to the map.
6. Stop logging by tapping Stop on the Control Center. A dialog box prompting what to do
with the log file is displayed.
7. Select Export iBwave survey and tap Export to export the measurements to iBwave
Planner. iBwave Planner opens. After exporting measurements from Nemo Handy, you
can perform a new test in another location.
109
Nemo Handy
User Guide
8. In the iBwave Planner, you can choose what information you want to import to your
project. Tap Import on the top right corner of the page to import selected
measurements to iBwave Planner.
9. You can view your results by going to the correct building and floor in the planner tool.
The results can be viewed as measurements on the map.
The Draw zones (on/off) setting can be enabled in Indoor settings. The zones are used
in iBwave project files as one layer that will be drawn on top of the indoor floorplan. The
zone layer information is stored in the iBwave project file. Zones are used for example
for drawing areas for DAS antenna groups to graphically show where a certain cell is
transmitting.
110
Nemo Handy
User Guide
After the measurements have been performed, stop the measurement by tapping
Stop on the Control Center.
It is possible to use the iBwave floorplan information as part of the measurement file
name. The file names indicate the used map GUID, and to indicate a floor, entrance,
or exit you can choose FLR (floor), ENT (entrance), or EXT (exit) prefix from the
pulldown menu by tapping Rename. Tap the iBwave prefix field to open the
pulldown menu. Notice that before this feature is shown, you need to have an iBwave
project file loaded and route markers set in your measurement.
Distributed antenna systems (DAS)

Testing and verifying DAS antennas is possible with the DAS Anomalies feature which enables
you to view indoor small cell antennas and transmitters on the indoor map in real time by using
either iBwave indoor plans or our BTS file. While marking your route during walking
measurements you are able to verify whether different antennas are transmitting or not. A
visual notification (red/green) is displayed in the indoor map indicating whether the current
DAS antenna is transmitting.
Note that this functionality requires an additional licensing option (Advanced Indoor
Analysis).
First, make the map page visible by going to Settings | Page settings | Map. Select Show
page and tap the Back key of the device. Load a floorplan on top of the map in Settings |
Indoor | Floorplan.
Activate the DAS Anomalies feature by going to Menu | Settings | Indoor and selecting DAS
Anomalies.
Tap DAS Anomalies Settings to open the DAS Anomalies Settings view.
111
Nemo Handy
User Guide
With CELL/ANTENNA TESTABLE WHEN MATCHING can select which method is used for
activating a cell or and antenna for testing. Antenna is available for testing when the chosen
parameters are valid. For example, if you select System and channel, you must have that
information either in your base station (BTS) or iBwave file. The pulldown menu contains the
following options:
To define the radius of the test area, tap on the Radius field and insert a value.
To define the hue of the circle marking the test area, move the blue dot along the blue line
under Color alpha.
To set the signal limits for acceptable test values, tap on the respective fields and insert a
value.
The test results are shown on the indoor map as green and red circles according to your
settings.
112
Nemo Handy
User Guide
BTS Editor view

BTS Editor view is available only with the additional Advanced Indoor Analysis
license option.
BTS Editor enables users to create BTS files in an easy manner directly in Nemo Handy. This
feature enables adding base stations and antennas to indoor maps and is useful to users who
are building indoor coverage network to for example different buildings, malls, and so forth.
Creating BTS files in Nemo Handy:

1. Go to Map page when the device is not logging or playbacking. Tap More Actions (
) | BTS Editor.
2. Load a floorplan to the BTS Editor by selecting Settings | Indoor and tap Floorplans.
Select an indoor map from the list or add a new one by tapping the plus button on the
toolbar. Once an indoor map has been selected, add geodetic coordinates to the
floorplan if needed by tapping Edit. The tab file settings view opens.
3. Select Geodetic as File type. After this, return to the Map page. You are able to rotate
and scale the floorplan on top of the OSM.
4. When you want to add a new DAS antenna, Small Cell antenna or a Macro Cell, and so
forth, move the map cursor on top of the desired location and tap the plus button.
113
Nemo Handy
User Guide
The Cell Properties dialog box appears.
5. Tapping OK in the Cell properties dialog box adds a BTS Cell or an indoor marker on
top of the location where the cursor is. When location is added, a popup of the serving
cell should be shown by default.
6. Check that the pre-filled serving cell parameter values are correct. In cell properties
dialog box you are able to pick cell properties from current serving cells, neighbor cells,
or existing cells in BTS DB. If some mandatory parameters are invalid, you are able to
select cell values using Serving, Neighbors, or Existing buttons. The values can also be
added by hand.
7. You can move already existing BTS markers by pressing and holding and dragging
them (move cell to the new location text is shown when marker can be moved).
Tapping a BTS marker opens a list containing other editing tools: Edit, Create DAS,
and Delete.
• When tapping Edit, the same Cell properties dialog box is opened that has
previously been filled for the selected BTS cell properties.
• Create DAS creates DAS antenna in the same cell properties as the selected cell,
except location and cell type is DAS. DAS is created on top of the location where
cursor is at that time.
• Delete deletes the selected cell.
8. Tap the New () button to remove all existing BTS cells on the map and BTS database.
Tap Yes to confirm your selection,
9. Tap the Save ( ) button and enter filename to save current BTS database
information in an .nbf file. Also already created .nbf files can edited by load then in
Settings.
10. To close BTS editor and return to normal Nemo Handy state, select Menu | Close BTS
Editor.
Outdoor measurements
Page and tap the Back key of the device.
114
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Define map settings by going to the Map settings view by selecting Settings | Map (see
Chapter “Map settings”).
Start a measurement by tapping Start Measurement on the Control Center.
You can view the maps in Nemo Handy and plot a measurement route on the map with
markers. Tap More Actions ( ) and select Show GPS under Map Route Type. When
Show GPS is selected, Nemo Handy uses GPS for route marking (recommended for outdoor
measurements).
To observe different parameters, tap the parameters box at the bottom left of the screen. The
parameters and the related color sets are user configurable. See Chapter “Defining route
parameters” for defining custom route parameters and color sets.
Stop logging by tapping Stop on the Control Center. Once the logging is stopped, you can
choose whether to Keep, Rename, or Delete the resulting log file. The saved log files along
with captured screenshots and indoor marker files are saved to File explorer (see Chapter “File
explorer” for more information).
BTS information on a map

With Nemo Handy you can view BTS icons on a map. Open a map and go to Menu | Settings
| BTS. Select Show BTS and define the color for active system BTS icons, other BTS icons,
and active cell.
Select a BTS file and select Use BTS file. If you wish to see detailed information about the
individual cells, tap the Cell info item and select the information to be displayed.
A map with the BTS site icons is displayed. During measurement, the BTS that the
measurement device is connected to is highlighted with the color that you selected for Active
cell in the Outdoor settings page.
The terminal needs to have a GPS fix and the zoom factor needs to be at least 8
before the BTS icons are displayed.
115
Nemo Handy
User Guide
To display BTS focus button in the map, Show BTS in Map Settings must be selected.
Tapping the BTS focus button adjusts zoom level automatically to 13, which best displays BTS
icons on the map, and focuses map to the location of BTS icons.
To view information on individual cells, tap a BTS icon, and from the Select sector dialog box,
select a sector.
Cell information for the selected sector will be displayed on the map.
Select Menu | Show BTS data to view a list of all BTS sites in the current BTS file.
Line drawing on the map for serving cell

Nemo Handy supports line drawing to the serving cell BTS icon on the map. Line drawing can
be activated from Settings | Outdoor | Draw serving line(s).
116
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Use case 1 – A map with route, BTS, and notification icons

This use case describes how to play back a measurement file on a map and to view BTS icons
and notification icons on the map.
Select Settings | Page settings and make the map page visible. Go to Settings | Map, select
On for the Show notification icons on map option and Always for the Draw route option.
Make sure that you have a GPS connected to the system or use the terminal’s internal GPS.
Select Settings and go to the GPS page. Select a GPS in the GPS source field.
Next, select the BTS file. Select Settings and go to the BTS page. Select a BTS file, and
select the Use BTS file option. Make sure that the BTS file matches the SIM card you are
using in the Nemo Handy terminal. They must from the same operator. Also, note that the BTS
file needs to be from the same area where you made the measurement.
Close the Settings dialog box and go the map view. Select Menu | File explorer. Select a
measurement file and select Menu | Play. Once the file has been loaded, the route and
notification icons will appear on the map. If the BTS files are not visible, check that your
terminal has a GPS fix and that the zoom factor is at least 17.
KML files displayed on a map

KML is an XML formatted language used by Google Earth, Google Maps, and other programs
to allow geo-spatial data to be rendered. WIth KML, you can highlight routes, areas, such as
network cells, clusters, etc. with shading coloring.
To create a .kml file from your data, visit

https://developers.google.com/kml/documentation/kml_tut for more information. You may also
download a .kml file directly to your Nemo Handy device. Next, go to the Map view, tap the
More Actions icon and tap ADD KLM(S).
117
Nemo Handy
User Guide
The Add a KML layer page opens. Nemo Handy will automatically find every .kml file in the
device and display them in a dialog box. Select a file from the list and the selected file will be
drawn on top a map and zoomed to the correct location based on the coordinates defined in the
.kml file.
Tap the More Actions Icon and tap the Locate button ( ) to open the Locate layer dialog.
To locate a kml layer, select a layer by tapping on the layer name, you can also remove a layer
from the map by tapping the trash can icon in the Locate layer dialog. The locate layer button is
useful when you have drawn many kml layers.
Site verification testing

Site verification testing is available only with the site verification license option.
Site verification can be used for antenna health checks. To perform site verification testing,
make sure first that you have a BTS file with range information included available on your
Nemo Handy device.
1. In Nemo Handy, navigate to the Site Verification page and enable site verification test.
118
Nemo Handy
User Guide
2. Tap Go to map to open the map view. Select a site for testing by tapping on the site
location on the map. Select a cell to be tested from the opening dialog displaying all cells from
the same and the system.
When a sector is selected, the outline of the sector is highlighted in blue.
119
Nemo Handy
User Guide
3. Once you have selected a sector of a cell, tap Select Test to select the test type.
There are three types of tests available:

• Stationary test is performed to one BTS cell on that specific location. Stationary test
includes signal strength, signal noise ratio (LTE only), transfer test (both for uplink and
downlink), ping, and call test. The test succeeds when all the separate test types (call
test, data transfer test, and ping test) activated in Settings | Site verification are
tested successfully without even one of the selected test types failing. The progress of
the stationary test can be monitored on the Site Verification page.
• Intertest is for testing cell handovers between two cells by using a voice call test.
When performing intertest, follow the instructions on the map view. To perform
intertest, select a cell and physically move to the area highlighted on the map. Once
you are inside the area, Nemo Handy instructs you to start the test and on how to
proceed with the test. Nemo Handy informs you once the test is completed.
• Intratest tests every cell displayed on the map. To perform the intratest, select the
cell, and physically go to the area highlighted on the map. Once you are inside the
area, Nemo Handy instructs you to start the test. Start the test and follow the
instructions displayed on the Nemo Handy user interface. The test is passed if all the
cells change to active state when you enter the highlighted area. If even one of the
cells does not become active, the test fails.
120
Nemo Handy
User Guide
In the image below, stationary test has been selected as the test type.
To start testing, tap Start Test. If you wish to change the test type, tap Change Test. When
performing a stationary test, you must physically enter inside the highlighted area before being
able to start the test. Follow the instructions on the screen to perform the test.
Tap Mark to mark current selected cell to cross feeder problem. Tap Unmark to unmark
current selected cross feeder problem cell. The marked cross feeder cells are shown on the
Site Verification page in red.
121
Nemo Handy
User Guide
The tests can be aborted by tapping Stop Test.
Backup files are created for all main test results for each site cell, and these files are saved
until the PDF report is created. These backup files are in the Nemo/Handy/SiteVerification
folder in the phone’s external storage. The backup files are overwritten only when the
corresponding tests are redone and only the latest test results are saved. This means that the
Site Verification test does not need to be done in one go.
When the tests are finished, you can create a PDF report of the test results by tapping Create
Report. The PDF report is saved in the Results folder. If you need to abort the report creation,
do not remove the backup files from Nemo Handy before you have successfully created the
report another time.
Navigation application
Navigation application is a software-based solution in which a third-party navigation application

is used. The application provides the possibility to get turn-by-turn instructions for your drive
test campaigns. Also, repetitive drive test can be made and at the same time make sure that
the correct roads are being measured
Nemo Cloud can be used to create and plan your measurement campaigns and routes. Nemo
Cloud is not mandatory though as you can use any other software that can produce a GPX file.
If the route plan for the drive test is made with Nemo Cloud, route plan(s), together with other
measurement related information like scripts, are passed over the air from Nemo Cloud to the
measurement units on the field. Once the route has been loaded, you can upload it to the
navigation application.
Go to Settings | OTA Updates and select Check for Navigation App Updates. Download
and install the application.
122
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Import the GPX route through a Nemo Cloud work order or by going to Settings | Map |
Import GPX Route to select a GPX file.
Scroll down to Navigation Settings and enable Navigation Floating Controls to display the
navigation floating window through which navigation is controlled.
When the GPX file has been imported, a floating navigation icon ( ) is displayed on the
screen. You can drag the icon across the screen using your finger.
Tapping the navigation icon opens the navigation application. Simultaneously, the navigation
icon switches to Nemo Handy icon and a menu is displayed.
From the menu you can start and stop navigation, jump to route, return to Nemo Handy, and
disable floating controls. Tap Start Navigation to open the navigation view:
123
Nemo Handy
User Guide
To start navigating from a specific point of the imported GPX route, tap Jump to Route from
the menu and a track bar is displayed at the bottom of the Map view. Move the indicator to
adjust from which point of the route you want to begin. The remaining route is now shown in
color while the removed route is shown in grey.
Tapping the check button confirms the selection and opens automatically the navigation
application. Tap X to cancel the selection and stay on the Map View of Nemo Handy.
Stop navigation by tapping the Nemo Handy icon and selecting Stop Navigation.
To return to Nemo Handy´s Map view, tap the Nemo Handy Icon and select Return to Nemo
Handy. After returning to Nemo Handy, the Nemo Handy icon switches back to navigation
icon.
124
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Nemo Handy Site Check

Nemo Handy Site Check is an application for measuring the quality of the end-user
experience. It works on any Android device and provides a limited amount of RF compared to
traditional measurement tools. The amount of KPIs varies between phone vendors and
Android versions. Parameters such as signal strength and quality are recorded with the
application. In addition, Nemo Handy Site Check can also display and record application-layer
information, such as FTP and HTTP transfer attempts and voice call statistics.
125
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Installing Nemo Extension

The Nemo Extension application collects cell data and transmits the data to Nemo Handy Site
Check.
1. When opening Nemo Handy Site Check for the first time, a dialog requesting you to install
the Nemo Extension application opens. Tap INSTALL APK.
2. After the installation, a dialog requesting access to the device location opens. Nemo
Extension requires access to the device location all the time. Tap Allow in settings to permit
access. The location permission settings page opens. Tap Allow all the time.
4. A dialog requesting allowing Nemo Extension to make and manage phone calls opens.
Select ALLOW.
126
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Performing Cell Verification

1. First, download a BTS file of your choice. In Settings | BTS | BTS Cells Settings,
define settings for the BTS file you have selected. Note that the Use cell range setting
must be selected under BTS Cells Settings. Please refer to chapter “BTS settings” for
more information.
2. Move to the coverage area of the BTS that you wish to check. The screenshot below
shows a situation in which a cell check has not been started and all BTS cells are
shown on Nemo Handy´s map view.
3. In Nemo Handy, go to the Map page and tap Start Cell Verification on the Control
Center or through the cell verification shortcut button on the Control Center
127
Nemo Handy
User Guide
4. Tap the Start Cell Verification button for Nemo Handy to begin comparing the
connected cell and the downloaded BTS data. All other BTS cells except the ones that
are within the coverage area are hidden. In addition, the verification results banner
appears on the top of the map view.
5. By tapping Stop Cell Verification, Nemo Handy stops comparing the cells and the
map view returns to normal mode.
The cell verification is a purely visual check-up and result. The result is not saved, and it does
not affect Nemo Handy´s functionalities in any way.
Results
The result of the verification is either “Verification Passed” or “Verification failed”. By tapping
the verification results banner, more detailed cell information is displayed.
• CONNECTED TO displays cell data about the cell that the device is currently
connected to.
• SHOULD BE displays cell data of the cell that should be connected based on the data
from the downloaded BTS file at the current GPS location.
128
Nemo Handy
User Guide
When the verification is passed, the Connected to and Should Be cell data
match and the Nemo Handy device is within the area of the Should Be cell.
Note that only the BTS cell within which coverage area the device is in is
shown on the map.
When the verification fails, the Connected to and Should Be cell data do not
match and the Nemo Handy device is within the area of the Should Be cell.
Note that only the BTS cell within which coverage area the device is in is
shown on the map.
129
Nemo Handy
User Guide
The result is Failed when Connected and Should Be cell data match, but the
device is not within the Should Be cell coverage area. Note that the
matching BTS cell is shown on the map.
The result is Failed when Connected and Should Be cell data do not match
and the device is not within the Should Be cell area. Note that in this case
all BTS cells have been hidden from the map.
Defining route parameters

You can create custom color sets for various network parameters. These parameters can be
viewed on a map.
Select Settings | Map and select Map parameters.
You will see a list of available technologies. Tap on a technology and a second-level list of
parameters opens. Select a parameter by tapping the checkbox next to it. Next, tap the color
set icon ( ).
130
Nemo Handy
User Guide
First, select the technology for which the parameter should be displayed by tapping Add new
in the Color set editor. Note that all parameters are not available for all technologies.
If there is no readymade color set, tap the range to edit the values.
131
Nemo Handy
User Guide
The Value range editor displays the minimum and maximum values of the selected parameter.
These values cannot be edited. Add a parameter value by tapping the + button. The value can
be anything between the min and max value. Just tap the value field and type in a new value.
Tap OK and the value is added in the Value range editor.
Define a color for the value by tapping the color field below the value. Pick a color from the
circle and tap OK.
132
Nemo Handy
User Guide
In the example below, values 0- -15 are colored green, values -15- -22 orange, and -22- -30
red.
After you have defined all values and colors, tap the Back button.
The Color set editor will display the new values and colors. Tap Ok and Save.
133
Nemo Handy
User Guide
parameters and the related color sets are user configurable. See Chapter “Defining route
parameters” for defining custom route parameters and color sets.
File explorer
Log files, captured screenshots, and indoor map markers are saved to File Explorer that can
be found by selecting Menu | File Explorer or by tapping the file explorer button .
File explorer displays a list of various Nemo Handy-related files. The contents can be filtered
by selecting/deselecting the configs, maps, results, and scripts items at the top of the screen.
You can also tap the search icon and tap the filter button, type a filter text and the list will
display items that match the filter. The list can be organized by selecting Menu | By
Name/Size/Date. An icon in front of the logfile details shows whether the logfile was saved on
internal or external SD card.
• Cloud lists files copied to Nemo Cloud
• Configs lists Nemo Handy configuration files (.xml)
• Maps lists map image files (.bmp, .jpg), MapInfo tab files (.tab), and route plans (.rpf)
• Results lists log files (.nmf), screenshots (.png, .jpg), and marker files (.mrk). Tap Logs
only to display only the .nmf files. Tap Scrshot only to display screenshots only.
• Scripts lists Nemo Handy script files (.nsf)
To delete files from the File Explorer, select files by selecting a file and tapping Menu |
Remove. To remove all files at once, select Menu | Select all and then Menu | Remove.
To play back measurement files, select a file from the list and select Menu | Play. For more
information on playback, see Chapter “Playback”.
To rename measurement files, select a file from the list and select Menu | Rename.
To copy measurement files, select files by tapping on the checkbox next to the file and select
Menu | Copy.
You can also upload measurement files through the File Explorer on an FTP server. Select a
file and select Menu | Upload. For more information on uploading measurements on an FTP
server, see Chapter “Uploading log files on server”.
134
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Playback
To play back measurement files, open the File Explorer by tapping the File Explorer button (
) on the toolbar. Select a file from the list by tapping the checkbox next to it and select
Menu | Play.
Nemo Handy will load the file and start the playback. The playback controls will appear at the
bottom of the view. You can hide and display them by tapping the Playback icon in the toolbar.
With the + and – controls you can adjust the playback speed. You can also Pause and
Resume the playback. With the slider in the middle you can scroll to a specific point in the
measurement.
The Notification History view can also be used to jump to a specific point in the measurement.
Tap a notification and select Jump to notification time. The playback will jump to the point
where the notification occurred.
To end the playback, tap the Close playback icon ( ).
Copying files
To copy measurement files, open the File explorer by tapping the File Explorer button ( ) on
the toolbar. Select a file from the list by tapping the checkbox next to it and select Menu |
Copy. Enter filename in the opening dialog and tap OK.
If your Nemo Handy device is logged to Nemo Cloud, you can to select whether the files are
copied locally or into Nemo Cloud.
Local enables you to copy files locally in your Nemo Handy device. With local copies, you can
select the destination for the copied selected file(s) from a list of options.
Select the destination for the copies by tapping on your selection. The file(s) you selected are
copied in the destination folder.
If you select to copy the selected files to Nemo Cloud, tap Cloud and you can select the
destination folder in Nemo Cloud.
You can view files copied to Nemo Cloud through the Cloud button in the File explorer view.
135
Nemo Handy
User Guide
6 Nemo Handy measurement views

Below are presented the various measurement views available in Nemo Handy. Subset of the
available pages is visible by default. Full list of Views, and ability to hide/show individual pages
is available at Settings | Page settings.
To create a new page, select Settings | Page settings, tap New page at the bottom of the
dialog box and select a page from the existing pages list. Name the page and add or create
splits if you wish. Tap the menu icon at the top-right of the screen to select how pages are
sorted (All visible/A-Z/Non-alphabetical/Reset to default).
The scales in the bar and line graphs will change according to the selected parameter.
Selected parameter can be changed from the Parameter menu that opens by tapping and
holding on the value of a parameter on chart legend. You can also add and hide default
parameters from existing graphs to existing views. Select Settings | Page settings, select a
page to open
You can browse through the different pages by dragging your finger horizontally across the
screen. If a page has several views, you can move between the views by dragging your finger
vertically across the screen.
To jump to a specific page, tap the title bar of a page (top of the page) to open the Jump to
page dialog box. From the list, tap a page to move the view to that page. Scroll up and down
by dragging your finger vertically across the dialog box.
It is also possible to split screens by selecting Settings | Page settings and selecting from the
list the page you want to split. A dialog box of the view opens. Tap Add split and select a
page from the Select pages list. You are also able to select a smaller split if you wish by
selecting the Small splits option, with which the split is about a third of the screen whereas a
normal split is half of the screen. To remove split, tap the trash can button.
From the same dialog box, you are able to hide and make visible pages by selecting/clearing
Show page.
From the Page settings menu it is also possible to add new pages, make all pages visible, or
reset pages to default state.
page dialog box. From the list tap a page to move the view to that page. Scroll up and down by
dragging your finger vertically across the dialog box.
Parameter menu
Through the Parameter menu you can edit the appearance of data views. Parameter menu is
accessed by tapping and holding on the parameter value. and selecting Parameter settings
from the dialog box. Select the parameter you wish to edit a from a list of available parameters
to open the Parameter editor. Please note that the content of the menu depends on the view
type (line, text, and so forth).
Set scale
Select None, Left, or Right to set the selected parameter active and to define whether the
scale displaying the values for the selected parameter is displayed on the left of on the right
side of the display. Select None to hide an individual parameter. Tap Save to save the
changes in the configuration file.
Auto scale
136
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Note that you can define the scaling individually for each parameter in the line graph.
Select None and the scales return to normal.

Select High and Nemo Handy changes the scales and zooms in on the view so that the line is
at the top of the graph and the minimum value is at the bottom of the scale. The symbol
changes to ↑.
Select Low, and Nemo Handy changes the scales and zooms in on the view so that the line is
at the bottom of the graph and the maximum value is at the top of the scales. The symbol
changes to ↓.
Select Both and Nemo Handy checks the minimum and maximum values for the graph from
the visible area and zooms in on the view so that the line is in the middle. The ↕ symbol
appears next to the parameter name at the top of the view.
Tap Save to save the changes in the configuration file.
Number format
Select the number format (decimal, hexadecimal, or octal).
Tap Save to save the changes in the configuration file.
Status view
Logging Status displays the current recording status.

Log file Size displays the size of the measurement file in bytes.
Log file Name displays the measurement file name.
Log file Path displays the location where the measurement files are stored on the memory
card.
Free Storage displays the available storage in the internal memory.
Free Memory displays the current amount of free RAM.
Heap Size displays the amount of memory that Nemo Handy currently occupies in the
operating system.
Battery Temp displays the battery temperature.
Script Status displays the current status of the script.
137
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Script File displays the name of the script file.

GPS Status displays the status of the GPS receiver.
IMEI displays the International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) number of the mobile
terminal. The IMEI number is used by the GSM network to identify valid devices.
IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity) displays a unique number associated with all
GSM and UMTS network mobile phone users. It is sent by the phone to the network.
System Lock displays the system lock status.
Band Lock displays the band lock status.
GSM BCCH Lock displays the GSM BCCH lock status.
WCDMA Cell Lock displays the WCDMA cell lock status.
LTE Cell Lock displays the LTE cell lock status.
APN, PDP Type, Interface, Address, Gateway, DNS, NSAPI display information about the
current access point.
Agent state view (only with Nemo Walker Air Agents)

Note that connection, in this context, refers to the Bluetooth connection between the Controller
and the Agent.
Connection State displays the connection state (Disconnected-Connecting-Connected)

Connection Count displays the connection count since start up.
Disconnect Count displays the disconnection count since start up.
Connection Uptime displays the duration of the current continuous connection.
Time from Connection Drop displays the time passed from the previous connection.
Max Disconnection Time displays the longest continuous offline time.
Heartbeat Msg Count displays the count of successful heartbeat message cycles. The
connection between the Controller and the Agent is monitored by sending a regular (every 10
seconds) message (heartbeat) to the Agent. The Agent then sends a response. If heartbeat
message from Controller or response from the Agent arrives at the right time, it can be
concluded that the connection is OK.
Heartbeat Fail Count: Count of failed heartbeat message cycles. If heartbeat message does
not arrive at the expected time, an error is logged.
138
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Script view
Script File displays the name of the script file.

Status displays the current status of the script.
Position shows the current position in the script
Repeat displays how many times the script is repeated and the ordinal number of the current
repeat.
Command displays which script command is currently running.
Active Transactions displays the active transactions taking place.
Script commands displays the script commands of the script file.
139
Nemo Handy
User Guide
GPS view
The GPS view is available only if the license supports a GPS.

To display GPS view, go to Settings | Page settings | GPS, select Show page and tap the
Back key of the device.
Source defines the GPS source.
Latitude/Longitude displays the latitude/longitude coordinates.
Altitude displays the current elevation in meters.
Bar. Altitude displays the current barometric altitude in meters. Long press the value to open a
menu. In the menu, tap Reset to reset the measurement and set a new point A. When moving
up and down e.g. in stairs, the barometric altitude measures the relation between the point A
and point B.
Heading displays the direction in which a person or vehicle is moving.
Distance displays the distance travelled from the starting point.
Speed displays the current velocity of the test unit in kilometres per hour.
GPS status displays the current status of the GPS, that is, if there is a fix.
GSP time displays the time from the GPS. This feature can be enabled and disabled by
selecting Settings | GPS | Use GPS time.
Satellites displays the number of satellites currently visible.
Notification history view
140
Nemo Handy
User Guide
The notification history view displays a list of notifications and their timestamps.
To display the Notification history view, go to Settings | Page Settings | Notification History,
select Show Page and tap the Back key of the device. To hide a notification, select it from the
notification list by tapping, then select Hide from the opening dialog. Tap OK to confirm the
selection. Clear notification list by tapping the Clear Notification button that appears when
tapping and holding a notification.
You can use filters in the Notification view. Tap the Filter icon ( ) to display a search bar and
type in the desired filter(s). To use more than one filter at the same time, insert a space and
select OR or AND and type in another filter. The new filter activates automatically, and new
notifications are displayed in the view accordingly. If you erase the filter from the Filter text
field, all signal messages are displayed on the view.
141
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Map View
To display the Map view, go to Menu ( ) | Settings | Page Settings | Map, select Show
page, and tap the back key.
Select between Google Map and OpenStreetMap in Menu ( ) | Settings | Map | Map
Select. Both maps support the same functions. Tap to focus on your current location.
You can zoom in and out by “pinching” the screen using two fingers (for example, thumb and
index finger) to zoom in or zoom out when viewing a map.
You can also rotate the map/floorplan by placing two fingers on the screen and turning the
fingers in a circular movement on the screen.
You can view the measured route with color-coded parameter values in real-time on live map.
parameters and the related color sets are user configurable.
Indoor maps (floorplans) are viewed as layers on top of the map. To view floorplans, go to
Settings | Indoor, where you can select between floorplans, and iBwave maps to be uploaded
as layers on top of the map.
Compass
The compass on the upper left-hand side of the screen indicates the cardinal directions and
tapping on the compass once turns the map back into upright position.
The compass is enabled when the compass in the upper left-hand corner of the UI is tapped
(once if the map is already in upright position) and the compass circle turns green.
Note that the compass may need calibration, in which case Nemo Handy asks you to calibrate
the compass by rotating the device around its three axes.
142
Nemo Handy
User Guide
More Actions Menu
Tap More Actions button on the top right corner of the map view to open the More Actions
menu.
Swipe Allowed, when selected, enables swiping pages. This is the default selection.
Swipe Locked, when selected, disables swiping pages.
Map Locked, when selected, locks the map in its position while maintaining the possibility to
scroll.
You can select whether GPS or inserted markers are used in marking the measurement route
on the map by tapping the More Actions button ( ) and by selecting/deselecting Show
GPS and Show Markers. When Show GPS is selected, Nemo Handy uses GPS for route
marking (recommended for outdoor measurements). When Show Markers is selected, Nemo
Handy uses inserted markers to mark the measurement route (recommended for indoor
measurements).
Tap CLEAR ROUTE to remove route markings from the map.
Tap ADD KLM(S) and add KML layers to display KML files on top of the Google maps. See
“KML files displayed on a map” for more information.
Tap OPEN BTS EDITOR to open BTS Editor view. See BTS Editor view for more information.
143
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Tap OPEN ROUTE PLAN EDITOR to open Route Plan Editor view. See
Route Plan Editor for more information.
BTS view
To display the BTS view, go to Settings | Page Settings | BTS, select Show Page, and tap
the Back key of the device.
Cell name displays the name of the active cell.
Site name displays the name of the active base station.
Distance displays the distance in kilometers to the active base station.
BTS CI displays the cell identity of the active base station.
In LTE BTS view, the LTE Secondary Cells are also displayed alongside active and neighbor
cells. The Cell IDs are taken from the BTS file.
YouTube view
In the YouTube view you can select to stream YouTube videos. See chapter “Manual YouTube
testing” for more information on YouTube testing.
To display the YouTube view, go to Settings | Page settings | YouTube, select Show page,
and tap the Back key of the device.
YouTube parameters view

To display the YouTube parameters view, go to Settings | Page settings | YouTube
parameters, select Show page, and tap the Back key of the device.
App. Throughput DL displays the application throughput in downlink direction in kb per second.
YouTube Play State displays the current state of the video streaming.
Facebook view
In the Facebook view you can view wall feed, posted status updates, photos, generated
photos, and videos. See Chapter “Manual Facebook Testing” for more information on
Facebook testing.
To display the Facebook view, go to Settings | Page settings | Facebook, select Show
page, and tap the Back key of the device.
LinkedIn view
In the LinkedIn view you can view self feeds, loaded profiles, shared texts and URLs as well as
loaded info. See Chapter “Manual LinkedIn Testing” for more information on LinkedIn testing.
To display the LinkedIn view, go to Settings | Page settings | LinkedIn, select Show page,
Twitter view
In the Twitter view you can view loaded homepages, profiles, followed tweets, texted tweets,
and photo tweets. See Chapter “Manual Twitter Testing” for more information on Twitter
testing.
144
Nemo Handy
User Guide
To display the Twitter view, go to Settings | Page settings | YouTube, select Show page,
Instagram view
In the Instagram view you can view loaded home feeds and tag searches. See Chapter
“Manual Instagram Testing” for more information on Instagram testing.
To display the Instagram view, go to Settings | Page settings | Instagram, select Show
Statistics views
The statistics views display statistics for various measurement events. The statistics views
display voice and video call related and application testing related statistics. To save the
current statistics to a .csv file, select Menu | Save statistics. The saved statistics can be
found in Result folder. The file name format is Statistic_date_time.csv.
Statistics views include:
• Statistics (success rate statistics)
• Voice call statistics
• Voice call
• CSFB
• SRVCC
• Video call statistics
• FTP statistics
• SFTP statistics
• HTTP statistics
• Dropbox statistics
• Browsing statistics
• Ping statistics
• SMS statistics
• MMS statistics
• TWAMP statistics
• IPerf statistics
• IPerf 2 statistics
• IPerf 3 statistics
• Facebook statistics
• Netflix statistics
• YouTube statistics
• Twitter statistics
• Instagram statistics
• LinkedIn statistics
• Email statistics
• WhatsApp statistics
• Viber statistics
• BiP Messenger statistics
• LINE statistics
• Handover statistics
• Signal level and quality statistics
145
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Netflix parameters view

To display the Netflix parameters view, go to Settings | Page settings | Netflix, select Show
PEVQ-S MOS displays the PEVQ-S MOS score.

Signaling view
Signaling messages view displays a list of signaling messages. Tap an individual message to
view the timestamp for that message or L3 messages in decoded form. To return to the
signaling main view, tap on the upper right corner of the message details view or
anywhere on the touchpad.
To hide or show a signaling message, tap and hold a message and select Hide/Show.. Tap
OK to confirm the selection.
You can use filters in the Signaling view. Tap the Filter icon ( ) to display a search bar and
messages are displayed in the view accordingly. If you erase the filter from the Filter text field,
all signal messages are displayed on the view.
Voice quality view

The Voice Quality view is available only if the license supports VQ measurements.
To display the Voice Quality view, go to Settings | Page Settings | Voice Quality and select
Show page.
The voice quality view 1/2 displays the downlink MOS score, Serving SNR, PDSCH block error
rate, and the AMR mode in downlink direction. Alternatives are 4.75, 5.15, 5.9, 6.7, 7.4, 7.95,
10.2, and 12.2.
The voice quality view 2/2 displays the MOS value distribution.
146
Nemo Handy
User Guide
WiFi view
The WiFi view is available only if the license supports WiFi measurements. Activate WiFi
scanning by selecting Active WiFi Scanning option (Settings | General) and select Menu |
Enable WiFi.
WiFi State defines the current state of the WiFi network. The possible states are:
• WIFI_STATE_DISABLING
• WIFI_STATE_DISABLED
• WIFI_STATE_ENABLING
• WIFI_STATE_ENABLED
• WIFI_STATE_UNKNOWN
WiFi Connection displays the current status of the WiFi connection. The possible states are:
• CONNECTING
• CONNECTED
• SUSPENDED
• DISCONNECTING
• DISCONNECTED
• UNKNOWN
SSID displays the WLAN service set identifier.
BSSID displays the basic service set identifier, also known as WLAN MAC address.
Link Speed displays the maximum transfer rate in Mbit/s.
IP Address displays the current IP address.
The view also displays a list of available WiFi networks and the frequency, channel, security
mode, and RSSI per network.
Active RSSI displays the RSSI value in dBm for the current WLAN network.
Link Speed displays the maximum transfer rate in Mbit/s.
Note: When WiFi scanning is enabled, throughput will be limited due to scanning.
Other processes may also be affected.
WiFi Spectrum view

The WiFi Spectrum view can be used to observe possibly overlapping channels and
frequencies.
To display the WiFi Spectrum view, go to Settings | Page Settings | WiFi Spectrum and
select Show Page. The view consists of two pages, the first page for 2400 MHz and the
second for 5000 MHz. Swipe down on the view to access the second page. Lock the view to
scroll the page horizontally.
Channels are located on the x-axle.
Signal strength is displayed on the y-axle.
SSID is displayed over each line curve.
Transaction log view

To display the Transaction log view, go to Settings | Page settings | Transaction log and
select Show page.
All transactions that can be made with Nemo Handy are shown in a log window, row per
transaction, with key information, such as status (success/failure), average data throughput,
and whether the voice call was mobile terminated (MT) or mobile originated (MO).
To clear the transaction list, select Menu | Clear transactions.
147
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Nemo Cloud view

To display the Nemo Cloud view, go to Settings | Page settings | Nemo Cloud and select
Show page. If you haven´t logged into Nemo Cloud yet, you must do so by tapping Login
Cloud in Nemo Cloud settings.
When logged in to Nemo Cloud, the Nemo Cloud view displays the username of the Nemo
Cloud account, server address, the active project or work order (if received), and/or the unit
name defined by the user in Nemo Cloud and or the unit ID (the IMEI of the Nemo Handy
device), time of the last synchronization, and most recent activity.
Stop sync button ( ) manually stops file syncing to Nemo Cloud.
Event log button ( ) opens the Nemo Cloud Event Log view that displays the event
history.
Logout button ( ) logs Nemo Handy out from Nemo Cloud.

When logged out from Nemo Cloud, the Nemo Cloud view displays the login settings. When
logging in to Nemo Cloud, you can configure your Nemo Handy unit’s Cloud settings either
directly in the Nemo Cloud view, or through Settings | Nemo Cloud.
E2E view
To display the E2E view, go to Settings | Page settings | E2E Page and select Show page.
Status displays the status of E2E connection (NA, OK, INITIALIZED, or FAIL).
Remote number displays the number of the measurement device.
Line number displays the set number for the E2E server.
Event log displays the event log for E2E calls.
Analysis of RF ingress view

The Analysis of RF ingress view is available only with the additional Advanced
Indoor Analysis license option.
To view the Analysis of RF ingress page, go to Settings | Page settings | Analysis of RF

ingress and select Show page.
Type indicates the percentage distribution between Macro (outdoor cells) and Small Cells
(indoor cells). All cells not in the BTS file are considered as macro cells. Cells defined as
small_cell or DAS are included in the Small Cell value.
Macro vs. SC indicates the RF ingress amount coming outside during indoor measurements.
LTE displays the type of serving cells and neighbour. The type is either MACRO or SC. A cell
is not defined in the BTS file is considered as a macro cell. Note that this split displays
technology-related information. For further information on different technology views, see
respective technology views.
RLC Throughput view

To view the RLC Throughput page, go to Settings | Page settings | RLC Throughput and
select Show page.
RLC Throughput DL displays the downlink
RLC Throughput UL displays the uplink
148
Nemo Handy
User Guide
GSM views
Summary views for GSM

System displays the current cellular system, for example, GSM 1800.
Packet technology displays the current packet technology.
• CONNECTING
• CONNECTED
• SUSPENDED
• DISCONNECTING
• DISCONNECTED
• UNKNOWN
Distance to BTS displays the distance in kilometers to the active base station.
Channel displays the current channel number.
CI displays the 16-bit cell identification code.
BCCH displays the broadcast control channel number.
BSIC displays the base station identity code.
RX Level Full displays the received signal level of all TDMA frames (Range: −120 – −10, Unit:
dBm)
RX Level Sub displays the received signal level of the subset of the TDMA frames (Range:
−120 –−10, Unit: dBm)RX Quality Full displays the RX quality full value. Values range from 0
to 7.
RX Quality Sub displays the RX quality sub value. Values range from 0 to 7.
C1 & C2 display the C1 and C2 values.
N1 Channel displays the channel number for the first neighbor.
N1 RX Level displays the RX level for the first neighbor.
LAC displays the location area code.
MCC displays the mobile country code.
MNC displays the mobile network code.
Operator displays the mobile operator name.
TA displays the timing advance value. Values range from 0 to 63.
MSP displays the mobile station Tx power. Values range from 0 to 32.
RLT displays the radio link timeout.
AMR Init Codec displays the AMR initial codec mode. Alternatives are 4.75, 5.15, 5.9, 6.7, 7.4,
7.95, 10.2, and 12.2.
GSM AMR Codec UL/DL displays the currently used AMR codec for sending and receiving.
LQE displays the link quality estimate. Values range from 0 to 32.
Hopping displays hopping status (On/Off).
HSN displays hopping sequence number.
MAIO displays mobile allocation index offset.
Cell measurements view for GSM

The Cell measurements 1/2 view (neighbor line view) for GSM displays the channel number
and RX level for the serving and neighbor channels. The serving channel is displayed first on
the list (in black). The RX level line for the serving channel is displayed in bold.
The Cell measurements 2/2 view (neighbor bar view) for GSM displays the channel number,
BSIC, and RX level for the serving and neighbor channels. The serving channel is displayed
first on the list (in black).
149
Nemo Handy
User Guide
The serving channel bar is color coded.

RX level: If the value goes below -95, the bar color changes from blue to red.
GSM cell table / GSM hopping channels

The GSM Cell Table view displays the channel number, CI (cell identity), BSIC, C1, C2, RX
level, and LAC (location area code) for the serving (first on list) and neighbor channels.
The hopping channels view displays a list of hopping channels and the channel number, C/I,
and RX level per hopping channel.
GSM inter-system cells

The Cell measurement inter-system line view displays for GSM the channel number, and RX
level for the serving and best neighbors.
GSM view
RX Level displays the RX level full value when the mobile is in idle mode and the RX level sub
value when a call is connected. Values range from -120 to -10 dBm.
RX Quality, when DTX in ON, displays the RX quality full value and when DTX is OFF displays
RX quality sub value.
LQE displays the link quality estimate. Values range from 0 to 32.
Throughput view for GSM

The data throughput line views display the application data throughput in kilobits per second
for UL and DL directions. The value is also displayed as a line.
Note that you need to have a data transfer on to see data in these views.
The gauge view displays the application throughput in downlink and in uplink direction in kb
per second and the amount of data transferred in downlink and in uplink direction in bytes.
PPP throughput view for GSM

PPP Throughput view displays the downlink and uplink throughput values in kbps. The value is
calculated based on the SDUs (service data units) that are successfully transferred through
the PPP layer. Missing and erroneous PPP packets are excluded from the throughput
calculation.
To display the PPP Throughput view, go to Settings | Page settings | PPP Throughput,
select Show page, and tap the Back key of the device.
IPerf for GSM

To display the IPerf view, go to Settings | Page settings | IPerf, select Show page, and tap
IPerf PER DL displays the downlink packet error rate, that is, the percentage of erroneously
transferred packets from the total number of transferred packets.
IPerf Jitter DL displays the packet jitter downlink in ms.
150
Nemo Handy
User Guide
App. Throughput UL displays the application throughput in uplink direction in kb per second.
IPerf PER UL displays the uplink packet error rate, that is, the percentage of erroneously
IPerf Jitter UL displays the packet jitter uplink in ms.
IPerf 2 for GSM

To display the IPerf 2 view, go to Settings | Page settings | IPerf 2 select Show page, and
tap the Back key of the device.
IPerf 2 PER DL displays the downlink packet error rate, that is, the percentage of erroneously
IPerf 2 Jitter DL displays the packet jitter downlink in ms.
IPerf 2 PER UL displays the uplink packet error rate, that is, the percentage of erroneously
IPerf 2 Jitter UL displays the packet jitter uplink in ms.
IPerf 3 for GSM

To display the IPerf 3 view, go to Settings | Page settings | IPerf 3 select Show page, and
GPRS view for GSM

Coding DL/UL displays the CS data channel coding for downlink/uplink directions. Alternatives
are 9.6 and 14.4.
WCDMA views
Summary view for WCDMA

System displays the current cellular system, for example, UMTS FDD.
• CONNECTING
• CONNECTED
• SUSPENDED
• DISCONNECTING
• DISCONNECTED
• UNKNOWN
151
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Cell ID (16-bit) displays the 16-bit cell identification code.
RNC displays the radio network controller ID.
LAC displays the location area code.
RAC displays the routing area code.
UARFCN displays the radio frequency channel number in use.
RRC State displays the RRC state. Alternatives are Idle, URA PCH, Cell PCH, Cell FACH, and
Cell DCH.
Active Ec/No displays the active Ec/No value.
Active RSCP displays the active RSCP value.
Active Scrambling Codes displays the active scrambling code.
Monitored Ec/No displays the monitored Ec/No value.
Monitored RSCP displays the monitored RSCP value.
Monitored Scrambling Codes displays the monitored scrambling code values.
BLER displays block error rate.

SIR displays the signal-to-interference ratio. Values range from –50 to 50.
TX Power displays the TX power level in dBm. Values range from 30 to -120.
Downlink/Uplink Power Up % displays the percentages of downlink (DL) and uplink (UL) power
up commands.
AICH Status displays the RACH message transmission result.
Preamble Count displays the transmitted preamble count. Values range from 1 to 65.
RACH TX Power displays the RACH message power in dB.
UL Interference displays uplink interference in dB.
AMR Codec UL/DL displays the AMR mode in uplink (UL) and downlink (DL) directions.
Alternatives are 4.75, 5.15, 5.9, 6.7, 7.4, 7.95, 10.2, and 12.2.
CQI Primary displays the Channel Quality Indicator for primary carrier in DC (dual carrier)
mode.
CQI Secondary displays the Channel Quality Indicator for secondary carrier in DC mode.
Number of codes displays the number of HS-PDSCH channelization codes.
Modulation displays the ratio of QPSK/16QAM activity.
Transport Block Size displays the Transport Block Size Indicator.
MAC BLER displays MAC block error rate.
MAC Throughput Downlink displays the MAC downlink data transfer rate in kilobits per
second.
Activity Rate displays the downlink Activity rate.
E-TFCI displays information about the transport block set size.

E-DCH Transport Block Size displays the average of transport block size used during the
previous reporting period.
Activity Rate displays the downlink activity rate.
Serving Grant Index defines how much power is given for the uplink data transmission. The
network controls current serving grant using absolute and relative grants.
Serving grant defines the power ratio of E-DPDCH and DPCCH.
TTI defines the transmission time interval.
SI Total E-DCH Buffer Status identifies the total amount of data available across all logical
channels for which reporting has been requested by the RRC, and indicates the amount of
data in a number of bytes that is available for transmission and retransmission in the RLC
layer.
Happy bit - the happy bit status is periodically reported to the network to indicate when the
mobile has enough power to transmit current data buffers in a predefined time period.
152
Nemo Handy
User Guide
MAC-e Retransmission displays the ratio of retransmitted PDUs and all transmitted PDUs in
the MAC-e layer.
E-DCH Spreading Factor displays the enhanced dedicated channel spreading factor.
SI UE Power Headroom defines the difference between the maximum possible power and
currently used power.
Serving Scrambling Code displays the serving scrambling code.
Non-Serving Scrambling Codes displays the non-serving scrambling codes.
MAC-e Throughput displays the MAC throughput.
WCDMA cell measurements

The WCDMA cell measurements views (the neighbor views) 1/2 and 2/2 display the Set,
Ec/N0 and RSCP values for the serving and neighbor channels.
A refers to active set, D to detected set and M to monitored set.
WCDMA cell table

The WCDMA Cell Table view displays the Set, Channel number, Scrambling Code, Ec/N0,
and RSCP for the serving (first on list) and neighbor channels.
To display the WCDMA Cell Table view, go to Settings | Page settings | WCDMA cell table,
WCDMA inter-system cells

The Cell measurement inter-system line view displays for WCDMA the Set, scrambling code,
and Ec/N0 for the active set and for best pilots in monitored set.
WCDMA MIMO
The WCDMA MIMO view displays the Channel number, Scrambling Code, Port, and Ec/N0.
To display the MIMO view, go to Settings | Page settings | MIMO, select Show page, and
WCDMA/WCMA power control view

The WCDMA and WCDMA power control views display the carrier RSSI value, TX power
level, and 1AS RSCP (the best RSCP in the active set), block error rate value in downlink
direction, percentages of downlink (DL) and uplink (UL) power up commands, and signal-to-
interference ratio.
Throughput view for WCDMA

The data throughput line views display the block error rate value in downlink direction and the
application throughput in downlink and in uplink direction in kb per second.
The gauge views display the application throughput in downlink and in uplink direction in kb
per second and the amount of data transferred in downlink and in uplink direction in bytes.
153
Nemo Handy
User Guide
PPP throughput for WCDMA

PPP Throughput views display the downlink and uplink throughput values in kbps. The value is
calculation.
IPerf for WCDMA

IPerf 2 for WCDMA

To display the IPerf 2 view, go to Settings | Page settings | IPerf 2, select Show page, and
IPerf 3 for WCDMA

HSDPA view for WCDMA

MAC Throughput displays MAC throughput.
MAC BLER displays MAC block error rate.
154
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Number of Codes displays the number of HS-PDSCH channelization codes.

CQI Primary displays the Channel Quality Indicator for primary carrier in DC (dual carrier)
mode.
CQI Secondary displays the Channel Quality Indicator for secondary carrier in DC mode.
Table 1. displays the relative ratio of QSPK, 16QAM and 64QAM modulation activity for the
current data session.
Table 2. displays the relative ratio of QSPK, 16QAM and 64QAM modulation activity for the
entire measurement.
WCDMA HSUPA views

MAC-e Throughput displays the MAC throughput.
MAC-e retransmission displays the ratio of retransmitted PDUs and all transmitted PDUs in the
MAC-e layer.
E-DCH Transport Block Size displays the average of transport block size used during the
previous reporting period.
Activity Rate displays the downlink Activity rate
Serving grant defines the power ratio of E-DPDCH and DPCCH.
SI UE Power Headroom defines the difference between the maximum possible power and
currently used power.
The Happy Bit status is periodically reported to the network to indicate when the mobile has
enough power to transmit current data buffers in a predefined time period.
SI Total E-DCH Buffer Status identifies the total amount of data available across all logical
channels for which reporting has been requested by the RRC, and indicates the amount of
data in a number of bytes that is available for transmission and retransmission in the RLC
layer.
LTE views
Summary view for LTE

This chapter lists parameters visible in the summary view for LTE. Please see Nemo BTS File Format
for parameter definitions.
o System
o Packet Technology
o WiFi Connection
o SSID
o Cell name
o Distance to BTS
o Cell ID
o eNodeB/CID
o RNC/CID
o TAC
o MCC
o MNC
o Operator
o MME
o EARFCN
o Serving Carrier RSSI
o Serving SNR
o Serving RSRQ
155
Nemo Handy
User Guide
o Serving RSRP
o Serving PCI
o Detected RSRQ
o Detected RSRP
o Detected PCI
o EMM State
o EMM Substate
o Transmission Mode
o TDD UL DL configuration
o SC1 State
o SC2 State
o SC3 State
o SC4 State
o SC5 State
o SC6 State
o SC7 State
o PC/SC PDSCH BLER
o PC PDSCH Throughput
o PC PDSCH Scheduled Throughput
o PC Requested Throughput
o PC PDSCH Rank 2 Percentage
o PC PDSCH Modulation Codeword 0
o PC PDSCH Modulation Codeword 1
o PC PDSCH MCS Codeword 0
o PC PDSCH MCS Codeword 1
o PC CQI Wideband Codeword 0
o PC CQI Wideband Codeword 1
o PC PDSCH PRB
o PC PDSCH Rank
o PC Bandwidth
o SC1 PDSCH BLER
o SC1 PDSCH Throughput
o SC1 PDSCH Rank 2 Percentage
o SC1 PDSCH Modulation Codeword 0
o SC1 CQI Wideband Codeword 0
o SC1 PDSCH PRB Allocation
o SC1 PDSCH Rank
o SC1 Bandwidth
o SC2 PDSCH BLER
o SC2 MCS Codeword 0
o SC2 MCS Codeword 1
o SC2 PDSCH Rank
o SC2 Bandwidth
o SC3 PDSCH BLER
156
Nemo Handy
User Guide

o SC3 PDSCH MSC Codeword 0
o SC3 PDSCH Rank
o SC3 Bandwidth
o SC4 PDSCH BLER
o SC4 PDSCH MCS Codeword 0
o SC4 PDSCH MCS Codeword 1
o SC4 PDSCH Rank
o SC4 Bandwidth
o SC5 PDSCH BLER
o SC5 PDSCH Rank
o SC5 Bandwidth
o SC6 PDSCH BLER
o SC6 PDSCH Modulation Codeword
o SC6 PDSCH Modulation Codeword
o SC6 Bandwidth
o SC7 PDSCH BLER
o SC7 PDSCH Rank
o SC7 Bandwidth
o TX Power PUSCH
o TX Power PUCCH
o PUSCH Throughput
o PUSCH Scheduled Throughput
157
Nemo Handy
User Guide
o PUSCH Rank
o PUSCH MCS Modulation
o Timing Advance
o Cyclic Prefix
o RRC State
o RACH Type
o RACH Result
o RACH Maximum Allowed Preambles
o RACH Number of Trans. Preambles
o RACH Initial TX Power
o RACH Succ. Preamble Power Level
o RACH PUSCH Power
o HO Packet Loss
o HO U-plane Interruption
o IMS Server State
o IMS Registration Setup Time
o IMS Registration Failure Ratio
o SIP Handshake Time
o VoLTE Codec
o AMR Codec Uplink
o AMR Codec Downlink
LTE Cell Measurements view

The LTE Cell Measurements views (the neighbor views) display the Set, PCI (Physical
Channel Identifier) and RSRQ (Reference Signal Received Quality) and RSRP (Reference
Signal Received Power) for the serving and neighbor channels.
LTE cell table

The LTE Cell Table view displays the Set, Band, Channel number, PCI (physical channel
identifier), RSRQ (reference signal received quality), and RSRP (reference signal received
power) for the serving (first on list) and neighbor channels.
To display the LTE Cell Table view, go to Settings | Page settings | LTE Cell Table, select
Show page, and tap the Back key of the device.
LTE inter-system cells

The Cell measurement inter-system line view displays for LTE the PCI (physical channel
identifier) and RSRP (reference signal received power) for the serving and neighbor channels.
LTE MIMO SNR/P

The LTE MIMO SNR/P view displays the Cell type, SNR/P and Port. The calculation method
for this parameter is device specific and can change between the devices.
To display the LTE MIMO SNR/P page, go to Settings | Page settings | LTE MIMO SNR/P,
158
Nemo Handy
User Guide
LTE MIMO
The LTE MIMO 1 and LTE MIMO 2 views display the Channel number, PCI (physical channel
identifier), RSRQ (reference signal received quality), RSRP (reference signal received power),
and port for each MIMO antenna port. Scells 1 to 4 are displayed on their own views.
To display the MIMO view, go to Settings | Page settings | MIMO, select Show page, and
Application throughput view for LTE

App. Throughput Downlink displays the data throughput rate in downlink direction.
The gauge view displays the application throughput in downlink direction in kb per second and
the amount of data transferred in downlink and in uplink direction in bytes.
App. Throughput Uplink displays the data throughput rate in uplink direction.
The gauge view displays the application throughput in uplink direction in kb per second and
PPP throughput view for LTE

The PPP Throughput view displays the downlink and uplink throughput values in kbps. The
value is calculated based on the SDUs (service data units) that are successfully transferred
through the PPP layer. Missing and erroneous PPP packets are excluded from the throughput
calculation.
IPerf view for LTE

IPerf 2 view for LTE

159
Nemo Handy
User Guide
IPerf 3 view for LTE

LTE link adaptation downlink

This chapter lists parameters visible in the LTE link adaptation downlink view. Please see Nemo
BTS File Format for parameter definitions.
o PC SNR
o PDSCH PRB Allocation
o PDSCH Throughput
o PDSCH PRB Allocation
o CQI Wideband Codeword 0
o CQI Wideband Codeword 1
Table 1. displays the relative ratio of downlink QSPK, 16QAM, 64QAM, and 256QAM
modulation activity for codeword 0.
Table 2. displays the relative ratio of downlink QSPK, 16QAM, 64QAM, and 256QAM
LTE link adaption uplink

PUSCH Throughput displays the uplink data throughput for the PUSCH in bps.
PUSCH PRB Allocation displays the number of allocated physical resource blocks for the
PUSCH.
The uplink modulation ratio displays the relative ratio of uplink QSPK, 16QAM and 64QAM
LTE CA cells
PCI indicates the physical layer Cell ID.
RSRP displays the reference signal received power in dBm.
Band indicates the frequency band.
Channel indicates the selected channel.
LTE RSRP displays LTE reference signal received power in dBm.
LTE SNR displays LTE signal to noise ratio dB.
LTE RSRQ displays the reference signal received pow
BW indicates the beam width for beam index n.
160
Nemo Handy
User Guide
TPUT DL indicates the throughput in downlink.

TPUT UL indicates the throughput in uplink.
LTE CA throughput
Application Throughput Downlink displays the application throughput in downlink.
PC SNR displays primary cell signal to noise ratio in dB
SC1 SNR displays first secondary serving cell signal to noise ratio in dB.
SC2 SNR displays third serving cell signal to noise ratio in dB.
SC3 SNR displays
PC PDSCH Throughput displays primary cell PDSCH throughput in kbps.
SC1 PDSCH Throughput displays first secondary serving cell PDSCH throughput.
SC2 PDSCH Throughput displays second serving cell PDSCH throughput.
SC3 PDSCH Throughput displays third serving cell PDSCH throughput.
SC4 PDSCH Throughput displays fourth serving cell PDSCH throughput.
SC5 PDSCH Throughput displays fifth serving cell PDSCH throughput.
SC6 PDSCH Throughput displays sixth serving cell PDSCH throughput.
SC7 PDSCH Throughput displays seventh serving cell PDSCH throughput.LTE SCell
BW indicates the beam width for beam index n.
CA mode indicates the carrier aggregation mode.
Band indicates the frequency band.
Channel indicates the selected channel.
PCI indicates the physical layer Cell ID.
MBSFN indicates the multicast broadcast single frequency network.
ROHC view
To view the ROHC (Robust Header Compression) page, go to Settings | Page settings |
ROHC and select Show page.
Profile displays the ROHC profile identifier.

Compression Rate UL displays the percentage of uplink robust header compression.
Compression Rate Dl displays the percentage of downlink robust header compression.
161
Nemo Handy
User Guide
CDMA/EVDO views
Summary view for CDMA/EVDO
System displays the current cellular system, for example, CDMA2000 1900.
Packet technology displays the current packet technology, for example, 1xEVDO REV B.
WiFi connection displays the current status of the WiFi connection. The possible states are:
• CONNECTING
• CONNECTED
• SUSPENDED
• DISCONNECTING
• DISCONNECTED
• UNKNOWN
Channel type displays the current channel type.
System ID displays the system ID.
Network ID displays the network ID.
Active pilot number displays the active pilot number(s).
Active Ec/I0 displays the Ec/I0 value for the active pilot(s).
Active RSCP displays the RSCP value for the active pilot(s).
Channel number displays the current channel number.
RX power 0/1 displays the RX power for antennas 0 and 1. The values range from −120 to 30
dBm.
TX power displays the TX power. Values range from −99 to 99 dBm.
Frame error rate displays the frame error rate in percentage.
Downlink/uplink power up % displays the percentage of DL/UL power up commands out of all
commands. If this value is 100%, all commands request to increase power.
RLP downlink/uplink throughput displays the DL/UL user throughput in radio link protocol layer.
RRI channel to pilot ratio displays RRI channel to pilot ratio in dB (Rev A).
162
Nemo Handy
User Guide
EVDO parameters per carrier:

Channel Number displays the current channel number.
Channel ID displays the channel ID.
RX Power displays RX power in dBm.
RX Power antenna 0 displays the RX power in dBm for antenna 0.
RX Power antenna 1 displays the RX power in dBm for antenna 1.
TX Power Limited displays TX power limited in dBm.
TX Pilot Power displays displays TX pilot power in dBm.
TX Adjust displays TX adjust in dBm.
TX Power displays TX power in dBm.
Power Amplifier On/Off displays the status of power amplifier.
Physical layer throughput UL displays physical layer throughput UL in bit/s.
Physical layer throughput DL displays physical layer throughput DL in bit/s.
Instantaneous PER displays instantaneous PER in %.
Short PER displays short PER in %.
Long PER displays long PER in %.
DRC index displays DRC index.
TX T2P displays TX T2P in dB.
163
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Cell measurements view for CDMA/EVDO
The Cell measurements view displays the pilot number and Ec/I0 for the serving (first on list)
and neighbor pilots.
The Cell measurements view displays the Channel number, PN, Ec/I0, and RSCP for the
serving (first on list) and neighbor channels.
164
Nemo Handy
User Guide
IPerf view for CDMA/EVDO
IPerf 2 view for CDMA/EVDO
165
Nemo Handy
User Guide
IPerf 3 view for CDMA/EVDO
166
Nemo Handy
User Guide
RX power view for CDMA/EVDO
The RX power line view displays the RX power for antennas 0 and 1. The values range from
−120 to 30 dBm.
Power control view for CDMA/EVDO
The Power control line view displays the TX power and FER (for CDMA) and RRI channel to
pilot ratio.
167
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Downlink/uplink power up % displays the percentage of DL/UL power up commands out of all
commands. If this value is 100%, all commands request to increase power.
DRC Index displays the digital rate control index.
Application throughput view for CDMA/EVDO

App. Throughput Downlink displays the data throughput rate in downlink direction.
The gauge view displays the application throughput in downlink direction in kb per second and
App. Throughput Uplink displays the data throughput rate in uplink direction.
The gauge view displays the application throughput in uplink direction in kb per second and
168
Nemo Handy
User Guide
PPP throughput view for CDMA/EVDO
PPP Throughput views display the downlink and uplink throughput values in kbps. The value is
calculation.
NR views
NR Summary
NR NCI indicates the NR Cell Identity.
NR Cell ID indicates the cell identification of the current NR cell.
gNB ID indicates the 22 to 32-bit gNodeB identity.
NR RRC State displays the state of NR RRC connection.
RACH Cell type displays the serving cell type.
RACH Type displays the RACH (random-access channel) message type. The possible values
are contention based and non-contention based.
RACH Reason displays the reason for the RACH procedure 1 = Channel request, 2 = Radio
link timeout, 3 = UL data, 4 = No PUCCH (Recorded when scheduling request is not possible
because there are no PUCCH resources available), 5 = Max SR (Recorded when maximum
number of scheduling requests has been sent to the network without uplink resources), 6 =
Handover (RACH procedure after handover), 7 = DL data (This type is used when UE is not
synchronized and downlink data is received).
RACH Result displays the RACH message result. The possible values are succeeded,
aborted, and failed.
RACH Config displays RACH config.
RACH Preamble format displays the RACH preamble format.
RACH Root sequence displays RACH logical root sequence index.
RACH Maximum preamble count displays the maximum allowed number of RACH preambles.
See 3GPP 136.133 subclause 6.3.2 and 3GPP 136.321 subclause 5.1. Values range from 3 to
200.
RACH Preamble count defines the number of preambles that were sent during the RACH
procedure.
RACH Preamble backoffs displays RACH preamble responses with backoff time.
169
Nemo Handy
User Guide
RACH Preamble successes displays RACH preamble responses with PUSCH resource.
RACH CR Failures displays the total number of RACH contention resolution failures.
RACH CR decoding failures displays RACH contention resolution failures. This is the total
number of contention resolution failures including timer expiries and msg4 decoding failures.
RACH Pathloss displays an estimate of the radio condition and what is used to calculate initial
RACH Initial TX Power displays the initial TX power level for the RACH.
RACH Power ramping step displays the RACH preamble step.
RACH PUSCH Power displays the power level for simultaneous RACH and PUSCH
procedures.
RACH Preamble index displays the preamble index of the last successfully transmitted
preamble. This is only valid for successful RACH procedures.
RACH SSB ID displays RACH SSB ID. Range: 0 – 63.
RACH access delay displays the time from initial MSG1 to MSG2 for non-contention based
RACH procedures and time from initial MSG1 to MSG4 for contention based RACH
procedures. Valid only for successful.
RACH RA_RNTI displays the RNTI that is used on the PDCCH or NPDCCH when random
access responses are transmitted.
RACH Timing advance displays the timing advance command received in random access
response (MSG2)
SSB NR-ARFCN displays the SSB NR-ARDCN.
PCI displays physical cell identity.
BWP ID displays BWP ID.
Numerology displays numerology.
Bandwidth indicates the bandwidth of the active carrier in MHz.
DSS LTE carrier offset indicates the offset from point A to the middle of the LTE carrier.
DSS LTE carrier bandwidth indicates the DSS LTE carrier bandwidth.
NR packet link adaptation

Rank displays how many data streams are used for the data transmission. When spatial
multiplexing transmission scheme is used, the rank is the same as the number of used layers.
The value of the parameter is zero when data is not received.
PRBs displays PRBs.
PDSCH CWD displays Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH) for codeword 0.
PDSCH CW1 displays Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH) for codeword 1.
PUSCH CWO displays physical uplink shared channel for codeword 1.
MCS CWO for displays PDSCH MCS for codeword 0.
TBS CWO displays transport block size for codeword 0.
NR RLC/PDCP throughput
PDCP Downlink Throughput displays PDCP throughput in uplink direction.
PDCP Uplink Throughput displays PDCP throughput in uplink direction.
RLC Downlink Throughput displays RLC throughput in downlink direction.
RLC Uplink Throughput displays RLC throughput in uplink direction.
NR MAC throughput
MAC PCELL Downlink Tput displays MAC throughput in downlink direction for primary cell.
MAC PCELL Downlink scheduled throughput displays MAC scheduled throughput in downlink
direction for primary cell.
MAC PCELL Uplink Tput displays MAC throughput in uplink direction for primary cell.
170
Nemo Handy
User Guide
MAC PCELL Uplink Scheduled Tput displays MAC scheduled throughput in uplink direction for
primary cell.
MAC SCELL Downlink throughput displays MAC throughput in downlink direction for
secondary cells.
MAC SCELL Downlink scheduled throughput displays MAC scheduled throughput in downlink
direction for secondary cells.
MAC SCELL Uplink throughput displays MAC throughput in uplink direction for secondary
cells.
MAC SCELL Uplink scheduled throughput displays MAC scheduled throughput in uplink
direction for secondary cells.
NR physical channel throughput

Physical Channel PCELL Downlink Tput displays physical channel throughput in downlink
direction for primary cell.
Physical Channel PCELL Downlink Scheduled Tput displays physical channel scheduled
throughput in downlink direction for primary cell.
Physical Channel PCELL Uplink Tput displays physical channel throughput in uplink direction
for primary cell.
Physical Channel PCELL Uplink Scheduled Tput downlink displays physical channel
scheduled throughput in uplink direction for primary cell.
Physical channel SCELL throughput downlink displays physical channel throughput in
downlink direction for secondary cells.
Physical channel SCELL scheduled throughput downlink displays physical channel scheduled
throughput in downlink direction secondary cells.
Physical channel throughput downlink displays physical channel throughput in downlink
direction.
Physical channel scheduled throughput downlink displays physical channel scheduled
throughput in downlink direction.
NR cell measurements
BI displays beam index. Note that the beam index is only available with Qualcomm chipset-
based devices.
RSRP displays the reference signal received power.
RSRQ displays reference signal received quality.
SINR displays the ratio of the secondary synchronization signal power to noise
and interference power.
NR cell table
NR-ARFCN displays NR-ARFCN.
BI displays beam index.
RSRQ displays reference signal received quality.
RSRP displays the reference signal received power.
SINR displays the ratio of the secondary synchronization signal power to noise
and interference power.
PL displays pathloss.
TO displays timing offsett.
171
Nemo Handy
User Guide
NR TX power
Application/Physical Throughput
Application Throughput Downlink displays the application throughput in downlink direction in
kb per second.
Application Throughput Uplink displays the application throughput in uplink direction in kb per
second.
NR Physical Channel Throughput Downlink displays NR physical channel throughput in
downlink direction.
NR Physical Channel Throughput Uplink displays NR physical channel throughput in uplink
direction.
LTE PDSCH Throughput displays the downlink data throughput for the PDSCH in bps.
LTE PUSCH Throughput displays the uplink data throughput for the PUSCH in bps.
Application/MAC Throughput
NR MAC Throughput Downlink displays MAC throughput in downlink direction.
NR MAC Throughput Uplink displays MAC throughput in uplink direction.
Application Throughput Downlink displays the application throughput in downlink.
PDSCH Throughput displays the downlink data throughput for the PDSCH in bps.
NR CQI/DCI
NR CCE aggregation level defines the CCE aggregation level. Range: 1 – 16.
DCI uplink grants defines the DCI uplink grants. Minimum value: 0.
DCI downlink grants defines DCI downlink grants. Minimum value: 0.
NR MAC BLER
NR MAC Downlink BLER displays MAC block error rate for NR.
NR MAC Downlink BLER 1st displays MAC block error rate in downlink for the first serving cell.
NR MAC Downlink BLER 2nd displays MAC block error rate in downlink for the second serving
cell.
NR MAC Downlink BLER 3rd displays MAC block error rate in downlink for the third serving
cell.
Custom view
With Nemo Handy’s custom view you can tailor a view to your own needs.
To create a new custom view, select Menu | Page settings and select New page | [Empty].
Enter a name for the page and tap Create split (split can also be used as standalone
view/page). The page(s) you create will be visible in the page settings.
To add, edit and remove parameters from pages, go to Menu | Page Settings and select from
the list the page you wish to edit.
172
Nemo Handy
User Guide
You can hide and make visible pages by selecting/deselecting Show page.
You can select a smaller split if you wish by selecting the Small splits option, with which the
split is about a third of the screen whereas a normal split is half of the screen. To remove split,
tap the trash can button.
You can also select the page to be a favorite page. Favorite pages can be accessed easily by
tapping the star button on the Control Center.
Tap to open a preview of the edited page.

Tap the settings button on the top right corner of the screen and select Add | Parameter. The
Parameter editor view is displayed. Search for parameter by typing the parameter name on the
search parameter field.
Select list index, visual, text style and define label (for more information, see Adding a
parameter). If the page contains graphs, parameters can also be added to the graphs. You
must define Visual: Graph 1 (or Graph 2) and Graph Type must be set to Line Graph. Tap OK
173
Nemo Handy
User Guide
and then tap Save to save the configuration if previous configuration has not been saved. The
parameter is now visible on the page and you may exit the Parameter editor.
There are three optional way to hide default parameters:
1) By selecting Settings | Edit | Visibilities you can select the visible parameters. Tap Save.
2) By selecting Settings | Edit | Parameter, you can select whether a parameter is shown on
a page by selecting a parameter from the list and select the Show parameter checkbox and
tap OK.
3) By selecting Settings | Remove | Parameter, you may remove parameters or hide default
parameters
By selecting Settings | Reset to default, you can select to reset a display or a page.
Create split
The Custom display view opens.
Add… enables you to add a page or a parameter.
Edit… enables you to edit the display or page configurations.
Adding a page
Selecting Add... | Page enables you to add a new page in the view. Tap Page and an editor
view opens.
Name defines the name of the page and is displayed on the top of the view.
System defines the system used. Tap the system field to open the list of systems. This will
define when the page is visible. For example, if you choose LTE, the page is only visible when
the UE is connected to LTE network.
Layout defines the layout of the view, for example the position of a graph. Tap on the layout
field to open the list of layout choices.
None/Bar Graph: no graph displayed in the view if Visual is set to None or to either of the two
line graph options in parameter settings; a bar graph is displayed in the view if Visual is set to
Bar Graph in parameter settings. Note that the option None/Bar Graph selected here
overrides the Line Graph option in parameter settings.
Bottom Line Graph: the graph is displayed on the bottom of the view.
Right Line Graph: the graph is displayed in the right side of the view.
Text size (1-30) defines the size of the text displayed in the view.
Adding a parameter
Selecting Add... Parameter enables you to add a parameter in the view. Tap Parameter and
an editor view opens. Please note that the contents of the dialog vary slightly depending on
selections made.
Parameter defines the parameter used. Insert the parameter by tapping on the text field and
typing in the parameter. A list of parameters opens once letters are inserted in the field.
List Index defines the parameters shown in the graph. The best value of a parameter with
multiple values is 0, the second best is 1, and so forth. For example, List Index 1 used for
parameter Monitored Set Ec/N0 displays the second best Monitored Ec/N0 value.
Label defines the parameter name displayed in the view. If no label is inserted, the parameter
shown in the Parameter field will be displayed as the label.
Visual defines whether a graph is displayed in the view. Tap on the Visual field to open a list
of choices.
None: no graph is displayed in the view.
Graph 1: one graph is displayed in the view.
Graph 2: two graphs are displayed in the view.
Graph Type defines the graph type: the options are bar graph and line graph.
Min Value defines the minimum value for the parameter, set automatically according to the
parameter.
Max Value defines the maximum value for the parameter, set automatically according to the
parameter.
174
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Limit Value defines the threshold value for the parameter, must be set manually.
Good Color defines the color for the good values in the graph. Select a color by tapping
Select, tap on a desired color in the circle, and then tap OK.
Bad Color defines the color for the bad values in the graph. Select a color by tapping Select,
tap on a desired color in the circle, and then tap OK.
Line Size defines the size of the line shown in the graph.
Text Style defines the style of the text. Tap the field to select a style: normal, bold, or cursive.
Editing the display
Selecting Edit… Display enables you to edit the display title. Tap Display and an editor view
opens.
Title defines the title of the display. Tap on the text field and type a title.
Editing a page
Selecting Edit… Page enables you to edit the page settings. Tap Page and an editor view
similar to that introduced in Chapter “Adding a page” opens.
Custom display live view
Once the Custom display is in live view, it is possible to activate parameters, scale
parameters, or save configurations. Tap and hold a parameter. A Parameter dialog box opens.
Select Parameter settings from the dialog box and select the parameter you wish to edit a
from a list of available parameters to open the Parameter editor.
Set scale activates the selected parameter. This means that the scales will display values for
that parameter. Define whether the scale displaying the values for the selected parameter is
displayed on the left of on the right side of the display. Select None to hide an individual
parameter.
Auto scale defines the scale for the parameter. Tap Auto scale to open a list of choices.
Select None, and the scales return to normal.
Select High, and Nemo Handy changes the scales and zooms in on the view so that the line is
at the top of the graph and the minimum value is at the bottom of the scale. The symbol
changes to ↑.
Select Low, and Nemo Handy changes the scales and zooms in on the view so that the line is
at the bottom of the graph and the maximum value is at the top of the scales. The symbol
changes to ↓.
Select Both, and Nemo Handy checks the minimum and maximum values for the graph from
the visible area and zooms in on the view so that the line is in the middle. The ↕ symbol
appears next to the parameter name at the top of the view.
Save configuration enables saving the configuration.
Custom display example

Here is an example of how to create a new page with custom display.
1. Tap Settings | Page settings and New page.
2. The Select page dialog box opens. Select [Empty].
3. Type a name for the page (this is the name visible on the display field in live view) and
select Show page. Tap Create split.
4. The Custom display view opens. Tap Edit… Page.
5. The editor view opens. Insert the information and tap OK.
The name inserted in Name field is the name visible on the page.
6. The new page opens. To add a parameter, tap Add… Parameter.
7. The editor view opens. Insert the information and tap OK.
8. The Custom display editor view opens. In this view it is possible to add new pages or
parameters, and to edit or remove the existing display, page(s), or parameter(s).
To add a page tap Add… Page and insert the information for the page.
To add a parameter tap Add… Parameter and insert the information for the parameter.
175
Nemo Handy
User Guide
To edit the display, tap Edit… Display.

To edit the parameter(s), tap Edit… Parameter and tap on the parameter you wish to
edit.
To edit the page(s), tap Edit… Page and tap on the page you wish to edit.
9. To save the Custom display, tap Save.
10. Tap the back button of the device to exit the Custom display editor view.
11. The New page view opens. In this view you can edit ( ) or delete ( ) the Custom
display view, or create a new split by tapping Create split. Tap the back button of the
device to exit the Custom display.
12. The Test case page created in Custom display can now be viewed in the live view.
The page is displayed on the Page settings.
The page can be edited by tapping Settings | Page settings, or by tapping on the
page name on Settings | Page settings.
13. To scale a desired parameter in the graph, tap and hold on the parameter. Select
Parameter settings from the dialog box to open the Parameter editor. Select Left or
Right under Set scale or select None to hide the parameter. Finally, tap Save.
176
Nemo Handy
User Guide
7 Settings
The chapters below describe the Settings pages.
Page settings
In Nemo Handy, select Settings | Page Settings to define page settings and create custom
views. For more information, see “Custom view”
General settings
In Nemo Handy, select Settings | General to define general settings.
Privacy Notice opens the privacy notice dialog. In this dialog, you can review the Keysight
software privacy notice and opt out of diagnostics and usage data collection.
Backlight option defines the brightness of the backlight.
Answer Incoming Calls option activates/deactivates the auto answer mode. When Nemo
Handy is in auto answer mode, it answers all incoming voice calls. Note that this applies only
when doing manual testing. When using scripts, please add the script command for answering
incoming calls.
Call Answer Delay option allows you to define the delay in milliseconds before answering an
incoming call.
When Answer Allowed Numbers Only option is selected, Nemo Handy only answers incoming
calls from phone numbers that have been added to Allowed Phone Numbers list. Incoming
calls from numbers that do not appear in the list are not answered and Nemo Handy hangs up
the call. In this case, call events are not written into the measurement file.
Allowed Numbers enables adding new phone numbers to the Allowed Phone Numbers list.
Enter the phone number without country code and select Save. Note that you are able to add
several new numbers from the same dialog.
Active WiFi Scanning activates/deactivates WiFi scanning.
Forcing Reset option allows you to define whether the forcing lock settings return to default
when the Nemo Handy application is closed. Forcing reset is on by default.
Airplane Mode at Startup option enables you to define whether Nemo Handy turns the Airplane
mode on for a few second at application startup. The options are Ask always (default),
Enabled, and Disabled. Tap on the text field to open the option selection.
Enable MMS Testing option enables MMS testing. When MMS testing is enabled, the Android
default MMS application is Nemo Handy. Note that if Nemo Handy is the default MMS
application, all received MMS messages are routed to Nemo Handy and not visible in the UI.
To use the standard MMS feature in the terminal, you need to turn off the MMS testing feature
from Nemo Handy settings.
Send Crash Reports, if selected, Nemo Handy will send crash reports.
Automatic Recovery, when selected, enables Nemo Handy to automatically recover
measurement files in case Nemo Handy stops during a measurement session. If not selected,
a recovery dialog prompting whether recovered measurement file is saved or deleted appears
when application restarts.
Write Debug Log defines whether debug log is written.
Device Label allows naming the device.
Phone Number defines the phone number of the Nemo Handy terminal. This information can
be used in post-processing to make statistics between MO and MT calls.
Custom Operator Names defines the operator names displayed in the Summary views. Tap
Add new in the dialog that opens. Define MCC (mobile country code) and MNC (mobile
network code) and enter operator name. Tap Save.
177
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Allowlist (Off/Select File) option is a file, which can be used in conditional scripting as input. It
could for instance have cells where voice calls can be made. Call attempts outside these cells
would not be made. This feature requires an optional E911 licensing option.
Import/Export Settings option enables importing and exporting settings. With this feature you
can share settings with other users and device models from your Nemo Handy terminal.
Keep Backup, when selected, keeps a backup of measurement files in the measurement unit´s
backup folder (located at /backup folder). This way, if the files disappear from Nemo Cloud,
they can be recovered from the measurement unit.
Screenshot Resolution enables you to define the resolution of screenshots (original, medium,
or small) you take from the Nemo Handy user interface.
Screenshot Format defines in which format (.pgn or .jpg) the captured screenshot will be
saved.
Screenshot Timestamp, if selected, leaves a timestamp on the captured screenshot.
Screenshot All Views, if selected, captures a screenshot of all views. Ask, when selected,
prompts Nemo Handy to ask whether to take screenshot of all views whenever the user is
taking a screenshot.
YouTube Testing in Nemo Browser option enables opening YouTube in an external browser
when performing YouTube or PEVQ-S testing. This is the default option when performing
YouTube or PEVQ-S testing with Nemo Handy. If this option does not work properly, you can
also disable this option to perform YouTube testing in Nemo Handy´s integrated browser. For
PEVQ-S testing, see Scripted YouTube testing.
HTML Testing in Nemo Browser, when selected, enables opening a web page in external
browser when performing HTML testing. This is the default option when performing
HTML testing with Nemo Handy. If this option does not work properly, you can also disable this
option to perform HTML testing in Nemo Handy´s integrated WebView browser.
Enable MMS Testing, if selected, enables you to perform MMS testing.
MMS APN defines which APN is used for MMS testing.
Automated Testing option activates/deactivates the automated testing feature. See Chapter
”Automated testing” for more information.
In addition to the manual exporting of settings, it is also done automatically when closing
Nemo Handy. When starting newly installed Nemo Handy for the first time previously exported
settings are checked and loaded.
Ignore Shannon cell ID when in Cell-DCH RRC state (only available with Shannon chipset
based devices), if selected, logs Cell ID always as “n/a” when in Cell-DCH RCC state. When
not selected, Cell ID is logged as a new value if available or previous valid value when Cell-
DCH RCC state. Note that this option is only valid when in UMTS.
Logins
In Nemo Handy, select Settings | Logins to define the login settings.
Login Twitter, if selected, allows you to log into Twitter. Logging in is mandatory when
performing Twitter testing.
Login LinkedIn, if selected, allows you to log into LinkedIn. Logging in is mandatory when
performing LinkedIn testing.
Login Dropbox, if selected, allows you to log into Dropbox. Logging in is mandatory when
performing Dropbox testing.
Login Google Drive, if selected, allows you to log into Google Drive. Logging in is mandatory
when performing Google Drive testing.
Charging settings
178
Nemo Handy
User Guide
If a device has been powered off and Automatic Power On is enabled, the device is
automatically powered on when charging.
Automatic Power On Limit defines in percentage the battery level of the device at which the
device is powered on automatically if the Automatic Power On setting is enabled.
Automatic Power Off, when enabled, powers off the device when the battery level is below
the limit set in Automatic Power On Limit setting.
Automatic Power Off Limit defines the device battery level in percentage at which the device
is automatically powered off.
Automatic Power Off Timeout (s) defines the time is seconds for how long the Nemo Handy
device waits before the device is powered off when the charger is removed or the battery level
is below the limit set in the Automatic Power Off Limit setting.
When Use Charging Limits is enabled, the device only charges between a defined range of
the battery level, e.g. 30%-70%. When a limit is reached, the charging is stopped and begins
again only when the battery level reaches the minimum value.
Power Off If Charger Disconnected, when enabled, causes Nemo Handy device to
automatically power off when the charger is removed. Automatic Power Off setting must be
enabled for this setting to be visible.
Display & Sound settings

In Nemo Handy, select Settings | Display & Sound to define the display settings.
Display Config File defines which views are displayed. Selecting Default uses the default
configuration, while Select configuration file enables you to open a customized configuration
file.
Units defines the measurement units used when defining the Nemo Handy maps
(Metric/Imperial).
Throughput Prefix defines in which unit throughput units are shown (Kilo/Mega/Giga)
Show Serving Info displays/hides the serving channel information on every page.
Serving Info Parameters allows you to select parameters to be displayed in the serving info bar
that can be displayed at the top of the screen.
Notification Volume sets the volume level for voice notifications.
179
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Notifications enables you to select which notification icons and/or notification audio files are in
use. See Chapter “Notifications” for more information on notifications.
Tap NR gBN ID / CID Format to open a dialog that enables you to define how NR gNB ID and
CID parameters are formatted to the NR Summary page.
Notifications
There are three types of notifications: audio, icon, and popup. Audio notifications will play an
audio file when triggered. Notifications with icons will appear as icons on the measurement
route on a map and in line graphs. A popup message can be selected for both types of
notifications. The popup appears briefly at the bottom of the screen. If you have a smartwatch
or other wearable with an Android operating system, you can select wearable to display
notifications on your wearable device.
defined
GPS Fix Lost yes
GPS Connected yes
Service lost yes
180
Nemo Handy
User Guide

LAC Changed yes
Changed, System Changed,
CDMA System Changed
Voice Call Attempt
Voice Call Failed
Voice Call Dropped
UL Power Up High yes Percentage of uplink power up commands over 60

DL Power Up High yes Percentage of downlink power up commands over
60
Best RSCP Low yes Active set received signal code power under -95

WhatsApp Connection
BiP Connection
Disconnected
181
Nemo Handy
User Guide

FTP Transfer Failed
BiP Transfer Failed
Custom notifications
It is possible to edit existing notifications and create new notifications.
To edit a notification, tap the arrow icon next to a notification.
Label defines the name of the notification.
Parameter name defines the parameter or measurement event for which the notification is
created.
Unit defines in which unit the parameter value is shown.
Trigger defines the condition for the notification. The options are Change, Equals threshold,
Over Threshold, and Under threshold.
Threshold defines the value that triggers the notification. This setting is hidden when the
Change trigger option is selected.
Hysteresis defines a tolerance value for triggering the notification. Value 0 means hysteresis is
not used. This setting is hidden when the Change trigger option is selected.
Speak defines the audio (text to speech) used with the notification. Type in the text and it will
be played when the notification is triggered. By tapping the speaker icon, you can preview the
audio file.
Icon displays the notification icon.
Default action defines how you will be notified. The options are audio, icon, popup or wearable.
You can also select all four.
To create a new notification, tap Add New at the top right corner of the Notification settings
page.
Parameter Name defines the parameter or measurement event for which the notification is
created.
Over threshold, and Under threshold.
audio file.
Icon defines the appearance of the notification icon (circle, square, triangle). Select the color
as well.
Default Action defines how you will be notified. The options are audio, icon, popup, or
wearable. You can also select all four.
After defining all the settings, tap Save and the new/edited notification is added to the list.
Logging settings
In Nemo Handy, select Settings | Logging to define the logging settings.
Log File Prefix allows you to define your own prefix for log file name.
182
Nemo Handy
User Guide
If the Autologging option is selected, Nemo Handy will start logging when a script is started
and stop logging when the script is finished. It is also possible to switch autologging off in the
middle of a script if you would like to continue logging even after the script is finished.
Log File Splitting option allows you to split the log files into manageable sized files instead of
having one large file. See Chapter “Log file splitting” below for more information.
Measurement Upload allows you to save connection settings into configurations that can be
used when uploading files on a server. See Chapter “Defining measurement upload
configurations” for more information.
Questionnaire allows defining when a questionnaire is displayed. You can choose to show it
when a measurement is started, paused, resumed, or stopped. A summary of answers is
shown when all questions have been answered.
When a questionnaire has been created, it can be used by engineers in the field. The idea is to
collect information from measurement environment to a measurement file. Using questionnaire
reduces errors by the user (for example, typing city or location wrong). Questionnaire results
are stored to QNOTE file format event as specified in Nemo File Format. To create
questionnaire, follow the instructions below:
1) Connect the UE to a PC and open the XML to a text editor.
2) Add / modify XML to match your need.
3) Distribute the used XML which is located in the \Nemo\Config\ folder to all
users (users need to put their XML to each measurement system).
4) After the XML has been moved to \Nemo\Config\ folder, go to Nemo Handy
settings. Enable Questionnaire and when it will be shown.
5) When Nemo Handy is configured and a measurement started, the
questionnaire is displayed for the first time (depending on the settings).
6) If a measurement is paused, actual file writing will not stop until the user has
answered the Questionnaire (depending on the setting).
7) Same thing happens when stopping the measurement (depending on the
setting).
Background Logging (OFF/ON), when activated, enables idle logging with Nemo Handy. In idle
logging mode measurements files are still logged into Nemo Handy memory while Nemo
Handy is idle and not logging.
Background Log Length defines the length of the idle log in minutes. In idle logging mode
Nemo Handy saves data for the length of time defined here. Tap Background log length to
define the idle log length.
Diagnostic data logging allows enabling/disabling binary data logging, i.e., Qualcomm or
Samsung diagnostic data (raw trace data). You can also import log codes under this option.
This functionality requires the Qualcomm/Samsung RAW logging license. Note that due to a
high sample rate, the diagnostic data logging option should not be activated during a normal
drive test.
When diagnostic data logging is enabled, the trace data is stored in a separate binary file.
Nemo Handy restart is required when diagnostic data logging is enabled, or log codes are
imported. You can import log codes by tapping the menu button on the toolbar and selecting
Import Log Codes. Select a. dmc (Qualcomm/dlf) or a .csv (Samsung/nmdb) file from the files
previously uploaded to Nemo/Handy/Config/ directory. If you need to clear all log codes, tap
the menu button on the toolbar and tap Clear All Log Codes.
Diagnostic Data Logging (only available with Qualcomm chipset-based devices, requires
Qualcomm RAW logging license) enables selecting whether Qualcomm RAW logging is
enabled. Note that you must first enable RAW logging before Nemo Handy is restarted. Tap
the settings icon on the toolbar and tap Import Log Codes. Select a .dmc file from the .dmc
files previously uploaded to Nemo/Handy/Config/ directory. To clear all log codes, tap the
settings icon on the toolbar and tap Clear All Log Codes."
IP Capture option activates/deactivates IP packet capturing. See Chapter “IP capture” for more
information on IP capturing.
IP Capture Interfaces enables selecting which interface to use for IP capture. Note that if
183
Nemo Handy
User Guide
IP Capture Max Packet Size defines how many bytes to capture from each packet.
IP Capture Filter option defines whether captured packets are filtered.
IP Capture Filter Rules allows you to define IP capture filter rules.
Initial marker, when selected, a dialog will be displayed when logging begins, in which the user
can define a measurement description.
Predefined Marker allows user to define the marker before starting logging.
Create Report after enables you to create a Nemo Instant Report.
Select Template enables you to select a default template used for the instant report.
Customize Report enables you to customize a template for the instant report.
Background logging
supports it.
Background logging enables the recording of for example potential issues outside active
measurements. When Background Logging is activated in Logging settings, and Nemo
Handy is in normal use or in idle mode in the background, Nemo Handy records all detected
problems or issues even if there is no actual measurement running at the time. To save these
detected issues in a measurement file, go to Menu | Save background logging data. You
can keep, rename, or delete the file.
Note that in background logging mode Nemo Handy stores data only for the length of time
defined in Logging | Background log length. The default length is set to five minutes, which
means that the last five minutes are stored in Nemo Handy memory. If this five-minute limit is
exceeded, Nemo Handy erases the data from the start of the idle logging session onwards,
keeping the total time of the log within the set limit. Any detected issues can be saved only
within the set time limit.
Log file splitting

Log file splitting allows you to split the log files into manageable sized files instead of having
one large file. The files can be split based on file size or file length. Log file splitting is available
only when running scripts. You can access the Log file splitting dialog box through Settings |
Logging | Log File Splitting.
If you select the Flexible file size limit option, you can define a file size in MB. When that file
size is reached, the file will be saved and a new file created. With the Flexible option, the
ongoing script will not be interrupted when the limit is reached. Instead, logging will continue
until the current script round (repeat) is finished, and a new file is created when the next script
round is started.
If you select the Fixed size limit option, you can define a file size in MB. When that file size is
reached, the file will be saved and a new file created. With the Fixed option, the ongoing script
round (repeat) is interrupted when the limit is reached, a new file is created, and the ongoing
script round is started from the beginning.
Please note that if you define a very small file size and select the fixed file size limit
option, there is a possibility that the script will loop indefinitely. In such a case, adjust
the file size limit big enough for the script to finish.
If you select the Flexible file length limit option, you can define a file length in minutes. When
that length is reached, the file will be saved and a new file created. With the Flexible option,
the ongoing script will not be interrupted when the limit is reached. Instead, logging will
continue until the current script round (repeat) is finished, and a new file is created when the
next script round is started.
184
Nemo Handy
User Guide
If you select the Fixed file length limit option, you can define the file length in minutes. When
that length is reached, the file will be saved and a new file created. With the Fixed option, the
ongoing script round (repeat) is interrupted when the limit is reached, a new file is created, and
the ongoing script round is started from the beginning.
Please note that if you define a very short file length and select the fixed file length
limit option, there is a possibility that the script will loop indefinitely. In such a case,
adjust the file length limit long enough for the script to finish.
If you select the Nested script option, Nemo Handy creates a new log file for each nested
script execution.
Defining measurement upload configurations

A measurement upload configuration contains settings for the connection used to upload the
files and information about how the files are named and where they are uploaded.
Select one of the existing configurations or create a new one by tapping Create New.
First select the protocol used for the transfer.
On the Connection configuration page, define settings needed for the file upload. Once you
have defined all settings, tap Save. The configuration will appear on the Select Configuration
page. Note that the contents vary slightly depending on the selected protocol.
Target folder path defines the target location for the uploaded files when FTP protocol is used.
Type in the path, tap Verify Path, and the target folder path will be checked. If you want to
create a new target folder on the FTP server, type in the name in the Target folder path field
(for example /handy) and tap Create and Verify. If the path is correct, a Path verification
successful message is displayed.
URL defines the target path for the uploaded files when HTTP or HTTPS protocol is used.
Type in the address, tap Verify URL, and the target path will be checked. If the path is correct,
a Verification successful message is displayed.
Prefix type defines a prefix that will be added at the beginning of the file name. Select None
and no prefix will be added and IMEI will add the terminal’s IMEI code. You can also type in a
custom prefix.
Selected HTTP(S)/(S)FTP connection defines the connection used for the file upload. To
select a premade connection, tap Select, select a connection from the list, and tap Select. To
create a new connection, tap Select on the Create configuration page and then tap Create
New.
FTP connection settings

On the Create FTP connection page, define the FTP connection settings.
Server defines the FTP server address. Note that when using an IPv6 address as the server
address, the IPv6 address must be in brackets.

After defining all settings, tap Verify Connection to check that the settings are correct. You
should see the Verification successful message. After the connection has been verified, tap
Save to save the connection for future use. The saved connection will be added on the Select
FTP connection page. You can access the Select FTP connection page also through the script
editor when defining FTP logon settings and when defining settings for manual FTP transfers
HTTP(S) connection settings
On the Create HTTP/HTTPS connection page, define the connection settings for HTTP and
HTTPS protocols.
Host defines the host IP address.
185
Nemo Handy
User Guide

Select the Authenticate server option (for HTTPS) to authenticate the HTTPS server.
Save to save the connection for future use.
Dropbox connection settings
On the Create configuration page, define the connection settings for the Dropbox protocol.
Target folder path defines the target location for the uploaded files when Dropbox is used.
create a new target folder on the Dropbox server, type in the name in the Target folder path
field (for example /handy) and tap Create and Verify. If the path is correct, a Path verification
and no prefix will be added, and IMEI will add the terminal’s IMEI code. You can also type in a
custom prefix.
After defining the settings, tap Save to save the connection for future use.
Real-time reporting
Real-time reporting can be used together with Nemo Cloud (or any supporting third-party tool)
to send status reports with defined interval. Reports include information like signal strength,
coordinates and statistics. This information can be utilized in real-time when monitoring
measurement units with Nemo Cloud.
To define real-time reporting settings, go to Settings | Real-time reporting.
Reporting enables/disables real-time reporting.
Report interval defines the reporting interval in seconds.
Network settings opens the Selected configuration dialog box. For more information, see
Chapter “Uploading log files on server”.
GPS settings
When the Use GPS time option is activated, the system clock is synchronized with GPS time
at the beginning of a measurement. Logging is not started before there is a GPS fix and the
clock can be synchronized. If logging is started and there is no GPS fix, Nemo Handy will go
into "Waiting state" during which Nemo Handy cannot be used.
GPS source defines the GPS source. When using Nemo Handy in Nemo Autonomous Probe
mode, you can use USB GPS over tethered connection by selecting Autonomous Probe
GPS as GPS source.
Bluetooth devices displays the enabled devices.
When automated testing is selected in Settings | General, the following options are displayed.
When GPS required option is activated, GPS is required.
When the Use fixed location option is activated, Nemo Handy does not log GPS data with
measurements, but will instead write the same coordinates into all measurement files and
reports.
Tapping Location allows you to define the location for the coordinates written into all
measurement files and reports.
Please note that this option affects the system clock in Nemo Handy. Not the clock in
the Android terminal.
186
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Map settings
Draw route defines when the measurement route is drawn on the map. The alternatives are
always, when logging, and never.
Show notifications on map (Yes/No) defines whether notifications appear on the map.
Route width defines the width of the route line on the scale from 1-20.
Route color defines the color displaying the route on the map.
Idle route, (on/off) when activated, allows Nemo Handy to continue drawing the route and
collecting the route data also when the measurement is in idle mode or paused.
Indicate parameter on route color, when set to Yes, enables you to observe the values of
certain network parameters from the route coloring on the map. The colors referring to each
parameter are predefined.
Map parameters allows you to select parameters to be displayed on a map. You can also
define a color set for the parameters.
Import GPX route enables you import a GPX file. Tap Import GPX route and select a .gpx file
from the list. Note that you need to ensure that you have copied the GPX file to your Nemo
Handy device before you can import the file.
Show GPX route, when selected, displays the GPX route on top of the map.
Select Nemo Navigation Assistant enables you to select a GPS navigation device to be used
alongside Nemo Handy. Tapping Select Nemo Navigation Assistant opens the Select device
dialog which shows paired devices. Select the correct device from the list. If the device you
wish to select is not displayed, select Show all paired devices.
Map select enables you to select between Google Map and OpenStreetMap (Google Map
selected as default).
Google Map type defines whether normal or satellite map is used.
HTTP map loading (with Open Street Map selected) defines when Nemo Handy is allowed to
load a map (Always/When not logging/Never).
Google Map
Using Google Map may require updating the Google Play services. In this case, when Google
Map is selected as the map type Nemo Handy asks you to update the Google Play services.
Tap Update.
You will need to sign in to a Google Account to update Google Play services.
If you already have a Google Account, tap Existing and enter your account details. If you
need to create a new account, tap New and insert your information details. Follow the
instructions on the view for the updating process.
Signing in and updating the services may take a few minutes. After the update is done, restart
the Nemo Handy application.
With Google Map you can select between the normal view and the satellite view. To define the
Google Map type, go to Settings | Map | Google Map type and select Normal or Satellite.
Indoor settings
Floorplans displays a list of .tab files that have been loaded in Nemo Handy.
Import iBwave maps allows you to import iBwave map files.
DAS Anomalies, (on/off) when activated, allows you to test and verify in-building DAS
(Distributed Antenna Systems) antennas and view the antennas on the indoor map.
DAS Anomalies Settings allows you to define the DAS test area radius, intensity of the colors
indicating the results, and the signal limits for acceptable test results.
Draw zones (on/off), when activated, draws zones on the indoor map after the loading of
iBwave map files. The Draw zones (on/off) setting can be enabled in Indoor settings. The zone
187
Nemo Handy
User Guide
layer information is stored in the iBwave project file. Zones are used for example for drawing
areas for DAS antenna groups to graphically show where a certain cell is transmitting.
BTS settings
BTS file defines the BTS file displayed on the map.
To select a BTS file, the files (which are *.nbf or *.csv format) must first be loaded from a PC
into the phone’s BTS folder (phone/ Nemo/ Handy/ BTS), from where they are listed in the
BTS settings. If no BTS files have been loaded, the listing will be empty. Select a BTS file from
the list of files shown on the popup window.
Encrypt BTS files enables you to encrypt the BTS files. After encrypting a BTS file a password
is required to open the file. The encrypted .nab file can be transferred to a PC via USB cable
or Bluetooth without a password. A message is displayed if there are no BTS files to encrypt.
Switch on the Use BTS file option to view the BTS icons on the map and to define BTS cells
settings.
Show BTS file cells defines whether BTS icons are displayed on the map. Also, select a BTS
file on the BTS settings page.
BTS cells settings defines the size and the color of BTS cells. You can define in pixels the size
of active cell, active system, and other system BTS icons.
Use cell range, if selected, shows actual cell ranges on the map.
Range transparency defines the transparency of the cell range showed on the map.
Draw serving lines (ON/OFF), when activated, draws line(s) from the current location to the
active cell(s).
Active cell size defines the size of the active serving cell when a BTS file is used.
Active cell color defines the color for the serving cell when a BTS file is used.
Active system cells cell size defines the size for the serving system base stations when a BTS
file is used.
Active system color defines the color for serving system base stations when a BTS file is used.
For example, if the device is connected to a WCDMA network, all WCDMA base stations are
colored with the selected color.
Show other system cells, when selected, shows cells from non-serving system base stations
when a BTS file is used.
Other system color defines the color for the non-serving system base stations when a BTS file
is used. For example, if the device is connected to a WCDMA network, all other base stations
are colored with the selected color.
To adjust the cell colors, tap on the color icon.
Cell info allows you to display selected cell information on a map. First select a BTS file and
then switch on the Use BTS file option. Select the information you would like to view on a
map. See Chapter “BTS information on a map” for more information.
Serving info parameters

When you tap Serving info parameters in the Display & Sound settings, the Serving info
parameters dialog box appears. Here you will find a list of parameters to choose from.
Please note that only parameters supported by the current system will be displayed
in the serving info bar. For example, if you select parameters from the GSM group
and the device is connected to a WCDMA network, the parameters will not be
displayed.
188
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Tap on a technology from the list. A second-level list opens. Select a parameter from the
second-level list by tapping on the check box. If you wish to edit the properties of the
parameter, tap the button.

You can edit the appearance of the parameter in the serving info bar and define for which
technologies the parameter is displayed. Finally tap Save.
Label refers to the parameter name displayed in the serving info bar.
Format defines the format in which the value is displayed. The options are decimal,
hexadecimal, and octadecimal.
Show unit defines whether the parameter value unit is displayed in the serving info bar.
System defines for which network technologies the parameter is displayed.
Note that the width of the serving info bar is limited, so all selected parameters may
not fit in the bar. Turning the terminal horizontally will make the serving info bar wider
and more parameters will fit in.
Serving info bar

You can select parameters to be displayed in the serving info bar that is displayed at the top of
the screen (select Settings | Display & Sound | Show serving info).
To edit the parameter info bar, tap and hold on the parameter info bar to open the settings
popup.
The settings icon ( ) opens the Serving info parameter window, where you can select more
parameters to be displayed on the serving info bar.
The paintbrush icon ( ) opens a popup window in which you can define the color of the text
displayed on serving info bar.
The minus icon – allows you to decrease the font size of the text displayed on the serving info
bar.
The plus icon + allows you to increase the font size of the text displayed in the serving info bar.
Note that you can scroll the serving info text horizontally.
Voice quality settings

Please note that this page appears only if your license includes the voice quality
option.
Through the Voice Quality page you can define voice quality testing settings. See Chapter
“Voice quality testing” for more information on performing voice quality tests.
Voice quality mode defines the voice quality mode. The options are off and uplink+downlink.
• Uplink+downlink: Sample is sent and received in turns. The downlink voice quality is
measured by the Nemo Handy terminal and uplink quality by Nemo Server or another
Nemo Handy terminal.
189
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Sample file defines the voice sample file used in the voice quality testing. There are two types
of samples: wideband and narrowband. If the sample filename has a “wb” postfix, the sample
is wideband. Otherwise it is narrowband.
POLQA measurements can be done in Super Wideband (SWB) or in Narrowband (NB) mode.
The mode is selected automatically based on the sample, that is, if a wb sample is selected,
SWB POLQA measurement mode will be used. Respectively, if NB sample file is selected, NB
POLQA measurement mode will be used.
Note that SWB POLQA measurement mode should be only used with voice calls
where WB AMR codecs are used. WB AMR is only used in mobile-to-mobile voice
calls where in both ends the mobile is WB AMR capable, and the WB AMR codec is
enabled in the network.
Note that SWB POLQA cannot be used when testing against a fixed line, for
example, between Nemo Handy and Nemo Server.
MOS threshold can be used to limit the number of samples saved to the measurement file. For
Uplink volume sets the uplink volume level for voice call and VoIP call. Please note that in
most cases the default value is recommended.
Local audio output defines the audio output of voice quality calls. The output is handset by
default. You can also select loudspeaker or Bluetooth-headset. To pair a Bluetooth-headset
with the phone go to Apps | Settings | Bluetooth.
POLQA version enables you to select which POLQA version is used. The default version is
POLQA 2.4.
Nemo Server config settings

Note that Nemo Server config settings are hidden if call sequencer is activated.
Tap Nemo Server settings to define the Nemo Server URL, username, password, remote
number i.e. the channel on which commands and options are set, line number i.e the server
number to which calls are made, and prefix of the Nemo Server.
Use configuration allows enabling/disabling Nemo server configuration.
When Time sync is enabled, latency and UTC time information is sent to Nemo Server with
every command.
When Mandatory is enabled, configuring the server successfully is mandatory for the
execution of the script, that is, if the server request fails Nemo Handy proceeds to next
command, if there is any, without making the call. When disabled, the call is made even if the
server request fails.
When Initial connection is selected, the script is not started until the HTTP commands go
through from the Nemo Handy device to the server at least once.
Save sample defines whether samples falling below MOS threshold are saved or not.
MOS threshold can be used to limit the number of samples saved to the server. For example,
only samples with a MOS score below 3 are saved.
Enable POLQA defines whether MOS values are calculated using POLQA.
Call sequencer settings

Note that Call Sequencer is automatically disabled when automated testing
mode is enabled in Settings | General but Nemo Handy unit is not assigned to a
manual project via Nemo Cloud.
Enable Activate Call Sequencer to activate the call sequencer.
190
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Address defines the server address.

Password defines the server password.
Tap the Menu button ( ) and select Call Sequence Editor to create, remove, edit and
select sequences.
Enter a phone number and select an existing sequence file from a list under Current Sequence
File. To change the call sequence file, select another sequence file from the list, tap and hold
the file name and tap Load from the opening dialog. You are also able to edit, delete, and
rename the file in the same dialog. To edit or unload a file under Call Sequence Settings, tap
and hold the file name.
To create a new sequence, tap in the upper right corner of the screen. Enter a name for
the new call sequence file in the opening dialog and click OK. The Call Sequence Editor is
opened, allowing creating, removing, editing and selecting sequences.
Startup delay (s) defines how many seconds Nemo Handy waits before starting a
call. The default time is 30 seconds.
Originating calls defines how many originating calls are made per sequence.
Terminating calls defines how many terminating calls are made per sequence.
Repeats defines how many times the sequence is repeated.
Call duration defines the duration of the call in seconds, unless used with Call End
Condition (see below).
Minimum wait between calls defines the minimum wait period between calls in
seconds.
Select Show advanced settings to display advanced settings. Default values of
advanced settings has been verified in field and lab conditions for reliable
functionality. Changing these values may cause system instability i.e. call sync
issues.
Call setup timeout (default 20s, min. 5s) defines the maximum duration of
the call setup in seconds.
Call teardown timeout (default 20s, min 5s) defines the minimum wait
between calls. Note that the call teardown duration is included in the
minimum wait between calls setting so if you change the teardown duration,
it affects the minimum wait between calls setting as well.
Server request timeout (default 30s) defines the maximum duration of the
server request in seconds.
Callee start advance (default 5s, max 10s, min 0s) defines how many
seconds before the agreed time the call receiver begins to wait for the call.
Voice quality mode defines the voice quality mode:
an audio sample to uplink and the Callee (Mobile Terminating device) waits for a sync tone,
records a sample and then sends its own sync and sample to uplink. This is the default mode
sample and send its own sample to uplink. This is useful for example in
CDMA networks where MO device does not receive information on when
MT device has answered the call and call is truly connected. Select this
option with CDMA calls. After selecting a sample file, you can save the
sample to Nemo Server if needed by selecting the Save sample checkbox.
VQMon: sample play, when selected, the Caller sends an audio sample without a
sync tone.
Sample file (visible when On: caller initiated (default)/On: callee initiated/VQMon:
sample play is selected) defines the voice sample file used in the voice quality
testing. There are two types of samples: wideband and narrowband. If the sample
filename has wb as postfix, the sample is wideband. Otherwise the sample is
narrowband.
191
Nemo Handy
User Guide
MOS threshold (visible when On: caller initiated (default)/On: callee initiated/VQMon:
sample play is selected) can be used to limit the number of samples saved to the
measurement file. For example, only samples with a MOS score below 3 are saved.
After selecting a sample file, you can save the sample to Nemo Server if necessary
by selecting the Save sample option.
sample.
Uplink volume (visible when On: caller initiated (default)/On: callee initiated/VQMon:
sample play is selected) defines the uplink volume level. When selecting Default, the
default volume level is used. Selecting Define enables the user to set the volume
level.
2.4/POLQA 3.0).
Nemo Cloud settings

Nemo Cloud with Nemo Handy can be purchased as Basic (with file synchronization)
or Premium (with file synchronization and automation). Please note that if you do not
purchase one of these two options purchased you cannot use Nemo Cloud.
Storage defines which files Nemo Handy uses when files are uploaded, that is, from which file
the file content is displayed when uploading files, and the location where new created files are
saved. The options of the storage preference are Ask always, when Nemo Handy asks the
storage location every time files are uploaded or saved; Local, when files are uploaded and
saved locally; and Nemo Cloud, when files are uploaded and saved in Nemo Cloud. The
preference can be changed later in Nemo Cloud settings in Nemo Handy. The Storage button
is disabled when no active project is received from the server.
When Sync only in WiFi (ON/OFF) is selected, file synching takes place only when Nemo
Handy is connected to WiFi. If the WiFi connection drops, the file synchronization stops and
resumes when Nemo Handy reconnects to WiFi.
When Sync when logging (ON/OFF) is selected, Nemo Handy synchronizes files by default.
When disabled, Nemo Handy stops the file synchronization during measurements and
synchronizes the files automatically when the measurement ends
To log in to Nemo Cloud, first tap the Login button. Next, define the following:
Service address is the address to your Nemo Cloud server. If you want to change to a different
Nemo Cloud instance, change the address to the desired one.
Username is the user name for Nemo Cloud created in the Nemo Cloud user interface.
Password is the password for Nemo Cloud created in the Nemo Cloud user interface.
Next, tap Login. The summary displayed below Login/Logout is the latest message sent from
Nemo Cloud. Please note that possible error messages sent from Nemo Cloud are displayed
in this summary.
Nemo Walker Air settings

192
Nemo Handy
User Guide
When Standalone is selected, the application operates as a standalone Nemo Handy.

When Nemo Walker Air Controller is selected, the application operates as a Nemo Walker Air
Controller. See Nemo Walker Air User Guide for more information.
When Nemo Walker Air Agent is selected, the application operates as a Nemo Walker Air
Agent. See Nemo Walker Air User Guide for more information.
A restart is required after the operation mode change.
Scanner settings
Scanner devices enables you to select a scanner in a dialog box.
Scanner enabled (ON/OFF) enables the scanner.
Site verification settings

These settings are for site acceptance and antenna verification testing.
Enable of disable test (call test) activates or deactivates the site verification call test.
Phone number defines the phone number for the call test. Tap the text field and type in the
number.
Enable of disable test (data transfer test) activates or deactivates the site verification data
transfer test.
Data transfer test configuration enables you to configure the settings for site verification data
transfer test. Tap text field and configure the data transfer settings for the test.
Enable of disable test (ping test) activates or deactivates the site verification ping test.
Ping test address defines the ping address for the site verification ping test.
Limit values configurations enables you to define the limit values for the site verification test
configurations.
193
Nemo Handy
User Guide
8 Feedback
Tap Give Feedback from the home screen to open a feedback form. Enter you name
(optional) and feedback and tap SUBMIT. Please note that you will not receive a reply to your
feedback. If you have feedback that requires response, please contact Nemo Technical
Support.
194
Nemo Handy
User Guide
9 DRT4311B Scanner
Nemo Handy supports measurements with DRT4311B test receiver. For details regarding
hardware, setting up, and mounting the DRT4311B, DRT4311B software, battery charging and
troubleshooting, please refer to DRT4311B Miniature Test Receiver Hardware Manual,
supplied with the product.
Installing Mps Scanner Service and license
Installing Mps Scanner Service Air using SD card

Nemo Handy devices are delivered preinstalled but you may need to update DRT Mps
Scanner Service yourself. Please follow these instructions carefully to install Mps Scanner
Service.
Installing Mps scanner service

1. Uninstall the old Mps Scanner Service version by going to
Apps\Settings\More\Application Manager and tapping Uninstall.
2. Connect the USB cable to the Nemo Handy device and to the computer where you
have the Mps Scanner Service installation files.
4. Copy MpsScannerService.apk file onto your device under Nemo folder.
5. Disconnect the data cable from the device.
6. Go to Apps\My Files\All Files\Nemo and select Mps Scanner Service.apk file from the
list.
7. If you already have Mps Scanner Service installed on the device, the installer program
will ask to replace the old version. Select Install.
8. Repeat all steps for each device.
9. Installation is started and once it is finished, you can start using Mps Scanner Service.
Installing Mps Scanner Service from KSM

Nemo Handy devices are delivered preinstalled but you may need to update Mps Scanner
Service yourself. Please follow these instructions carefully to install Mps Scanner Service.
App\Setting\More\Application Manager and tapping Uninstall on your Mps Scanner
Service.
4. Go to the latest Mps Scanner Service release and select the setup file (for example,
Mps SCANNER SERVICE_1.10.42_Setup) from Product Family | Nemo Handy.
transfer is completed.
6. If you already have Mps Scanner Service installed on the device, the installer program
7. Installation is started and once it is finished, you can start using Mps Scanner Service.
195
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Installing Mps Scanner Service license

Nemo Handy devices are delivered preinstalled but you may need to update the Mps Scanner
Service license. Mps Scanner Service retrieves the license automatically over the air when
starting it for the first time without a license. If you do not have the possibility to connect the
Nemo Handy device to internet via mobile connection or WiFi, please contact Nemo Helpdesk
for the license.
Please follow these instructions carefully to select the Mps Scanner Service.
Selecting Mps Scanner Service license:
example, when a new product version containing new features requiring a license is
new license is uploaded to the server by Nemo Technical Support and Nemo Handy
automatically connects to the server and retrieves the available licenses.
1. In Nemo Handy, go to Menu | About and tap Browse licenses.

3. Tap Refresh to refresh the list of available licenses for Mps Scanner Service.
variant, options and expiration date. There is no additional information available for a
regular license.
Bluetooth pairing
Before beginning the measurements, pairing the devices through a Bluetooth connection is
required. This can be done through the devices’ own settings: Settings | Network
connections | Bluetooth | My device. When the Bluetooth connections are enabled on the
devices, the available device must be chosen for pairing. Once the devices have been
selected there are two minutes to pair the devices. The devices only need to be paired once,
after the first pairing the connection will be saved in the devices.
In Nemo Handy, go to Settings | Scanner | Scanner devices.
The Select device dialog box opens. Select the correct scanner and tap OK.
Note that DRT4311B scanner’s default pin number is 1234.
The page for DRT4311 is shown as a default. However, if you wish to hide the page, select
Settings | Page settings | DRT 4311B, clear Show page, and tap the Back key of the device.
On the DRT4311B page you can connect or disconnect the scanner. To configure scanner, tap
Configure. Scan configuration page opens.
Scan configuration page shows you the configuration that is being currently used. You can
also select a type of scan you want to configure. To save or load configurations, tap Menu |
Save/ Save as/ Load. If you do not have any earlier configurations to load, you must make a
new configuration and save it. To create new items, tap Add New on the toolbar. The Select
scan type dialog box opens. Select scan type.
If you do not define a name for a configuration, it will be automatically saved as
ScannerConfigFile.xml.
196
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Scan types
GSM Frequency Scan

On the GSM frequency scan page you can select the band, measurement mode and edit
selected channels.
Tap Band to select the band from the drop-down list.
By tapping Measurement mode, you can select among normal, enhanced, and survey
operation modes.
Tapping Edit opens the Channel range editor dialog box.
In the dialog box you can define the channel range either by defining the start channel and the
end channel and tapping Add or by selecting channels by tapping the channel range button
under “Select channels from the channel range”.
Selected channels are displayed under SELECTED CHANNELS. By tapping you can edit
and delete range items.
UMTS pilot scan

On the UMTS pilot scan page you can select the band, top n values, measurement mode and
channels.
By tapping Top n values you can define how many top values are shown.
By tapping Measurement mode, you can select among normal, enhanced, and survey
operation modes.
Tapping Edit opens the Channel range editor dialog box.
LTE OFDM scan

On the LTE OFDM scan page you can select the band, channel, bandwidth, cyclic prefix, top n
values, duplexing, measurement mode and number, or Tx port detect.
Tap Band to select the band from a drop-down list.Some of the LTE OFDM scan
configurations are set on AutoDetect as a default.
To change bandwidth, tap AutoDetect. Select among AutoDetect, Normal, and Extended.
To change cyclic prefix, tap AutoDetect. Select among AutoDetect, Normal, and Extended.
To change duplexing, tap AutoDetect. Select among AutoDetect, FDD, and TDD.
By tapping Measurement mode, you can select among normal, enhanced and survey.
Tap Num Tx port detect to change the number of TX port detect. Select among AutoDetect,
1, 2, and 4.
Tapping Edit next to SELECTED CHANNELS opens the Channel range editor dialog box.
197
Nemo Handy
User Guide
CDMA pilot scan

On the CDMA pilot scan page you can select the band, top n values, and measurement mode
and channel.
Tap Band to select the band from a drop-down list.
Measurement mode allows you to define measurement mode: normal, enhanced, or survey.
EVDO pilot scan

On the EVDO pilot scan page you can select the band, top n values, and measurement mode,
and channel.
Measurement mode allows you to define measurement mode: normal, enhanced, or survey.
CW (continuous wave) RSSI scan

On the CW RSSI scan page you can select the system, band, bandwidth, measurement mode,
and channel.
Tap System to select the system.
Tap Band to select the band, and Bandwidth to select the bandwidth.
Measurement mode allows you to define the measurement mode. The options for the mode
are Maximum, Minimum, Average, and All. Tap on the Operation mode field and select the
mode.
Blind scan
In scan configurations you can select Blind scan. You can add any number of blind scans to
the scan configuration Unlike the other scan types, blind scan is a one-shot scan. If the
scanning configurations include only blind scans, when all the configured blind scans are
performed, the scanner goes to Configured state and stops scanning. If blind scan is mixed
with other scan types, for example frequency scan, the scanning is stopped when the user
stops the scan. GSM blind scans generate FREQSCAN events, UMTS/CDMA/EVDO blind
198
Nemo Handy
User Guide
scans generate PILOTSCAN GSM events, and LTE blind scans generate OFDMSCAN events.
Results for blind scans are displayed on the Blind Scan Results page. Results for each
supported system (GSM, WCDMA, LTE, CDMA, EVDO) are displayed on a designated
separate page.
Tap System to select the system for the scan from the pulldown menu.
Tap Band to select the band for the scan.
Scanning results
Note that if you run a script with Airplane mode, the scanning results may be
incomplete
To show scanning results, go to Settings | Page Settings, and select LTE Scan
Results/UMTS Pilot Scan Results/GSM Frequency Scan Results/CW RSSI Scan
Results/Blind Scan Results/NR PS/SS Scan Results/NR DM/SSB Scan Results. Select
To show cell scan scanning results with Nemo Handy, a new page must be created by
selecting Settings | Page Settings | New Page | Cellscan Results.
If you view the results in bar graphs, you can adjust the view if the view is locked. Locking the
view also displays the values on graphs.
Tap and hold the view to open the Menu dialog box. In the dialog box, you can select among
Zoom, Sort by, Threshold, and Parameter.
Zoom enables you to set the zoom level with a slider.
Sort by enables you to sort the results by channel or signal strength (Channel, Weak first,
Strong first).
With Threshold you can set the threshold (maximum value and minimum value) for results that
will be displayed.
Parameter enables you to view the results according to the parameter.
Define any or all of the above in their individual dialog boxes and tap OK.
Filter enables you to select a single channel to be shown on the scan result bar graph. When a
filter is added to a parameter, it is shown in parentheses after the parameter title. Only values
matching the filter are shown on the bar graph. For example: If the channel filter is 1300, only
values from that channel (can have multiple PCIs) are shown.
199
Nemo Handy
User Guide
LTE scan result example without filter:
LTE scan result example with filter:
200
Nemo Handy
User Guide
GSM frequency result examples:
UMTS pilot scan result examples:
201
Nemo Handy
User Guide
PCTEL Gflex/HBflex/IBflex Scanners

Nemo Handy supports measurements with PCTEL Gflex, IBflex and HBflex test receiver. For
details regarding hardware, setting up, and mounting the scanner software, battery charging
and troubleshooting, please refer to the product documentation supplied with the product.
Installing PCTEL SeeGullConnect service
Installing PCTEL Scanner Service using SD card

Nemo Handy devices are delivered pre-installed, but you may need to update PCTEL Scanner
Service yourself. Please follow these instructions carefully to install the scanner service
application. Note that the scanner service application version must be version 3.1.0.0 or
newer.
Installing Scanner Service

1. Uninstall the old Scanner Service version by going to
Apps\Settings\More\Application Manager and tapping Uninstall.
2. Connect the USB cable to the Nemo Handy device and to the computer where you
have the Scanner Service installation files.
4. Copy SeeGullConnect_X.X.X.X.apk file onto your device under Nemo folder.
6. Go to Apps\My Files\All Files\Nemo and select SeeGullConnect_X.X.X.X.apk file
from the list.
7. If you already have SeeGullConnect_X.X.X.X.apk installed on the device, the installer
program will ask to replace the old version. Select Install.
9. Installation is started and once it is finished, you can start using Scanner Service.
Installing Scanner Service from KSM

Nemo Handy devices are delivered preinstalled but you may need to update PCTEL Scanner
Service yourself. Please follow these instructions carefully to install Scanner Service.
Apps\Settings\More\Application Manager and tapping Uninstall on your Scanner
Service.
4. Download the latest PCTEL Scanner Service release and select the setup file (for
example SeeGullConnect_1.X.X.X.apk _Setup) from Product Family | Nemo Handy.
6. If you already have Scanner Service installed on the device, the installer program will
ask to replace the old version. Select Install.
7. Installation is started and once it is finished, you can start using Scanner Service.
202
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Bluetooth pairing
Note that when pairing a device using Android 10 or later operating system to an
IBflex scanner, you must switch on Location from the device settings.
Note that previous scanner configuration is loaded automatically when Nemo Handy
starts.
In Nemo Handy, go to Settings | Scanner | Scanner devices.
The Select device dialog box opens. Select the correct scanner and tap OK.
Scan configuration page shows you the configuration that is being currently used. You can
also select a type of scan you want to configure. To save or load configurations, tap Menu |
Save/ Save as/ Load. If you do not have any earlier configurations to load, you must make a
new configuration and save it. To create new items, tap Add New on the toolbar. The Select
scan type dialog box opens.
Scan types
Top N WiFi Signal Scan

Top N WiFi Signal Scan requires an external USB WiFi adapter to be
installed into the PCTEL IBflex/HBflex scanner. This scan mode also
requires a Top N WiFi Signal Scan license for Nemo Handy.
On the Top N WiFi Signal Scan configuration dialog you can configure the following options:
bandwidth, channels, number of ID’s and CINR (Carrier to Interference and Noise Ratio).
Available frequencies are 2.4 GHz and 5.0 GHz. Supported channels for 2.4 GHz are: 1-13.
The supported channels for 5.0 GHz are: 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64, 100, 104, 108, 112,
116, 120, 124, 128, 132, 136, 140, 149, 153, 157, 161, 165.
Frequency scan
On the Frequency scan page you can select the band, bandwidth (only with LTE), C/I, channel
and whether SIB signalling is enabled.
203
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Pilot scan
On the Pilot scan page you can select the band, number of pilots, pilot mode, channel, and
whether SIB signaling is enabled
When pilot scan is performed, Nemo Handy also writes cell scan events by using SIB signaling
to obtain data to perform cell scan. Enable SIB signaling to activate this functionality.
Tap Band to select the band.
Tap the Number of pilots field and insert a value to define the number of pilots.
Pilot mode allows you to define the pilot mode: autodetect, normal, or extended.
LTE OFDM scan

On the LTE OFDM scan page you can select the band, bandwidth, signal mode, define the
number of signals, and enable/disable MIMO scan. When frequency scan is performed, Nemo
Handy also writes cell scan events by using SIB signaling to obtain data to perform cell scan.
Enable SIB signaling to activate this functionality. Please note that with scanner firmware
version 2.0.2.0 and newer you can use channel bandwidth auto-detection
(LTE_BANDWIDTH_AUTO) for LTE signals 1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15, and 20 MHz.
Tap Band to select a band and Bandwidth to select a bandwidth.

Tap Signal Mode to select signal mode for the scan. The possibilities are: Standard, High
Speed Train, and 5G/4G Spectrum Sharing. Note that 5G/4G Spectrum Sharing requires a
license provided by PCTEL.
Tap the Number of signals field and insert a value to define the number of signals.
Mimo scan enables MIMO scanning.

On the CW RSSI scan page you can select the band and the channel.
Tap Band to select the band, and Bandwidth to select the bandwidth.
204
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Blind scan
On the scan configuration you can select Blind scan. You can add any number of blind scans
to the scan configuration, but please note that Blind scan needs to be kept separate from other
scan types. PCTEL IBflex does not support mixing of blind scan with other scan types.
Unlike the other scan types, blind scan is a one-shot scan. When all the configured blind scans
are performed, the scanner goes to Configured state and stops scanning. GSM blind scans
generate FREQSCAN events, UMTS/CDMA/EVDO blind scans generate PILOTSCAN events,
and LTE and NR blind scans generate OFDMSCAN events. Results for blind scans are
displayed on the Blind Scan Results page. Results for each supported system (GSM,
WCDMA, LTE, CDMA, EVDO, and NR) are displayed on a designated separate page.
Tap Band to select the band. Select the number of IDs (max 16), i.e. the number of cells to be
scanned. For WCDMA/CDMA/EVDO this is the number of pilots, for LTE/TD-LTE the number
of cell IDs. With GSM this value must be 1. Finally, select Subcarrier spacing.
NR Top-N signal scan

On the NR Top-N scan page you can select the band, define the number of SS burst, and
select subcarrier spacing.
When frequency scan is performed, Nemo Handy also writes cell scan events by using SIB
signaling to obtain data to perform cell scan. Enable SIB signaling to activate this functionality.
Please note that with scanner firmware version 2.0.2.0 and newer you can use channel
bandwidth auto-detection (LTE_BANDWIDTH_AUTO) for LTE signals 1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15, and 20
MHz.
Under Show channel as, select Channel to configure NRARFCN (NR absolute radio frequency
channel number) or Frequency to configure frequency to scan.
Scanning results
incomplete
Strong first).
will be displayed.
205
Nemo Handy
User Guide
206
Nemo Handy
User Guide
207
Nemo Handy
User Guide
10 Rohde & Schwarz TSMA6 Scanner
Installing TSMA6 Scanner Service using SD card

Nemo Handy devices are delivered pre-installed, but you may need to update the TSMA6
Scanner Service yourself. Please follow these instructions carefully to install the scanner
service application.
Installing Scanner Service

1. Uninstall the old scanner service version by going to Apps\Settings\More\Application
Manager and tapping Uninstall.
2. Connect the USB cable to the Nemo Handy device and to the computer in which the
scanner service installation files are located at.
4. Copy Tsma6Service_X.X.apk file onto your device under Nemo folder.
6. Go to Apps\My Files\All Files\Nemo and select Tsma6Service_X.X.apk file from the
list.
7. If you already have the .apk file installed into the device, the installer program will ask
to replace the old version. Select Install.
9. Installation is started and once it is finished, you can start using the scanner service.
Installing Scanner Service from KSM

Nemo Handy devices are delivered preinstalled, but you may need to update the TSMA6
Scanner Service yourself. Please follow these instructions carefully to install the scanner
service.
1. Uninstall the old version of the scanner service by going to
Apps\Settings\More\Application Manager and tapping Uninstall on your scanner
service.
4. Download the latest TSMA6 Scanner Service release and select the setup file
(Tsma6Service_X.X.apk) from Product Family | Nemo Handy.
6. If you already have the scanner service installed into the device, the installer program
7. Installation is started and once it is finished, you can start using the scanner service.
Bluetooth pairing
Note that when pairing a device using Android 10 or later operating system to a
TSMA6 scanner, you must switch on Location from the device settings.
208
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Note that previous scanner configuration is loaded automatically when Nemo Handy
starts.
In Nemo Handy, go to Settings | Scanner | Scanner devices. Select the correct scanner from
the opening dialog and tap OK. Also enable Scanner Enabled from the same settings.
The TSMA6 Scanner page in Nemo Handy shows you the configuration that is being currently
used.
Tap the CONNECT button to enable Nemo Handy to scan for a nearby scanner and connect
to it via Bluetooth.
You can also select a type of scan you want to configure. To save or load configurations, tap
Menu | Save/ Save as/ Load. If you do not have any earlier configurations to load, you must
make a new configuration and save it. To create new items, tap the CONFIGURE button. The
Select scan type dialog box opens. The different scan types are explained in the following
chapter. After you have selected or saved a new configuration tap the START button to begin
the measurement.
209
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Scan types
GSM Frequency scan
On the Frequency scan page you can select the band, scanner front-end, scanner
demodulation front-end, measurement rate (in Hz), channels and select whether Bsic
decoding, C/I, cell information decoding and SIB Signaling is enabled.
Tapping EDIT next to SELECTED CHANNELS opens the Channel range editor dialog box.
end channel and tapping ADD or by selecting channels by tapping the channel range button
210
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Pilot scan
On the Pilot Scan page you can select the band, scanner front-end, scanner demodulation
front-end, pilot Ec/Io threshold, pilot increment, number of signals, and whether Top-N, delay
spread and SIB signaling is enabled.
When pilot scan is performed, Nemo Handy also writes cell scan events by using SIB signaling
to obtain data to perform cell scan. Enable SIB signaling to activate this functionality.
211
Nemo Handy
User Guide
WCDMA Top-N Pilot Scan (TSMA6 scan type: WCDMA Top-N Pilot Scan)
On the WCDMA Top-N Pilot Scan page you can select the band, measurement rate,
measurement mode, scanner front-end, scanner demodulation front-end, pilot Ec/Io threshold,
number of signals, and whether Top-N, cell information decoding, time of arrival, delay spread,
missing neighbor detection, neighbor list decoding, P-SCH, SIR, S-SCH, and SIB signaling is
enabled.
When WCDMA Top-N Pilot scan is performed, Nemo Handy also writes RRCSM scan events
by using SIB signaling to obtain data to perform cell scan. Enable SIB signaling to activate this
functionality.
212
Nemo Handy
User Guide
LTE OFDM scan
On the LTE OFDM scan page, you can select the band, bandwidth, scanner demodulation
front-end, cyclic prefix, scanner front-end, signal mode, define the number of signals, and
enable/disable Top-N, cell information decoding, CINR, time offset, delay spread, sync signal,
reference signal, SIB signaling, narrow band scanning, and MIMO scanning. Note that MIMO
scanning is only available when using two or more scanners are connected to the TSMA6
scanner.
When LTE OFDM scan is performed, Nemo Handy also writes RRCSM events by using SIB
signaling to obtain data to perform cell scan. Enable SIB signaling to activate this functionality.
Please note that with scanner firmware version 2.0.2.0 and newer you can use channel
bandwidth auto-detection (LTE_BANDWIDTH_AUTO) for LTE signals 1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15, and 20
MHz.
213
Nemo Handy
User Guide
On the CW RSSI scan page you can select the band and the bandwidth.
NR Top-N signal scan

214
Nemo Handy
User Guide
On the NR Top-N scan page you can select the band, SSB periods, subcarrier spacing,
measurement rate, and enable/disable delay spread and SIB signalling.
When NR Top-N Signal scan is performed, Nemo Handy also writes RRCSM events by using
SIB signaling to obtain data to perform cell scan. Enable SIB signaling to activate this
functionality.
Under Show channel as, select Channel to configure NRARFCN (NR absolute radio frequency
channel number) or Frequency to configure frequency to scan
215
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Spectrum Analysis Scan (TSMA6 scan type: RF Power Scan)
On the Spectrum Analysis Scan page you can select predefined scanning sets, measurement
rate, scanner front-end, and resolution bandwidth. You can also define start frequency and
center frequency values and enable/disable preamplifier.
Note that spectrum analysis scanning results are only shown in the .nmf file.
216
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Blind scan
Note that the Blind Scan button appears on the TSMA6 Scanner page once Scanner State is
“SCANNER_READY”.
On the Blind Scan page you can select LTE/NR/WCDMA bands. After selecting the bands, tap
Start to start the blind scan.
Scanning results
incomplete
Strong first).
217
Nemo Handy
User Guide
will be displayed.
218
Nemo Handy
User Guide
219
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Measuring 24-30 GHz/24-44 GHz bands with TSMA6 Scanner
Connecting the DC30 down converter with TSMA6 scanner

To measure 24-30 GHz bands with the TSMA6 scanner and Nemo Handy, you need the DC 30 down
converter. DC30 is additional hardware that is connected with the TSMA6 scanner. The DC30 and the
scanner can be stacked. Follow the instructions below:
1. Connect a cable between the AUX ports of the down converter and the scanner. The
cable has blue plugs.
2. Connect an antenna cable between the IF1 antenna port of the down converter to the
RF In port of the scanner.
3. Connect the white, forked power cable to both the scanner and the down converter.
Both devices can be powered with the TSMA6 power source.
4. Connect the GPS antenna cable to the scanner.
5. Connect the Ethernet data cable to the scanner.
6. If you are measuring mmWave bands, connect the mmWave antenna cable to the RF
in 27-30 GHz or 24-27,5 Ghz antenna port of the DC 30 down converter.
7. If you are measuring sub 6GHz bands, connect the sub 6 GHz antenna cable to the
RF In ≤ 6 GHz antenna port of the DC30 down converter.
8. Turn on the TSMA6 scanner. Note that Bluetooth pairing has to be done first between
the TSMA6 scanner and the phone before connecting.
9. In Nemo Handy's TSMA6 Scanner Page tap the CONNECT button
Connecting the DC44 down converter with TSMA6 scanner

To measure 24-44 GHz bands with the TSMA6 scanner and Nemo Handy, you need the DC44 down
converter. DC44 is additional hardware that is connected with the TSMA6 scanner. The DC44 and the
220
Nemo Handy
User Guide
scanner can be stacked. Follow the instructions below:
1. Connect a cable between the AUX ports of the down converter and the scanner. The
cable has blue plugs.
2. Connect an antenna cable between the IF1 antenna port of the down converter to the
RF in port of the scanner.
3. Connect the white, forked power cable to both the scanner and the down converter.
Both devices can be powered with the TSMA6 power source.
4. Connect the GPS antenna cable to the scanner.
5. Connect the Ethernet data cable to the scanner.
6. Connect the antenna cable to the RF in 24-44 GHz antenna port of the DC44 down
converter. Note that you can measure both mmWave and sub 6 GHz bands
simultaneously.
7. Turn on the TSMA6 scanner. Note that Bluetooth pairing has to be done first between
the TSMA6 scanner and the phone before connecting.
8. In Nemo Handy's TSMA6 Scanner Page tap the CONNECT button
Handling TSMA6 errors

If Scanner State is "NO_SCANNER" or an error shows "Device=0", go to Settings > Scanner > Scanner
Devices. Make sure that the TSMA6 scanner is selected and that the TSMA6 scanner is in rVicom
Service mode. If the problem persists, perform the following steps:
1. Exit Nemo Handy.
2. Turn Bluetooth off.
3. Turn Bluetooth on.
4. Open Nemo Handy.
5. Go to TSMA6 Scanner Page.
6. Tap CONNECT.
If the problem persists, reboot the TSMA6 Scanner and repeat the steps above.
221
Nemo Handy
User Guide
11 Ending Measurements
To end the measurements:
1. Stop all calls and data connections.
2. Stop logging by tapping Stop on the Control Center. Nemo Handy will stop the
recording. You can keep, rename, or delete the resulting log file. If you wish to upload
the measurement file, indoor map file, a packet capture file, audio sample, or BTS file
on a server, select the respective options and tap Send. See Chapter “Uploading log
files on server” for more information on the connection settings.
3. If you wish to exit Nemo Handy, select Menu | Exit.
222
Nemo Handy
User Guide
12 Nemo Instant Report

The Nemo Instant Report feature greatly enhances the possibility to create a report instantly
after your measurements have been conducted.
The users on the field can quickly produce the report after the measurement and choose to
send it via email if needed. The report will also be uploaded to any remote server together with
the measurement files.
There are four report types available. Full Report includes everything and the other report
types are subsets. The following reports are included:
• Full Report
• Includes, for example, RF averages, indoor maps, screenshots (if taken), and
statistics
• LTE Report
• Statistical information related to GSM and UMTS removed
• LTE and UMTS Summary
• Detailed statistics removed
• Summary Report
• As above, but includes GSM as well
You can define the thresholds for certain parameters, for instance, the acceptable call success
rate or minimum data throughput. Values below the thresholds are also displayed in the report.
You can add your own company logo in the reports.
Creating Nemo Instant Report

Note that this feature requires a separate license option.
1. Go to Settings | Logging and select Create Report After Measurement.

2. To select a default template, tap Select template.
3. The Select Template dialog box opens. Select a template by tapping on the template
name. Add filters if needed.
4. You are also able to customize the thresholds for the parameters on the reports. For
example, it is possible to define the acceptable level for RSRP or average call setup
time. These values are used in the report as the threshold. If you want to create a
customized report, tap Customize Report on the Logging view.
Fill in the thresholds and tap Save. When the set threshold is triggered, the information
is shown in red on the report.
5. Once you end the measurement session, the report is created according to your
settings.
Generating a Nemo Instant Report

The report is generated after you have done your measurements. All the information that was
collected during the measurements will be shown on the reports.
1. When the measurement session is ended, the Log file complete dialog box opens.
Select Create Report.
2. Tap Keep or Rename to generate the report. The screen changes to landscape mode
for screenshots for the report.
3. The Create report dialog box opens. In this dialog box you are able to change the
template (Select Template), open the report in your Nemo Handy device (Show
Report), send the report as an email (E-mail Report), or close the dialog box
223
Nemo Handy
User Guide
4. Nemo Handy generates the report based on your settings. The template can be saved
and other reports generated. It is possible to generate different reports from the same
measurement file(s).
Custom logo for Nemo Instant Report

You can customize the logo displayed on the cover page of the report. The logo image file is
located in the Nemo / Handy / Config folder. The name of the file is YourLogo.png. The image
size needs to be 350x350 pixels, and the format is PNG. Transparency can be used to hide
background information of the logo. You can replace the YourLogo.png file with your own
image file. Nemo Handy will read the file when the report is generated. If the image
dimensions do not match the size of 350x350 pixels, the image might not fit into the
designated place in the report.
224
Nemo Handy
User Guide
13 Exporting Files
Measurement files can be exported by uploading them to a server or copying them over USB.
Uploading log files on server

You can upload measurement log files directly from Nemo Handy after stopping a
measurement or through the File Explorer. Select Menu | File Explorer. Select the log file(s)
and tap Menu ( ) | Upload.
On the Selected configuration page, use the previously defined settings (configuration) and tap
SEND or load another configuration by tapping SELECT CONFIRMATION.
Select one of the existing configurations and tap SELECT. If there are no existing
configurations, tap the CREATE NEW button on the toolbar. For more information on creating
new configurations, see Chapter “Defining measurement upload configurations”.
After the files have been uploaded, Nemo Handy will ask if you would like to send a notification
of the uploaded files. You can send an email or an SMS. To send an email, you need to have
an email account set up on your mobile. The notification contains a link to the server from
where the files can be downloaded. Tap DELETE SENT FILES to delete the uploaded files
from the Nemo Handy terminal.
Exporting files manually

Connect the data cable to the mobile and to a USB port on a PC. Windows will automatically
detect the USB device. Select Disk drive\Media device (MTP) as the mode on your Nemo
Handy mobile. The measurement files will be on the internal memory card in folder
sdcard\Nemo\Handy\Results in a zip mode. Copy and save the files on the PC where you
have installed Nemo File Manager.
225
Nemo Handy
User Guide
14 Tips and Hints

This section gives some tips and hints for using Nemo Handy.
Starting measurements
Before you start logging with Nemo Handy, please check that the mobile is in idle mode, that
is, there are no data connections or calls ongoing. If there is a call on when you start logging, it
will affect the measurement events logged and you will not have the signaling at the beginning
of the log file.
File locations
The various files associated with Nemo Handy have specific file locations. When adding files
to Nemo Handy, you should only use these specified folder locations for the files.
Measurement data files are saved to sdcard\Nemo\Handy\Results folder on the internal
memory card of your Nemo Handy terminal by using for example a Bluetooth connection or a
cable connection.
The following are the file locations where Nemo Handy related files should be saved.
Measurement data (.nmf)
• sdcard\Nemo\Handy\Results
Display configurations (.xml)
• Display configurations are installed to the "\sdcard\Nemo\Handy\Config" directory.
Using the GPS receiver

If you move too far away from the external Bluetooth GPS receiver or the receiver battery goes
flat, the GPS state in the Nemo Handy GPS view switches to Not connected. In such a case,
you do not need to restart Nemo Handy, just check that you have chosen the correct GPS port
in settings.
If you want to change to another Bluetooth GPS receiver, you need to delete the pairing
between the existing GPS receiver and Nemo Handy first.
226
Nemo Handy
User Guide
15 APPENDIX 1: Nemo Walker Air User Guide
Quick Guide
This quick guide will explain briefly how to set up the Nemo Walker Air measurement system
and how to start the actual measurements.
Do not upgrade, root, or reflash your Nemo Walker Air measurement terminal
firmware. Doing so will cause the terminal to permanently lose its measurement
capability!
Using Nemo Walker Air:
1. Before beginning the measurements, you must pair the devices through a Bluetooth
connection. This is done in the device settings: Settings | Network connections |
Bluetooth | My device. For more information, see Bluetooth pairing.
2. Open the Nemo Walker Air app on your device. Accept all permission before the
application launches. If you are unable to accept all permissions, please contact our
technical support. When using a Huawei HiSilicon chipset-based device, also accept
the Huawei User Terms Conditions.
3. In the controller tablet, open the Controller View: Agents 1-6 page. Tap the grey circle
at the bottom of an agent slot. Select an available, i.e. paired, device from the opening
dialog. Agent device details are now displayed in the selected slot. The circle changes
color and displays the agent number the device (1-6).
4. Tap the circle again to open Agent Options menu. Tap Load script and select an
available script form the opening dialog. If there are no available scripts, tap the Menu
( ) button, select Scripts and tap the new script ( ) button on the toolbar. For
more information, see “Creating scripts”. The selected script is shown on the Script
page in the agent device.
5. In the controller tablet, tap Start Measurement on the Control Center or tap the play
shortcut button ( ) on the Control Center to start the selected script in an agent
device. You can monitor the script progression in the Script page in the agent and the
Controller View page in the controller tablet. You can also save the measurement
config by selecting in the controller tablet Menu | Save Controller Config.
6. You can browse the different views by dragging your finger horizontally across the
screen. If a view has several pages, you can move between the pages by dragging
your finger vertically across the screen.
7. In an agent device, activate agent-specific locks by tapping the Menu button ( )
and selecting Forcing. Please note that unless you deactivate forcing features, they
will stay active even if you exit Nemo Walker Air.
8. While Nemo Walker Air is performing the measurement, you can use the mobile
normally for making calls, sending SMS messages, and so on. Tap the home button to
switch between different applications or to make a call.
9. Pause or stop the measurement by tapping ( ) on the Control Center of the
controller tablet and selecting Pause or Stop. After pausing you can continue the
measurement by tapping Resume Measurement. You can keep, rename, or delete the
resulting log file. You can also upload the measurement results, e.g. to Dropbox. See
“Defining measurement upload configurations” for more information.
10. Export the measurement file for post-processing.
227
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Introduction
Welcome to the User Guide for Nemo Walker Air. This user guide explains how to set up and
operate the Nemo Walker Air measurement tool software developed by Keysight Technologies
Finland Ltd.
Nemo Walker Air is a portable engineering tool for measuring and monitoring the air interface
of digital networks. Nemo Walker Air collects measurement results and stores them on log
files, which are uploaded to Nemo Cloud or FTP/HTTP server from the controller unit or
collected manually from agent units. Measurement results provide useful information for
network optimization, verification, and maintenance purposes. Results can be efficiently and
easily viewed with the Nemo analysis tool Nemo Analyze for Windows. Nemo Walker Air
supports all mainstream cellular technologies.
Operating temperature range

• For Nemo Walker Air backpack from -10 to +50°C 14 to 122°F
• For tablet and UEs, please check the operating temperature from the device vendors.
• For USB batteries: -10 to +45°C (14 to 113°F)
• For scanners, please check the operating temperature from the scanner
documentation
Important
The test devices (smartphones etc.) tested and sold by Keysight Nemo Wireless Network
Solutions are intended for testing purposes only. Software changes in devices may limit their
normal use. Keysight Nemo Wireless Network Solutions does its best to provide test devices
without any limitations, but it is not always possible. Keysight Nemo Wireless Network
Solutions assumes no liability if any commercial application or feature is blocked or limited due
to software or other device-related modifications.
If the test device is moved to another country or used in the network of another operator than
initially ordered, it is possible that the device does not support all network features. Keysight
Nemo Wireless Network Solutions assumes no liability in any cases.
The Nemo Walker Air user must be appropriately trained and should be familiar with the
signaling behind wireless technologies.
Nemo Walker Air System Overview

The Nemo Walker Air package includes one controller tablet and 1 to 7 agent units, all
including the Nemo Walker Air software. Agent units can be chosen from a selection of the
latest smartphone models. The optional Nemo Walker Air backpack includes high-quality USB
batteries and can be used as a standalone system without an external power source. The
runtime of the complete system is up to 10 hours, making it possible to use Nemo Walker Air
for a complete working day without having to re-charge it. The backpack also includes one
12/220/110V charging cable for the whole system. The Nemo Walker Air software is
preinstalled in the devices so you can start measurements as soon as you receive the product
package.
228
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Low data throughput with Android applications

New Android-based smartphones with the Android version 6.0 have battery optimization
enabled by default. This will stop some CPU and network activity operating in the background
for Android apps, thus saving battery. The battery optimization activates when the handset is
left idle for a period of time while unplugged and with the screen off. The battery saving mode
interrupts background activity for Android applications, and with for example data transfers this
manifests as limited data throughput values. The battery saving option is disabled by default in
handsets delivered by Keysight Technologies. However, in case low data throughput is
experienced, the following settings should be checked, and battery optimization should be
disabled for all applications. Please note that the settings menu varies depending on the
handset vendor and model. General step-by-step instructions are given below.
1. Select the phone's settings.
2. Select Battery from the device list and select Battery optimization from the menu icon
at the top-right of the screen.
3. Select all apps from the drop-down menu in the center of the display. Now you will see
all the apps that are Doze-enabled.
4. Select Don’t optimize for all apps and tap DONE.
Nemo Walker Air Setup
Installing Nemo Walker Air using SD card

Nemo Walker Air mobiles are delivered preinstalled but you may need to update Nemo Walker
Air yourself. Please follow these instructions carefully to install Nemo Walker Air.
Installing Nemo Walker Air:

1. Uninstall the old Nemo Walker Air version by going to Apps | Settings | More |
Application Manager and tapping Uninstall.
2. Connect the USB cable to the Nemo Walker Air device and to the computer where you
have the Nemo Walker Air installation files.
4. Copy Nemo Walker Air.apk file onto your device under Nemo folder.
6. Go to Apps | My Files | All Files | Nemo and select Walker Air.apk file from the list.
8. Installation is started and once it is finished, you can start using Nemo Walker Air.
agreement (“EULA”) before you can start using Nemo Walker Air. The EULA will be
displayed again.
Installing Nemo Walker Air from Keysight Software Manager (KSM)

Nemo Walker Air mobiles are delivered preinstalled but you may need to update Nemo Walker
Air yourself. Please follow these instructions carefully to install Nemo Walker Air.
Installing Nemo Walker Air from KSM:

1. Uninstall the old Nemo Walker Air version by going to Apps | Settings | More |
Application Manager and tapping Uninstall on your Nemo Walker Air mobile.
229
Nemo Handy
User Guide
2. Start a browser on your Nemo Walker Air mobile and log in to KSM. You must have a
valid Technical Support Agreement and valid access codes (email address and
password).
4. Download the version from the Product Family Nemo Walker Air in Keysight Software
Management site.
the transfer is completed.
6. Installation is started and once it is finished, you can start using Nemo Walker Air.
displayed again.
Nemo Walker Air OTA (Over-The-Air) update

Nemo Walker Air checks at every startup if there is a newer software version available. Notice
that your Technical Support agreement needs to be valid before a newer version will be
detected. If you do not wish Nemo Walker Air to check for available new versions at every
startup, deselect Check at Startup in the OTA updates settings (Settings | OTA updates).
To check if there are updates available you can go to Nemo Walker settings (both controller
and agent) and tap Check for Updates. If a newer version is available, you can choose to
download and install it. For Nemo Walker Air to automatically update the software version
when a new software update is released, select Update automatically.
Nemo Walker Air controller and agent will also check at every startup whether there is a newer
version available. Notice that your Technical Support agreement needs to be valid before a
newer version will be detected.
If you do not wish Nemo Walker Air to check if there is a newer version available at every
startup, disable Check at Startup in the OTA updates settings.
displayed again.
Installing Nemo Walker Air license

Nemo Walker Air devices are delivered preinstalled but you may need to update the Nemo
Walker Air license. Nemo Walker Air retrieves the license automatically over the air when
starting Nemo Walker Air for the first time without a license. If you do not have the possibility to
connect the Nemo Walker Air device to internet via mobile connection or WiFi, please contact
Nemo Helpdesk for the license.
Please follow these instructions carefully to select the Nemo Walker Air license.
example, when a new product version containing new features requiring a license is
230
Nemo Handy
User Guide
new license is uploaded to the server by Nemo Technical Support and Nemo Walker
Air automatically connects to the server and retrieves the available licenses.
1. In Nemo Walker Air, go to Menu | About | License and tap Browse licenses.
3. Tap Refresh to refresh the list of available licenses for Nemo Walker Air.
variant, options, and expiration date. There is no additional information available for a
regular license. If there is a problem regarding the license, an error dialog box appears.
If you want to release a license, select Release.
Note that if the license expires during Nemo Walker Air runtime, you will get a notification
dialog box warning you that the application will shut down in ten minutes after the notification
dialog box is closed. Tap OK or the back button of the device to close the dialog box, which
starts the timer for application shutdown.
Superuser request
After installing Nemo Walker Air to a device for the first time, Superuser access will be
requested. It is recommended to select Remember choice forever.
Note that when using Note 3 and Note 3 T-Mobile devices, the Superuser software
must not be removed or Nemo Walker Air will not function.
Temporary airplane mode on VoLTE devices

Most VoLTE devices require a radio switch-off-switch-on before Nemo Walker Air can decrypt
IMS messages from packet capture. Therefore, if the airplane mode is not already enabled,
Nemo Walker Air asks to temporarily enable airplane mode at Nemo Walker Air startup.
If you wish to save your selection, select the Always use this selection option.
Tap Yes to enable temporary airplane mode.
This function is disabled in automated mode.
Bluetooth pairing
after the first pairing the connection will be saved in the devices. Pairing is required for each
connection between the controller tablet and each agent unit.
Note that it is advisable to name devices so that it is easy to distinguish them from
each other.
Controller view
Start running Nemo Walker Air by selecting the program from Applications.
Controller View, Controller View: Agents 1-6, and Controller View: Agent 7 and Scanner pages
can be found by selecting them via the view bar on the top of the screen or by browsing
through the pages.
On the Controller View: Agents 1-6, tap one of the sections to add an agent unit. You can
select an agent unit from the list, or search for a specific device from the list by filtering.
231
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Please note that Agent 7 is not shown on the Controller View and Controller View: Agents 1-6
pages as the 7th agent is meant to be used with a scanner. While the scanner is connected to
an agent it is recommended not to run any CPU heavy scripts with the same terminal.
The agent units have individual slots on the controller dashboard, and all the statistics for each
agent unit can be viewed on the respective slot on the controller dashboard.
You can view information from all agent devices within one graph view with the Combined
graph view.
232
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Each agent unit has a designated color on combined graphs. You can define the color for each
agent device on the Controller View: tap the round agent number icon on the upper right side
of the agent view to define the graph color for the agent device. The combined views are
currently premade. You can add the combined views to split views.
233
Nemo Handy
User Guide
To save the chosen agent units and their configurations for later measurements, go to Menu
and select Save Controller Config. To load controller configurations that were saved earlier,
go to Menu | Load Controller Config.
To view measurement files, go to Menu and select Agent File Explorer. To enable sending
measurement files to server by FTP, select Menu | Upload.
To reboot all agents, go to Menu and select Reboot Agents and tap Yes. To power off all
agents to save battery life, go to Menu and select Power Off Agents and tap Yes.
You are also able to disable WiFi, reset agent statistics, connection information and barometric
value for all agents through the Menu.
Note that it is not possible to use the controller tablet for measuring: it only serves as
the controlling unit, displaying the measurements of agent units. Agent units can only
be operated through the controller device, displaying the scripts run by the controller.
Note that the controller and agents must use the same version of Nemo Walker Air.
Upgrading all devices manually at the same time is recommended. If the controller
and agent versions mismatch, Nemo Walker Air will notify the user of the mismatch
on the controller device when the agent unit is trying to connect.
On certain pages, such as Map, in the controller device there is a grey circle visible on the
lower right corner of the page. Tap the circle to select which device´s information is displayed
on the screen through the Select device dialog.
You can now start using Nemo Walker Air.
Agent options
To access the agent options, go to the Controller View page in the controller tablet. Tap the
circle in the device-specific slot to open a list of options for the selected agent.
Load Script enables you to load a script to an agent unit. Read more about loading scripts from
Chapter “Scripted application testing”.
234
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Unload Script enables you to unload a script from an agent unit.

Select BTS File enables you to select BTS file for the agent unit.
Set Device Label allows you to name the agent unit.
Set Group allows choosing a group for the agent unit from a list or creating a new group and
defining a name for it. Groups can be used to synchronize scripts between the devices in each
group.
Call Sequence Editor allows creating, removing, editing and selecting sequences.
To create a new sequence tap . The Call Sequence Editor is opened.
Terminating calls defines how many terminating call are made per sequence.
Call duration defines the duration (in seconds) of the call, unless used with Call End
Wait time (s) defines the wait period in seconds.
Voice quality mode (Off/Caller initiates voice quality/Caller responds voice quality)
defines the voice quality mode. The options are off and uplink+downlink.
When On: caller initiated (default) is selected, the Caller (Mobile Originating device)
first sends an audio sample to uplink and the Callee (Mobile Terminating device)
waits for sync tone, records sample and then sends its own sync and sample to
uplink. This is the default mode except with CDMA calls.
When On: callee initiated is selected, Caller (Mobile Originating device) begins
listening to the line and when it detects sync tone, it will capture the sample and send
its own sample to uplink. This is useful for example in CDMA networks where MO
device does not receive information on when MT device has answered the call and
call is truly connected. Select this option with CDMA calls.
Sample file (visible when Caller initiates voice quality/Caller responds voice quality is
selected) defines the voice sample file used in the voice quality testing. There are two
types of samples: wideband and narrowband. If the sample filename has wb as
postfix, the sample is wideband. Otherwise it is narrowband.
MOS threshold (visible when Caller initiates voice quality/Caller responds voice
quality is selected) can be used to limit the number of samples saved to the
Uplink volume (visible when Caller initiates voice quality/Caller responds voice quality
is selected) defines the uplink volume level. When selecting Default, the default
volume level is used. Selecting Define enables the user to set the volume level.
2.4/POLQA 3.0).
Nemo Server Settings allows defining Nemo Server config settings. Note that Nemo Server
config settings are hidden if call sequencer is activated.
Set Device Color allows choosing an individual color for each agent, the chosen color is
displayed on the agent selection button on the upper right corner of the agent device slot.
Set Device Icon allows selecting a photo to be used as an icon for each agent. The selected
icon is displayed next to the agent selection button.
Remove Icon and Color removes icon and color from the agent.
Agent Notification Volume allows adjusting the notification volume of each agent.
Reset Barometric Value allows you to reset the current barometric altitude value.
Reboot Agent allows you to reboot the selected agent device.
Power off Agent allows you to power off the selected agent to save battery life.
Disconnect Agent allows you to disconnect an agent from controller unit. You can reconnect a
agent by holding down on an empty slot and selecting an agent terminal you want to connect.
235
Nemo Handy
User Guide
If an agent is disconnected when logging is about to start, Nemo Walker Air asks for
confirmation for logging. Select Yes if you wish to start the measurement.
Connecting an external GPS

Nemo Walker Air uses an internal GPS receiver by default. If you want to use an external
GPS, you have to pair a Bluetooth GPS with the phone. Turn the Bluetooth GPS on. If you
have several devices, switch on only one GPS at a time to avoid an incorrectly paired system.
Bluetooth ID is not printed on the Bluetooth GPS case.
Choose Apps | Settings | Bluetooth and select the corresponding GPS. When you have a
connection to the GPS, the GPS view is visible. If you cannot see the GSP view, check that
you have chosen the correct GPS device.
During Measurements
You can browse the various views by swiping the touchpad with your finger or by tapping the
page header and selecting from the list of displays in the popup shortcut menu. If a page has
several views, you can move between the views by dragging your finger vertically across the
screen. Note that the scales in the line graphs will change according to the active parameter in
the graph.
The different views are described in detail in Chapter “Measurement Views”.
When logging, you can draw a route on the map by placing markers along the route. See
“Adding markers” for more information.
Note that the controller unit ensures that measurements of all agent units are
synchronized, even if the timestamps of the individual devices are not the same.
Scripted application testing

You can use script files to run measurements with Nemo Walker Air. When a script is used,
Nemo Walker Air makes voice calls and data transfers automatically. In the controller tablet,
tap and hold an agent on the Controller View page and select Load script to set the script for
the agent. The chosen script files are viewed on the controller tablet under each measuring
unit as well as on each agent under Script page.
Scripts can be created and edited with Nemo Walker Air controller’s integrated Script Editor
(see Chapter “Creating scripts”). Script files can be stored on the memory card
(sdcard/Nemo/Walker Air/Script).
Tap Start Measurement or the play shortcut button () on the Control Center.
You can browse the different views by dragging your in the Control Center to start a script that
you have loaded. Pause or stop the measurement by tapping Pause or Stop in the Control
Center. After pausing you can continue the measurement by tapping Resume Measurement.
In agent devices you can follow the script on the Script page. The script history view displays
the progress of the script from beginning to end.
Creating scripts
You can create scripts with Nemo Walker Air’s integrated Script Editor. To avoid WLAN
connections during measurements, disable WLAN connections before making measurements.
Select Menu | Scripts. If there are no scripts created yet, tap the New script button ( ).
An empty script is created and opened in the Script Editor main view. Add script commands by
tapping ADD at the bottom right corner of the touchpad. When you select a command from the
Add menu, a page with settings specific to the selected command is opened. Those pages are
described in the following chapters.
236
Nemo Handy
User Guide
You can edit the command by double-tapping the active command. You can move, edit, delete
and add commands with the buttons at the bottom of the page. Nemo Walker Air will ask
confirmation for deleting the command, tap Yes to delete the command. Tap and hold on one
of the commands to enter a multi-selection mode, where you can copy and paste a block of
commands with the corresponding buttons. The commands will be pasted at the end of the
script, and you can relocate them with up and down buttons. Unselect all commands or tap the
Back button to disable selecting commands.
Please note that if you edit a script that is selected in an agent, that script will update to the
agent automatically.
To enter a name for a script you want to save, tap the Menu button ( ) and select Save As
from the menu. Enter filename in the opening dialog and tap OK.
Save a script by tapping the Save button ( ) on the toolbar, enter filename and tap OK.
Tap the Menu button ( ) at the top right corner of the touchpad and select Script options
to define repeats, duration and max duration.
Define how many times the script is repeated. In addition, you can set a maximum duration for
the script. To define a minimum duration for the script, select the Duration option and enter
the duration in minutes.
Select the Max duration option and define how many minutes the script will be run. The script
will be stopped either after the script has been repeated the defined number of times or the
maximum duration is reached. Select Save.
Parallel scripting of data transactions
Nemo Walker Air supports parallel scripting of data transactions. This can be used to simulate
real-world user scenarios with multiple active data transactions of different type, such as,
simultaneous uplink and downlink data transfers. Another application is the maximum
throughput testing. To rule out possible effects of the test server, data can be downloaded
simultaneously from multiple servers. To perform parallel data transfers in the script, add
multiple transactions, such as FTP transfers, into the script. Interleave the start and end lines
of the transactions so that the start lines of the transactions appear consecutively in the script
transaction list and after that the end lines, respectively.
System lock allows locking a script to a specific system. To select system lock, tap System |
N/A.
Note that the controller offers a long list of possible systems. However, they should
be chosen according to the systems the agent units support.
Before saving a script, it is advised that the script is verified, that is, Nemo Walker Air will
check that the script is valid and the script commands are in the correct order. Tap the Verify
button ( ) on the toolbar. If the script is valid, a Verified message is displayed. If there are
errors in the script, Nemo Walker Air will tell you where the problem is. Tap the Save ( )
button to save a script, enter filename and tap OK.
Tap and hold an agent on the Controller View page and select Load script to set the script for
the agent. The chosen script files are shown on the controller tablet under each measuring unit
as well as on each agent under Script page.
The script will finish automatically. To pause a script, tap Pause on the Control Center. To
stops a script, tap Stop on the Control Center. To start a script later, select the script and tap
Load from the dialog box that opens. The script will now appear under Current Script. Tap the
script and select Start from the opening dialog.The Timing Script button is now displayed on
the Control Center. Tap the button to define the starting time.
You can keep, rename, send, or delete the resulting log file. While logging, it is possible to
take a photo with the controller terminal to be used as a photo marker with log files. Take a
picture by tapping the camera icon.
237
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Scripted application testing with Nemo Walker Air

Nemo Walker Air supports the same application testing capabilities as Nemo Handy. See
“Scripted application testing” for more information.
Voice quality testing with Nemo Walker Air

Nemo Walker Air supports the same voice quality testing capabilities as Nemo Handy. See
“Voice quality testing” for more information.
Forcing features with Nemo Walker Air

Nemo Walker Air supports the same forcing features as Nemo Handy. See “Forcing features”
IP capture
IP capture can be found on Nemo Walker Air agent units.
Application-level data can be captured with Nemo Walker Air. The data is collected in a
separate log file in .pcap format. Pcap files can be processed with Nemo Outdoor, Nemo
Analyze, or Wireshark. By default, full IP capture, including IP and all above layers are
captured. Pcap log files can be very large if no filtering is applied. Therefore, it is practical in
most cases to apply filtering to capture only the protocol layers of interest. Capture filter rules
are read from a text file. Rules must be defined in the standard Wireshark filter format.
For logging view, go to Settings | Logging.
IP capture enables/disables IP packet capturing.
When packet capture is enabled, Nemo Walker Air can utilize the packet capture interface for
getting certain specific KPIs without actually storing the PCAP log.
When packet capture is in capture mode, a pcap log will be written together with the
measurement file.
IP capture interfaces enables selecting which interface to use for IP capture. Note that if
IP capture max packet size defines how many bytes to capture from each packet.
IP capture filter rules allows you to define IP capture filter rules. The rules must be placed in
the root directory (/Nemo/WalkerAir/) as a text file with .txt ending.
IP capture is started whenever you start logging with Nemo Walker Air and stopped when
logging is stopped. You can upload IP capture files to a server by selecting Upload packet
capture files in the Log file name dialog box that appears when you stop logging.
Indoor measurements
Note that this functionality is available only if your Nemo Walker Air license supports
it.
You can view indoor maps in Nemo Walker Air and plot the measurement route on the map
with markers or use GPS if available.
238
Nemo Handy
User Guide

If this is the first time you are performing indoor measurements with Nemo Walker Air, you will
need to import an indoor map (i.e. a floorplan) to Nemo Walker Air as an image file. The
supported formats are .jpeg, .gif, and .png.
Transfer the image file (for example Floorplan.jpg) to the phone/Nemo/Walker Air/Maps folder
on the internal memory card of your Nemo Walker Air terminal by using for example a
Bluetooth or a cable connection.
You can also take a photo of, for example, an emergency exit plan with the Nemo Walker Air
mobile phone camera and use it as an indoor map.
In Nemo Walker Air, tap the Menu button ( ) and select Settings | Indoor | Floorplans.
Tap ADD to choose .tab file, import a map or take a picture to be used as floorplan.
Once you have selected a file or a map, a dialog box prompting whether you want to copy floor
position from another floorplan is displayed.
If this is the first time you are performing indoor measurements, Nemo Walker Air will generate
a MapInfo file (.tab) based on the image file. Next time you make measurements and use the
same map, Nemo Walker Air will use the .tab file automatically. A MapInfo map always
consists of two files: a MapInfo .tab file and an image file.
floors of a building. Select a file and tap UP and DOWN to rearrange to order of the floors on
in the following manner: “Floor 1”, “Floor 2”, etc.
If there already exist added floors with different names that do not match with the map file
name and Use map name as floor name is selected, a dialog prompting whether the user
wants to change the floor names to match the map file names appears. By clicking Yes, all
added floor names will be renamed.
15.7.1.1.1 Floorplan settings
On the Floorplan settings page you can define the dimensions of the floorplan and select a
route plan. The page is opened by selecting a floorplan on the Floorplans page and tapping
Edit.
239
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Layer Name defines the floorplan name. The name can be edited.
Select the Display Route Plan option to display a route plan on the indoor map.
Route Plan defines the route plan file (.rpf) displayed on the indoor map.
File Type (Metric/Geodetic) defines whether the floorplan dimensions are defined in meters
(width/height) or in geodetic coordinates.
Width defines the floorplan width in meters. Nemo Walker Air enters a default value (number of
Height defines the floorplan height in meters. Nemo Walker Air enters a default value (number
of pixels in the image divided by ten) for the field, but you should enter the correct value.
The following settings are only visible when the file type is set as geodetic:
Longitude defines the geodetic coordinates of the left and right sides of the map.
Latitude defines the geodetic coordinates of the top and bottom sides of the map.
georeferenced indoor map position on the world map by tapping Georegister. See
“Georeferenced indoor map” for more information.
Next, define indoor settings, see Chapter “Indoor settings” for more information.
After this, you are ready to begin measurements.
1.15.7.2 Importing iBwave maps
iBwave is a third-party indoor planning tool. iBwave has a proprietary indoor map format
(.ibwc) with floorplans for every floor of a building, indoor coverage overlay, and antenna
array/cabling visualization.
240
Nemo Handy
User Guide
If this is the first time you are performing indoor measurements with iBwave maps, you will
need to import iBwave map files (.ibwc) to Nemo Walker Air. Please refer to iBwave
documentation on how to create iBwave maps that can be imported to Nemo Walker Air.
Transfer the files to the phone/Nemo/Walker Air/Maps folder on the internal memory card of
your Nemo Walker Air terminal by using for example a Bluetooth connection, or a cable
connection.
In Nemo Walker Air, select Settings | Indoor and tap Import iBwave maps to choose or
import a map (.ibwc file). If the map file contains several buildings, choose one of them.
The floorplans (.tab) are listed on the Floorplans page. Select a floorplan and tap UP and
DOWN to rearrange to order of the floors on the map. Select a floor/tab file and tap Edit.
On the floorplan settings page you can select a route plan to be displayed on the map.
Next, define indoor settings, see “Indoor settings” for more information. After this, you are
ready to begin the measurements.
Performing indoor measurements

You can view indoor maps (floorplans) in Nemo Walker Air and plot a measurement route on
the map with markers.
Page and tap the Back key of the device.
Next, in controller tablet, load the floorplan on top of the map in Settings | Indoor | Floorplan.
Tap and hold the button on the upper left corner of the map view displaying the name of the
floorplan and select the floor from the opening menu. Tapping EXIT BUILDING removes the
floorplan from the map but leaves the floorplan area marked in red. To reopen the floorplan,
tap and hold the red area.
Tapping the name of the floorplan locates the floorplan on the map. If the floorplan is not
visible, zoom in on the map. The zoom level may have to be over 17 for the floorplan to be
displayed. You can rotate the map/floorplan by placing two fingers on the screen and turning
the fingers in a circular movement on the screen. Center the map on your current location by
tapping .
Tap the circle in the agent slot of the Controller View and tap Load script in the opening
menu. Select an available script form the opening dialog. If there are no available scripts, go to
Menu Scripts and tap the new script ( ) button on the toolbar. For more information, see
“Creating scripts”.
Tap Start Measurement to start a script that you have loaded. Pause or stop the
measurement by tapping Pause or Stop on the Control Center. After pausing you can
continue the measurement by tapping Resume Measurement.
2.15.7.1 Adding markers
241
Nemo Handy
User Guide
You can add markers to the log file to mark points of interest during the measurement. A good
practice in indoor measurement is to add a marker when starting walking and when stopping
walking, and, when starting walking again, adding a new marker in the same location.
In the controller tablet, tap and hold on top of a location to add a marker. Alternatively, position
the green cross on top of the location and tap . You can also add different types of
markers by selecting Add Marker | Add Marker/Add Textual Marker/Add Predefined
Marker/Add Photo Marker in the Control Center. When adding a photo marker, tap the
shutter icon on the camera preview screen to capture an image. An image preview is
displayed. Tap OK at the top of the view to confirm capturing the image or tap RETRY to
dismiss the image and capture a new one. A dialog prompting you to enter photo name is
displayed. Enter photo name and tap OK. The image is added to the selected location.
You are also able to see the marker sequence number at any time by tapping on the marker.
If the Draw route setting is selected in the Map settings, the markers will be connected to form
a route. Note also that Nemo Walker Air must be logging for you to be able to place markers
on the route.
You can view the measured route with color-coded parameter values in real-time on indoor
maps. You can also observe the values of user-configurable network parameters from the
route coloring on the map and define which color refers to which parameter value.
Note that if the Parameter item is not visible in the indoor map menu, go to Settings
| Map and enable Indicate Parameter on Route Color, tap Route Color to define the
route color, and select a route parameter.
Select a parameter and the route will be colored accordingly.
2.15.7.2 Route Plan Editor
Route Plan Editor view is available only with the additional Advanced Indoor Analysis
license option.
You can create a predetermined route before indoor measurements in the Route Plan Editor.
Once you have selected the floorplan you need, on the map view, tap More Actions ( )|
OPEN ROUTE PLAN EDITOR.
The Route Plan Editor opens.
242
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Insert markers to indicate the route to be measured. The latest added marker is identified with
the black-and-white flag to indicate the direction of the route.
Once you have created the route, save the route by tapping on the save icon. Name the route
file and tap OK.
You can create a new route by tapping the icon. Once you have created and saved all the
routes you wish to create, select Menu ( ) | Close Route Plan Editor.
To edit existing route plans, open the route plan editor, tap Menu ( ) | Import file and
select the file you wish to edit. The route is opened on the route plan editor and you can edit
the route.
Note that you need to select Draw route in the Indoor map settings to be able to view the
route. Once the route plan editor is closed, the route you created is displayed on the floorplan
in grey.
Start logging by tapping Start Measurement in the Control Center. The first marker of the
route is displayed in red. Once you have moved to the location of the second marker, tap the
add marker button ( ). The second marker is now displayed in red. By each marker, tap
the add marker to move to the next marker on the map.
Once the measurement is stopped, name and save the file as usual. You can view the results
on the route.
Tap Menu | Close Route Plan Editor to close the Route Plan Editor.
Georeferenced indoor map

georeferenced indoor map position on the world map. When using georeferenced indoor
maps, indoor map and OpenStreet Map are displayed one upon another on the Map page.
In Nemo Walker Air, tap the Menu button ( ). Next, select Settings | Indoor and tap
Floorplans.
Select an indoor map from the list or add a new one by tapping ADD. Once an indoor map has
been selected, tap EDIT on the toolbar.
The tab file settings view opens. Select Geodetic as File type, if not defined yet. Scroll down
and tap Georegister.
243
Nemo Handy
User Guide
New map view activity opens with selected indoor map.
to the new location. Adjust the indoor map size using the arrow icons on each side of the map.
Alternatively, set the longitude and latitude in the tab file settings.
Tap the Map lock ( ) button to lock the OpenStreetMap map in its position. This enables
scaling, rotating, and moving the indoor map on top without accidentally moving the
OpenStreetMap.
While the map is locked, Go to GPS location, Go to building location and Go to address
location buttons are disabled.
Go to GPS location ( ) jumps to current building location, if there is no GPS fix shown.
Go to building location icon ( ) jumps to current building location.
Go to address location ( ) opens a dialog box in which you can define address location
(address, postal code, city, county, state, and country).
When tapping SAVE, a dialog box prompting whether you want to overwrite the last position
appears. Select NO/YES.
3.15.7.1 Displaying floorplan on a satellite map
To display the floorplan on a satellite map, select Menu ( ) | Settings | Map and select
Satellite as the Google Map type. Next, go to Settings | Indoor, tap Floorplans, select a
floorplan from the list and tap EDIT. Set file type as geodetic and tap Georegister.
Tap SAVE and select Yes to accept the new position to be written in the tab file. If there are
one or more floors added, a dialog box is shown prompting the user whether they want to copy
current floor position to all existing floor. To discard new position, tap the Back button of the
device and select Yes in the possible following dialog box. The dialog box opens when
information of the floorplan’s location or size has been changed without saving the changes. If
there have been no changes or the changes made have already been saved, tapping the Back
button of the device leads straight to Tab file settings.
244
Nemo Handy
User Guide
You can modify existing geocoded floorplans if needed by tapping EDIT again.
iBwave Planner
Nemo Walker Air enables exchanging project information directly between iBwave Planner
and Nemo Walker Air. iBwave Planner and Nemo Walker Air both run on the same device,
using the IBWC file as a common medium. This enables the user to create a floor plan in
iBwave Planner, switch to Nemo Walker Air for the measurements and then switch back to
iBwave Planner to create preliminary design.
Please note that iBwave Planner should be installed on a terminal that has Nemo
Walker Air installed on it.
1. Start iBwave Planner (Nemo Walker Air can run on the background) to make your
indoor design planning.
2. In iBwave Planner, tap on the survey button on bottom right corner to launch Nemo
Walker Air. In Nemo Walker Air, select the correct building from your project file (you
can have several buildings in your iBwave project file).
3. The Floorplan view opens. This view enables you to change the order of the floors or
remove entire floors if the building has several.
The Map page displays the floor that is highest on the list. If you wish to select another
floor to be displayed on the Map page, tap and hold a button displaying the name of the
floor, for example Floor 1, on the upper left corner of the Map page.
4. Tap OK to confirm your selection. The page that was previously viewed is automatically
opened in Nemo Walker Air. In Nemo Walker Air, start logging by tapping Start
Measurement in the Control Center.
5. Go to the Map page and place markers along the measurement route. See “Adding
markers” for more information. All current information is collected to the survey
whenever a marker is added to the map.
6. Stop logging by tapping Stop in the Control Center. A dialog box prompting what to do
with the log file is displayed.
245
Nemo Handy
User Guide
7. Select Export iBwave survey and tap Export to export the measurements to iBwave
Planner. iBwave Planner opens. After exporting measurements from Nemo Walker Air,
you can perform a new test in another location.
8. In the iBwave Planner, you can choose what information you want to import to your
project. Tap Import on the top right corner of the page to import selected
measurements to iBwave Planner.
9. You can view your results by going to the correct building and floor in the planner tool.
The results can be viewed as measurements on the map.
The Draw zones (on/off) setting can be enabled in Indoor settings. The zones are used
in iBwave project files as one layer that will be drawn on top of the indoor floorplan. The
zone layer information is stored in the iBwave project file. Zones are used for example
for drawing areas for DAS antenna groups to graphically show where a certain cell is
transmitting.
246
Nemo Handy
User Guide
After the measurements have been performed, stop the measurement by tapping
Stop on the Control Center.
It is possible to use the iBwave floorplan information as part of the measurement file
name. The file names indicate the used map GUID, and to indicate a floor, entrance,
or exit you can choose FLR (floor), ENT (entrance), or EXT (exit) prefix from the
pulldown menu by tapping Rename. Tap the iBwave prefix field to open the
pulldown menu. Notice that before this feature is shown, you need to have an iBwave
project file loaded and route markers set in your measurement.
Distributed antenna systems (DAS)

Testing and verifying DAS antennas is possible with the DAS Anomalies feature which enables
you to view indoor small cell antennas and transmitters on the indoor map in real time by using
either iBwave indoor plans or our BTS file. While marking your route during walking
247
Nemo Handy
User Guide
measurements you are able to verify whether different antennas are transmitting or not. A
visual notification (red/green) is displayed in the indoor map indicating whether the current
DAS antenna is transmitting.
Note that this functionality requires an additional licensing option (Advanced Indoor
Analysis).
First, make the map page visible by going to Menu | Settings | Page Settings | Map. Select
Show page and tap the back key. Load a floorplan on top of the map in Settings | Indoor |
Floorplan.
Activate the DAS Anomalies feature by going to Settings | Indoor and selecting DAS
Anomalies.
Tap DAS Anomalies Settings to open the DAS Anomalies Settings view.
With CELL/ANTENNA TESTABLE WHEN MATCHING you are able to select which method is
used for activating a cell or and antenna for testing. Antenna is available for testing when the
chosen parameters are valid. For example, if you select System and channel, you have to
have that information either in your base station (BTS) or iBwave file.
To define the radius of the test area, tap on the Radius field and insert a value.
To define the hue of the circle marking the test area, move the blue dot along the blue line
under Color alpha.
To set the signal limits for acceptable test values, tap on the respective fields and insert a
value.
The test results are shown on the indoor map as green and red circles according to your
settings.
248
Nemo Handy
User Guide
BTS information on a map

With Nemo Walker Air you can view BTS icons on a map. Open a map and go to Settings |
BTS. Select Show BTS and define the color for active system BTS icons, other BTS icons,
and active cell.
Select a BTS file and select Use BTS file. If you wish to see detailed information about the
individual cells, tap the Cell info item and select the information to be displayed.
A map with the BTS site icons is displayed. During measurement, the BTS that the
measurement device is connected to is highlighted with the color that you selected for Active
cell in the Outdoor settings page.
The terminal needs to have a GPS fix and the zoom factor needs to be at least 10
before the BTS icons are displayed.
To view information on individual cells, tap a BTS icon, and from the Select sector dialog box,
select a sector.
Cell information for the selected sector will be displayed on the map.
Select Menu | Show BTS data to view a list of all BTS sites in the current BTS file.
249
Nemo Handy
User Guide
6.15.7.1 Automatic indoor positioning using augmented reality sensors (ARcore)
This functionality is available only with the indoor positioning option.
To use this functionality, you must have a Google account configured and ARCore
Element package installed from the Google Play Store on your device.
Nemo Walker Air needs to be on foreground when this feature is being used. This
means, that e.g. YouTube and browser testing cannot be used during in-building
measurements.
Automatic indoor positioning enables locating a Nemo Walker Air device in spaces where GPS
cannot be used, i.e., indoors. Automatic indoor positioning significantly reduces the measuring
time when compared to placing markers manually as only two reference markers need to be
placed manually on map at the beginning of the measurement.
1. Begin by creating a georeferenced indoor map, see “Georeferenced indoor map” for
instructions. Make sure you map the real-world coordinates correctly. Note that you can also
do this without an indoor map if the venue you are measuring is clearly visible on Google or
OSM maps. Even outdoor measurements by foot can be performed in a limited area.
2. Place the indoor map floorplan to the map as precisely as possible.
3. Start logging or scripting.
4. In Nemo Walker Air, go to the Map page. Tap More Actions ( ) and tap Start Indoor
Positioning.
5. The map view is opened. Move to a place that you can easily find in the real world, such as
a corner or close to a door. Display the environment to the device camera by moving the
device around in a calm manner while keeping the device at a 45-degree angle.
6. Very carefully, place two reference markers in locations at least a few meters, preferably
around 10 meters (around 32 feet) from each other and move your actual position accordingly.
Note that while the positioning is extremely accurate, if the two markers are not placed
accurately on the map, the exact location cannot be shown.
After the initial calibration, you can continue walking and the markers will be automatically
placed on the map as you walk.
250
Nemo Handy
User Guide
If the device informs you that the route has been lost, move backward to find the route. Th
route can be lost for example if the environment is too dark, if you go too close to a wall or to a
location where the camera cannot distinguish details of the surface. It can also be caused by a
user error, e.g., a finger placed in front of the camera.
Automated location mapping

Automated location mapping automatically displays the actual test route and location when
performing indoor measurement.
1. Install the Neon Command setup and start the application. Sign in with the username and
password.
2. In Neon Command, upload and geocode your floorplan. For more information, see Neon
Command documentation.
3. Download NeonLocationServiceStandalone .apk file and install it on your handset. Accept
possible updates, power the external TRX Neon tracking module and pair the devices from
the handset´s Bluetooth settings.
4. Start Nemo Walker Air, go to Settings | GPS and make sure that Internal GPS is selected
as GPS Source.
5. For a first time login to NeonLocationServiceStandalone, select Settings | Indoor | Neon
floorplan. Log in with your Neon Command username and password. Tap Neon settings
and select the TRX tracking device in Neon floorplan settings.
6. In Neon Floorplans view, click Add. A dialog box prompting whether to download Neon
Floorplan by Address or Current location opens. Select your method of download. This will
download the floorplan (i.e. a .tab file and a .pdf file created by Neoncommander.exe) to
Nemo Walker Air.
7. Name the file in the dialog box that opens.
8. Make sure the tracking module is attached to a belt, or the top of your pants. The tracking
module does not work as well when you place it in a pocket because it can move around
and affect the step detection. Neon tracks you best when the tracking module is mounted
to the front of your body where you would wear a pager, or in the center of the back.
9. To start logging, tap Start Measurement in the Control Center. After starting
measurements indoors, manually pinpoint your initial location on the map by tapping the
pin icon. After this, define the heading by walking 10 meters and pinpoint your location
again by tapping the pin icon.
251
Nemo Handy
User Guide
10. Once the starting point is set, start walking through the route. Stop logging by tapping
Stop in the Control Center. Once the logging is stopped, you can choose whether to keep,
rename, or delete the resulting log file. The saved log files along with captured
screenshots and indoor marker files are saved to File Explorer (see Chapter “File explorer”
for more information).
Outdoor measurements
KML files displayed on a map

KML is an XML formatted language used by Google Earth, Google Maps, and other programs
to allow geo-spatial data to be rendered. WIth KML, you can highlight routes, areas, such as
network cells, clusters, etc. with shading coloring.
To create a .kml file from your data, visit
https://developers.google.com/kml/documentation/kml_tut for more information. You may also
download a .kml file directly to your Nemo Walker Air device.
Next, go to the Map view. Tap the More Actions button in the Map view and select ADD
KLM(S).
The Add a KML layer page opens. Nemo Walker Air will automatically find every .kml file in the
device and display them in a dialog box. Select a file from the list and the selected file will be
drawn on top a map and zoomed to the correct location based on the coordinates defined in the
.kml file.
252
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Tap the Locate button ( ) to open the Locate layer dialog. To locate a KML layer, select a
layer by tapping on the layer name.
You can also remove a layer from the map by tapping the trashcan button in the Locate layer
dialog. The locate layer button is useful when you have drawn many .kml layers.
Navigation application
it.
Navigation application is a software-based solution in which a third-party navigation application

is used. The application provides the possibility to get turn-by-turn instructions for your drive
test campaigns. Also, repetitive drive test can be made and at the same time make sure that
the correct roads are being measured
Nemo Cloud can be used to create and plan your measurement campaigns and routes. Nemo
Cloud is not mandatory though as you can use any other software that can produce a GPX file.
If the route plan for the drive test is made with Nemo Cloud, route plan(s), together with other
measurement related information like scripts, are passed over the air from Nemo Cloud to the
measurement units on the field. Once the route has been loaded, you can upload it to the
navigation application.
Go to Settings | OTA Updates and select Check for Navigation App Updates. Download
and install the application.
253
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Import the GPX route through a Nemo Cloud work order or by going to Settings | Map |
Import GPX Route to select a GPX file.
Scroll down to Navigation Settings and enable Navigation Floating Controls to display the
navigation floating window through which navigation is controlled.
When the GPX file has been imported, a floating navigation icon ( ) is displayed on the
screen. You can drag the icon across the screen using your finger.
Tapping the navigation icon opens the navigation application. Simultaneously, the navigation
icon switches to Nemo Walker Air icon and a menu is displayed.
254
Nemo Handy
User Guide
From the menu you can start and stop navigation, jump to route, return to Nemo Walker Air,
and disable floating controls. Tap Start Navigation to open the navigation view:
To start navigating from a specific point of the imported GPX route, tap Jump to Route from
the menu and a track bar is displayed at the bottom of the Map view. Move the indicator to
adjust from which point of the route you want to begin.
255
Nemo Handy
User Guide
The remaining route is now shown in color while the removed route is shown in grey.
Tapping the check button confirms the selection and opens automatically the navigation
application. Tap X to cancel the selection and stay on the Map View of Nemo Walker Air.
Stop navigation by tapping the Nemo Walker Air icon and selecting Stop Navigation.
To return to Nemo Walker Air´s Map view, tap the Nemo Walker Air Icon and select Return to
Nemo Walker Air. After returning to Nemo Walker Air, the Nemo Walker Air icon switches
back to navigation icon.
256
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Defining route parameters

You can create custom color sets for various network parameters. These parameters can be
viewed on a map.
Go to Settings | Map and select Map Parameters.
You will see a list of available technologies. Tap on a technology and a second-level list of
parameters opens. Select a parameter by tapping the checkbox next to it. Next, tap the color
set icon ( ).
First, select the technology for which the parameter should be displayed by tapping ADD NEW
in the Color Set Editor. Note that all parameters are not available for all technologies.
If there is no readymade color set, tap the range to edit the values.
The Value range editor displays the minimum and maximum values of the selected parameter.
These values cannot be edited. Add a parameter value by tapping the + button. The value can
be anything between the min and max value. Just tap the value field and type in a new value.
Tap OK and the value is added in the Value range editor.
Define a color for the value by tapping the color field below the value. Pick a color from the
circle and tap OK.
257
Nemo Handy
User Guide
After you have defined all values and colors, tap the Back button.
The Color set editor will display the new values and colors. Tap OK and Save.
File Explorer
Log files, captured screenshots, and indoor map markers are saved to File Explorer that can
be found by selecting the Menu ( ) | File Explorer.
258
Nemo Handy
User Guide
File Explorer displays a list of various Nemo Walker Air-related files. The contents can be
filtered by selecting/deselecting the configs, maps, results, scripts, and backup items at the top
of the screen.
You can also search and filter the list. The list can be organized by selecting Menu ( )|
Sort By | By Name/Size/Date. An icon in front of the logfile details shows whether the logfile
was saved on internal or external SD card.
• Cloud lists files copied to Nemo Cloud
• Configs lists Nemo Walker Air configuration files (.xml)
• Maps lists map image files (.bmp, .jpg), MapInfo tab files (.tab), and route plans (.rpf)
• Results lists log files (.nmf), screenshots (.png, .jpg), and marker files (.mrk). Tap Logs
only to display only the .nmf files. Tap Scrshot only to display screenshots only.
• Scripts lists Nemo Walker Air script files (.nsf)
To delete files from the File Explorer, select files by selecting a file and tapping Menu |
Remove. To remove all files at once, select Menu | Select all and then Menu | Remove.
To rename measurement files, select a file from the list and select Menu | Rename.
To copy measurement files, select files by tapping on the checkbox next to the file and select
Menu | Copy.
259
Nemo Handy
User Guide
You can also upload measurement files through the File Explorer on an FTP server. Select a
file and select Menu | Upload. For more information on uploading measurements on an FTP
server, see Chapter “Uploading log files on server”.
Nemo Cloud work orders

Note that this functionality is available only if your Nemo Walker Air license includes
the Nemo Cloud Premium option.
Note that this functionality is available only in controller.
In a work order project, the measurement project configuration is done fully in Nemo Cloud. In
a work order project, you configure all the needed scripts, inbuilding files, maps, and so on, to
the work orders. The engineer on the field can concentrate on performing the actual
measurements without the need to configure anything on the field.
The difference between automatic projects and work order projects is that instead of fixed
measurement sessions, in a work order project the end-user of the measurement device can
select which work order to perform at a chosen time, which gives more flexibility within the
measurement project. Nemo Cloud Work Orders can also be started and stopped from Nemo
Cloud. This feature is particularly useful when using, for instance, UAVs (drones) to perform
measurements.
You can monitor the status of the measurement units and the actual work order project in
Nemo Cloud. You can also view and select work orders set in Nemo Cloud in the Automated
testing status view. You need to log in to Nemo Cloud with the Nemo Walker Air controller
terminal (see Chapter “7.13 Nemo Cloud settings”) and the Nemo Walker Air unit must be
assigned to an active and published work order project (see Nemo Cloud User Guide for more
information on how to create a work order project).
To connect your Nemo Walker Air controller device to Nemo Cloud, tap Settings | Nemo
Cloud, and enter the service address, username, and password to their respective text fields.
Tap Login.
To enable real-time reporting in your Nemo Walker Air device, go to Settings | Real-time
reporting and activate Reporting. This needs to be done to enable the real-time status
reporting during measurements to Nemo Cloud from the Nemo Walker Air unit.
Turn the automated testing mode on in the Nemo Walker Air controller device in Settings |
General | Automated testing.
Note that you need to perform the maintenance session manually in Nemo Walker
Air before you can view measurement sessions or work orders from Nemo Cloud.
To perform maintenance, go to the Status view in the Nemo Walker Air controller device and
tap the maintenance icon( ).
To view work orders from Nemo Cloud, go to the Automated testing status view. This view
displays the work orders assigned to this Nemo Walker Air unit (including all work orders
assigned to each agent device). In the example below, there are three work orders assigned to
the Nemo Walker Air unit.
260
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Tapping Details displays information regarding the work order (configured in Nemo Cloud). In
the Details view, tapping Map takes you to the map view in Nemo Walker Air.
You can move between all the work order detail views with the up and down arrows on the top
right corner. Return to the view displaying the work orders by tapping twice (tapping this
button once displays the automated testing status).
Tap Activate to activate a work order. You can manually deactivate the work order by tapping
Complete after tapping Activate to select another work order. Note that tapping Complete
changes the work order state to Measurement done, and only after the measurement files are
sent to Nemo Cloud the work order state becomes Completed. Nemo Walker Air displays the
work orders activated once or more times in yellow.
The process flow with work orders starts with activating the work order. After activating the
work order, perform the measurements needed. After the measurement is done, the state of
the work order changes to Measurement done (displayed in yellow), and the measurement
files are uploaded to Nemo Cloud during a maintenance session. When the file upload is
successfully finished, the status of the work order changes to Completed (displayed in grey).
Work order statuses can be seen in Nemo Cloud as well. A completed work order can be
activated again if needed.
File Explorer
Log files are saved to file explorer that can be found by tapping .
261
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Each log file views measurement data by all agents that were used in the measurement.
You can also select individual agent-specific measurements which are collected or sent from
the Nemo File Manager. All agents are selected by default. Tap a agent to unselect it. Agent
selections are common to all files. View agent-specific measurement by selecting Menu |
Agent File Explorer.
Copying files
To copy measurement files, open the File explorer by tapping (contains all measurement
files) or by selecting Menu | Agent File Explorer (contains agent-specific measurement files).
Select a file from the list by tapping the checkbox next to it and select Menu | Copy.
If your Nemo Walker Air device is logged to Nemo Cloud, you can to select whether the files
are copied locally or into Nemo Cloud.
Local enables you to copy files locally in your Nemo Walker Air device. With local copies, you
can select the destination for the copied selected file(s) from a list of options.
If you select to copy the selected files to Nemo Cloud, tap Cloud and you can select the
destination folder in Nemo Cloud.
You can view files copied to Nemo Cloud through the Cloud button in the File explorer view.
Nemo Walker Air measurement views

Nemo Walker Air displays the same measurement views as Nemo Handy. See “Nemo Handy
measurement views” for more information.
Settings
The chapters below describe the Settings pages.
Page Settings
Select Settings | Page Settings to define page settings and create custom views. See
“Custom view” for more information.
General Settings
In Nemo Walker Air, select Settings | General to define general settings.
Answer Incoming Calls option (only in agents) activates/deactivates the auto answer mode.
When Nemo Walker Air is in auto answer mode, it answers all incoming voice calls. Note that
this applies only when doing manual testing. When using scripts, please add the script
command for answering incoming calls.
Call Answer Delay (ms) (only in agents) option allows you to define the delay in milliseconds
before answering an incoming call.
262
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Answer Allowed Numbers option activates/deactivates the answer known numbers mode.
When in this mode, Nemo Walker Air only answers incoming calls from phone numbers that
appear in the phone application´s outgoing call list. Incoming calls from numbers that do not
appear in the phone application´s outgoing call list are not answered and Nemo Walker Air
hangs up the call. In this case, call events are not written into the measurement file. When
Answer Allowed Numbers option is selected, Nemo Walker Air only answers incoming calls
from phone numbers that have been added to Allowed Phone Numbers list. Incoming calls
from numbers that do not appear in the list are not answered and Nemo Walker Air hangs up
the call. In this case, call events are not written into the measurement file. When selected, the
list of allowed numbers created in the controller unit will automatically be transferred to all
agent units.
Allowed Phone Numbers enables adding new phone numbers to the Allowed Phone Numbers
list. Enter the phone number without country code and select Save. Note that you can add
several new numbers from the same dialog.
Activate WiFi Scanning (only in agents) activates/deactivates WiFi scanning.
In addition to the manual exporting of settings, it is also done automatically when closing
Nemo Walker Air. When starting the newly installed Nemo Walker Air for the first time
previously exported settings are checked and loaded.
Forcing Reset (only in agents) option allows you to define whether the forcing lock settings
return to default when Nemo Walker Air application is closed. Forcing reset is on by default.
Airplane Mode at Startup (only in agents) option enables you to define whether Nemo Walker
Air turns the Airplane mode on for a few second at application startup. The options are Ask
always (default), Enabled, and Disabled. Tap on the text field to open the option selection.
If Send Crash Reports, (only in agents) is selected, the agent will send crash reports.
Send Analytics Reports, when selected, allows Nemo Walker Air to send user statistics to
improve Nemo Walker Air user experience.
Device Label allows you to name the agent unit. When using automated testing mode, the
device label is defined in Nemo Commander.
Phone Number (only in agents) defines the phone number of the Nemo Walker Air terminal.
This information can be used in post-processing to make statistics between MO and MT calls.
Custom Operator Names allows defining the operator names displayed in the Summary views.
Tap Add new in the dialog that opens. Define MCC (mobile country code), MNC (mobile
network code), and enter operator name. Tap Save.
Allowlist (Off/Select File) option is a file, which can be used in conditional scripting as input. It
could for instance have cells where voice calls can be made. Call attempts outside these cells
would not be made. This feature requires an optional E911 licensing option.
Import/Export Settings option enables importing and exporting settings. With this feature, users
can share settings with other users and device models from their Nemo Walker Air terminal.
Keep Backup, when selected, keeps a backup of measurement files in the measurement unit´s
they can be recovered from the measurement unit. Note that the measurement files moved to
the agent unit´s backup folder are not visible in the controller unit´s File Explorer or in the
Agent File Explorer but the user must retrieve them using, e.g. a file management application
of the device.
Screenshot Resolution enables you to define the resolution of screenshots (original, medium,
or small) you take from the Nemo Walker Air user interface.
Screenshot Format defines in which format (.pgn or .jpg) the captured screenshot will be
saved.
Screenshot Timestamp, if selected, leaves a timestamp on the captured screenshot.
Screenshot All Views, if selected, captures a screenshot of all views. Ask, when selected,
prompts Nemo Walker Air to ask whether to take screenshot of all views whenever the user is
YouTube Testing in Nemo Browser (only with agents) option enables opening YouTube in
external browser when performing YouTube and PEVQ-S testing. This is the default option
when performing YouTube or PEVQ-S testing with Nemo Walker Air. If this option does not
263
Nemo Handy
User Guide
work properly, you can also disable this option to perform YouTube testing in Nemo Walker
Air´s integrated browser. Note that PEVQ-S testing is not available in this case.
HTML Testing in Nemo Browser (only with agents), when selected, enables opening a web
page in external browser when performing HTML testing. This is the default option when
performing HTML testing with Nemo Walker Air. If this option does not work properly, you can
also disable this option to perform HTML testing in Nemo Walker Air´s integrated WebView
browser.
Enable MMS Testing (only with agents) option enables MMS testing. When MMS testing is
enabled, the Android default MMS application is Nemo Walker Air. Note that if Nemo Walker
Air is the default MMS application, all received MMS messages are routed to Nemo Walker Air
and not visible in the UI. To use the standard MMS feature in the terminal, the user needs to
turn off the MMS testing feature from General settings.
MMS APN enables you to change the MMS APN (Access Point Name).
Automated Testing (only in controllers) option activates/deactivates the automated testing
feature. See Chapter “Nemo Cloud work orders” for more information.
Ignore Shannon cell ID when in Cell-DCH RRC state (only available with Shannon chipset
based agent devices), if selected, logs Cell ID always as “n/a” when in Cell-DCH RCC state.
When not selected, Cell ID is logged as a new value if available or previous valid value when
Cell-DCH RCC state. Note that this option is only valid when in UMTS.
Logins
Login to each application needs to be done from the agent terminals.
Note that Logins are mainly available in agents. Only Dropbox login is visible in the
controller unit as well.
In Nemo Walker Air, select Settings | Logins to define the login settings.
Login Twitter, if selected, allows you to log into Twitter. Logging in is mandatory when
performing Twitter testing.
Login LinkedIn, if selected, allows you to log into LinkedIn. Logging in is mandatory when
performing LinkedIn testing.
Login Dropbox, if selected, allows you to log into Dropbox. Logging in is mandatory when
performing Dropbox testing.
Charging settings
it.
264
Nemo Handy
User Guide
If a device has been powered off and Automatic Power On is enabled, the device is
automatically powered on when charging.
Automatic Power On Limit defines in percentage the battery level of the device at which the
device is powered on automatically if the Automatic Power On setting is enabled.
Automatic Power Off, when enabled, powers off the device when the battery level is below
the limit set in Automatic Power On Limit setting.
Automatic Power Off Limit defines the device battery level in percentage at which the device
is automatically powered off.
Automatic Power Off Timeout (s) defines the time is seconds for how long the Nemo Walker
Air device waits before the device is powered off when the charger is removed or the battery
level is below the limit set in the Automatic Power Off Limit setting.
When Use Charging Limits is enabled, the device only charges between a defined range of
the battery level, e.g. 30%-70%. When a limit is reached, the charging is stopped and begins
again only when the battery level reaches the minimum value.
Power Off If Charger Disconnected, when enabled, causes Nemo Walker Air device to
automatically power off when the charger is removed. Automatic Power Off setting must be
enabled for this setting to be visible.

In Nemo Walker Air, select Settings | Display & Sound to define the display settings.
Display config file defines which views are displayed. Selecting Default uses the default
configuration, while Select configuration file enables you to open a customized configuration
file.
Units defines the measurement units used when defining the Nemo Walker Air maps
(Metric/Imperial).
Throughput prefix defines in which unit throughput units are shown (Kilo/Mega/Giga)
Show serving info displays/hides the serving channel information on every page.
Serving info parameters allows you to select parameters to be displayed in the serving info bar
that can be displayed at the top of the screen.
Notification volume sets the volume level for voice notifications.
265
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Notifications (only in controllers) enables you to select which notification icons and/or
notification audio files are in use.
Tap NR gBN ID / CID Format to open a dialog that enables you to define how NR gNB ID and
CID parameters are formatted to the NR Summary page.
Notifications (only in controllers)

Note that only GPS notifications can be viewed and configured in the controller device.
can activate/deactivate, and edit existing notifications. See Chapter “Controller notifications”
There are four types of notifications: audio, icon, popup, and wearable. Audio notifications will
play an audio file when triggered. Notifications with icons will appear as icons on the
measurement route on a map and in line graphs. You can drill down for more information by
tapping a notification icon. A popup message can be selected for both types of notifications.
The popup appears briefly at the bottom of the screen. If you have a smartwatch or other
wearable with an Android operating system, you can select wearable to display notifications
with icons on your wearable device. With the buttons at the top you can select/clear all icons,
audio files, popups, and wearable. By tapping each parameter, you can select individual
notifications.
6.15.10.1 Controller notifications

It is possible to edit existing notifications.
created.
audio file.
Default action defines how you will be notified. The options are audio, icon, or popup. You can
also select all three.
To create a new notification, tap the Add new button at the top right corner of the Notifications
page.
created.
audio file.
as well.
Default action defines how you will be notified. The options are audio, icon, popup, and
266
Nemo Handy
User Guide
6.15.10.2 Agent notifications

Agent notification can be viewed and configured in the controller device. To view notifications,
go to Notification history in Page settings.
Select Settings | Display & Sound | Agent notifications to access the Agent notifications
page. Here you can activate/deactivate, edit existing, and create new notifications. For more
information, see “Notifications”.
Nemo Walker Air displays the following agent notifications:

defined
GPS Fix Lost yes
GPS Connected yes
Service lost yes
LAC Changed yes
Changed, System Changed, CDMA
System Changed
Voice Call Attempt
Voice Call Failed
Voice Call Dropped
UL Power Up High yes Percentage of uplink power up commands

over 60
DL Power Up High yes Percentage of downlink power up commands
over 60
Best RSCP Low yes Active set received signal code power under
-95
267
Nemo Handy
User Guide


Viber Connection Attempt
Viber Connection Success
Viber Connection Failed
WhatsApp Connection
Disconnected
Viber Connection Disconnected
BiP Connection Disconnected
Viber Connection Dropped
Viber Transfer Attempt
Viber Transfer Success
FTP Transfer Failed
Viber Transfer Failed
BiP Transfer Failed
15.10.6.2.1 Editing agent notification
It is possible to edit existing agent notifications.
To edit a agent notification, tap the arrow icon next to a notification.
created.
268
Nemo Handy
User Guide

audio file.
Default action defines how you will be notified. The options are audio, icon, or popup. You can
also select all three.
6.15.10.3 Displaying controller and agent notifications on a map in Custom page
To view agent notifications on a map, go to Settings | Display & Sound and select icon in the
Display & Sound settings next to a parameter. See below an example of a custom page
displaying controller notifications and agent notifications of four Nemo Walker Air agents:
Logging settings
In Nemo Walker Air, select Settings | Logging to define the logging settings.
Diagnostic Data Logging (only available with Qualcomm chipset-based agent devices) enables
selecting whether Qualcomm RAW logging is enabled. Note that you must restart Nemo
Walker Air after RAW logging is enabled and log codes are imported. Tap the settings icon on
the toolbar and tap Import Log Codes. Select a .dmc file from the .dmc files previously
uploaded to \Nemo\Config\ directory. To clear all log codes, tap the settings icon on the toolbar
and tap Clear All Log Codes.
Log file prefix (only in controller) allows you to define your own prefix for log file name.
Note that all settings concerning IP captures are managed in agents.
IP Capture Interfaces (only in agents) enables selecting which interface to use for IP capture.
Note that if WLAN is selected and the device´s WLAN is then turned off, the selected
interface´s mode changes to default mode “any”.
IP Capture Max Packet Size (only in agents) defines how many bytes to capture from each
packet.
IP Capture Filter option (only in agents) defines whether captured packets are filtered.
269
Nemo Handy
User Guide
IP Capture Filter Rules (only in agents) allows you to define IP capture filter rules.
Measurement Upload (only in controller) allows you to save connection settings into
configurations that can be used when uploading files on a server. See Chapter “Defining
measurement upload configurations” for more information.
Questionnaire (only in controller) allows defining when a questionnaire is displayed. You can
choose to show it when a measurement is started, paused, resumed, or stopped. A summary
of answers is shown when all questions have been answered.
When a questionnaire has been created, it can be used by engineers in the field. The idea is to
collect information from measurement environment to a measurement file. Using questionnaire
reduces errors by the user (for example, typing city or location wrong). Questionnaire results
are stored to QNOTE file format event as specified in Nemo File Format.
Step-by-step Use Case Description:
• Connect the UE to a PC and open the XML to a text editor.
• Add / modify XML to match your needs.
• Distribute the used XML which is located in \Nemo\Config\ folder to all users (users
need to put their XML to each measurement system).
• After the XML has been moved to \Nemo\Config\ folder, go to Nemo Walker Air
settings. Enable Questionnaire and define when it will be shown.
• When Nemo Walker Air is configured and a measurement started, the questionnaire is
displayed for the first time (depending on the settings).
• If a measurement is paused, actual file writing will not stop until the user has answered
the Questionnaire (depending on the setting).
• Same thing happens when stopping the measurement (depending on the setting).
When Initial marker is activated, a dialog box will be displayed when logging begins. In the
dialog box you can define a measurement description.
Predefined marker allows you to define the marker before starting logging.
Create Report after enables you to create a Nemo Instant Report.
Select template enables you to select a default template used for the instant report.
Customize report enables you to customize a template for the instant report.

Select one of the existing configurations or create a new one by tapping Create New. First
select the protocol used for the transfer.
On the Create configuration page, define the settings needed for the file upload. Once you
(for example /Walker Air) and tap Create and Verify. If the path is correct, a Path verification
URL defines the target path for the uploaded files when HTTP or HTTPS protocol is used.
Type in the address, tap Verify URL, and the target path will be checked. If the path is correct,
a Verification successful message is displayed.
custom prefix.
New.
270
Nemo Handy
User Guide
8.15.10.1 FTP connection settings

Server defines the FTP server address. Note that when using an IPv6 address as the server
address, the IPv6 address must be in brackets.
Host defines the FTP host address.
editor when defining FTP logon settings and when defining settings for manual FTP transfers.
8.15.10.2 HTTP(S) connection settings
HTTPS protocols.
Select the Authenticate server option (for HTTPS) to authenticate the HTTPS server.
8.15.10.3 Dropbox connection settings
field (for example /walker air) and tap Create and Verify. If the path is correct, a Path
verification successful message is displayed.
custom prefix.
Real-time reporting
Real-time reporting is only available in the controller device: the controller collects
the data from the agent units.
Real-time reporting can be used together with Nemo Cloud (or any supporting third-party tool)
to send status reports with defined interval. Reports include information like signal strength,
coordinates and statistics. This information can be utilized in real-time when monitoring
measurement units with Nemo Cloud.
To define real-time reporting settings, go to Settings | Real-time reporting.
Reporting enables/disables real-time reporting.
Report interval defines the reporting interval in seconds.
Network settings opens the Selected configuration dialog box. For more information, see
Chapter “Uploading log files on server”.
271
Nemo Handy
User Guide
GPS settings
clock can be synchronized. If logging is started and there is no GPS fix, Nemo Walker Air will
go into "Waiting state" during which Nemo Walker Air cannot be used.
GPS source defines the GPS source. To use the Controller GPS data for all units available
with Nemo Walker Air agent, go to Settings | GPS and select GPS Source | Controller GPS.
When GPS required (only in automated testing mode) option is activated, GPS is required.
When Use fixed location (only in automated testing mode) option is activated, Nemo Walker
Air does not log GPS data with measurements but will instead write the same coordinates into
all measurement files and reports.
Map settings
Show notifications on map (Yes/No) (only in agents) defines whether notifications appear on
the map.
Indicate parameter displays map parameters on the map.
Idle route, (on/off) when activated, allows Nemo Walker Air to continue drawing the route and
Import GPX route enables importing a GPX file to the controller unit´s map view. Note that you
need to ensure that you have copied the GPX file to the Nemo Walker Air controller device
before you can import the file.
Show GPX route displays the GPX route on top of the map.
Select Nemo Navigation Assistant enables you to select a TomTom bridge device to be used
alongside Nemo Walker Air.
Google Map type (with Google Map selected) enables you to select between the normal view
and the satellite view (only for controller.
HTTP map loading (with OpenStreetMap selected) defines when Nemo Walker Air is allowed
to load a map (Always/When not logging/Never).
Google Map settings

Note that this option is available only for controller.
Using Google Map may require updating the Google Play services. In this case, when Google
Map is selected as the map type Nemo Walker Air asks you to update the Google Play
services. Tap Update.
the Nemo Walker Air application.
272
Nemo Handy
User Guide
With Google Map you can select between the normal view and the satellite view. To define the
Google Map type, go to Settings | Map | Google Map type and select Normal or Satellite.
Indoor settings
Note that Indoor settings are available only in controller.
Floorplans displays a list of .tab files that have been loaded in Nemo Walker Air. See Chapter
“Importing maps and defining map settings”.
Import iBwave maps allows you to import iBwave map files (see Chapter “Importing iBwave
maps” for more information).
DAS Anomalies, (on/off) when activated, allows you to test and verify in-building DAS
(Distributed Antenna Systems) antennas and view the antennas on the indoor map.
DAS Anomalies Settings allows you to define the DAS test area radius, intensity of the colors
indicating the results, and the signal limits for acceptable test results.
iBwave map files.
BTS settings
Note that BTS settings are available only in controller.

into the device’s BTS folder (phone/ Nemo/ Walker Air/ BTS), from where they are listed in the
Show BTS file cells on maps defines whether BTS icons are displayed on the map. Also,
select a BTS file on the BTS settings page.
Use cell range, if selected, shows actual cell ranges on the map.
Range transparency defines the transparency of the cell range showed on the map.
Draw serving lines (ON/OFF), when activated, draws line(s) from the current location to the
active cell(s).
Active cell size defines the size of the active serving cell when a BTS file is used.
Active cell color defines the color for the serving cell when a BTS file is used.
Active system cells cell size defines the size for the serving system base stations when a BTS
file is used.
Active system color defines the color for serving system base stations when a BTS file is used.
For example, if the device is connected to a WCDMA network, all WCDMA base stations are
colored with the selected color.
Show other system cells, when selected, shows cells from non-serving system base stations
when a BTS file is used.
Other system color defines the color for the non-serving system base stations when a BTS file
is used. For example, if the device is connected to a WCDMA network, all other base stations
are colored with the selected color.
To adjust the cell colors, tap on the color icon.
then switch on the Use BTS file option. Select the information you would like to view on a
map.
273
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Serving info parameters

When you tap Serving info parameters on the Display & Sound page, the Serving info
parameters dialog box appears. Here you will find a list of parameters to choose from.
Please note that only parameters supported by the current system will be displayed
in the serving info bar. For example, if you select parameters from the GSM group
and the device is connected to a WCDMA network, the parameters will not be
displayed.
Tap on a technology from the list. A second-level list opens. Select a parameter from the
second-level list. If you wish to edit the properties of the parameter, tap the button.
You can edit the appearance of the parameter in the serving info bar and define for which
technologies the parameter is displayed. Finally tap Save.
Label refers to the parameter name displayed in the serving info bar.
Format defines the format in which the value is displayed. The options are decimal,
hexadecimal, and octadecimal.
Show unit defines whether the parameter value unit is displayed in the serving info bar.
System defines for which network technologies the parameter is displayed.
Note that the width of the serving info bar is limited, so all selected parameters may
not fit in the bar. Turning the terminal horizontally will make the serving info bar wider
and more parameters will fit in.
Serving info bar

You can select parameters to be displayed in the serving info bar that is displayed at the top of
the screen (select Settings | Display & Sound | Show serving info).
To edit the parameter info bar, tap and hold on the parameter info bar to open the settings
popup.
The settings icon ( ) opens the Serving info parameter window, where you can select more
parameters to be displayed on the serving info bar.
The paintbrush icon ( ) opens a popup window in which you can define the color of the text
displayed on serving info bar.
The minus icon – allows you to decrease the font size of the text displayed on the serving info
bar.
The plus icon + allows you to increase the font size of the text displayed in the serving info bar.
Nemo Server config settings

Note that Nemo Server config settings are hidden if call sequencer is activated.
274
Nemo Handy
User Guide
In agents, you can access Nemo Server settings by selecting Settings | Nemo Server
settings. In controllers, you can access the settings in agent-specific menus.
Tap Nemo Server settings to define the Nemo Server URL, username, password, remote
number i.e. the channel on which commands and options are set, line number i.e the server
number to which calls are made, and prefix of the Nemo Server.
Use configuration allows enabling/disabling Nemo server configuration.
When Time sync is enabled, latency and UTC time information is sent to Nemo Server with
every command.
When Mandatory is enabled, configuring the server successfully is mandatory for the
execution of the script, that is, if the server request fails Nemo Walker Walker Air proceeds to
next command, if there is any, without making the call. When disabled, the call is made even if
the server request fails.
When Initial connection is selected, the script is not started until the HTTP commands go
through from the Nemo Walker Air device to the server at least once.
Save sample defines whether samples falling below MOS threshold are saved or not.
MOS threshold can be used to limit the number of samples saved to the server. For example,
only samples with a MOS score below 3 are saved.
Enable POLQA defines whether MOS values are calculated using POLQA.
End-to-end call synchronization with Nemo Server
When the Mandatory option in Nemo Server config settings is enabled, the end-to-end call
control configuration allows the originate calls to be made from Nemo Server to a field unit
even if the answer call command fails due to a lack of data connectivity between the field unit
and Nemo Server. This ensures that the number of MOC and MTC calls between the handsets
within the same script group are always same.
The user must group a set of agent units to the same script group with Nemo Walker Air. If a
agent unit from this group calls Nemo Server and has ordered answer call, Nemo Server will
execute a call (MT) to all agent units in the same group, even if some of the MO calls from the
field units never reach Nemo Server.
Required script settings in Nemo Walker Air:
• Grouped call scripts have to be synchronized always. Select Wait until agents are
synchronized by clicking Add and selecting Wait from the popup menu in the Script
Editor prior to the Voice call script and Answer call commands.
• Phone number (subscriber telephone number) must be defined in both Voice call and
Answer call commands.
Required Nemo Server configuration:
• Requires Nemo Server version 4.51 or higher.
• Channel callback settings must be set to off.
• Configure all server channels with correct RemoteNumbers and LineNumbers before
making any E2E command.
• Restart the VQD service after channel configuration is done, and every time the
configuration is changed.
• If measurements are stopped and restarted, wait one minute between the changes so
that the possibly running server side timers are finished before the new test begins.
• If the grouping is changed so that, for example, one agent unit is removed from the
script group, change the group name. Otherwise the grouping stays the same on the
server side also for channels that were a part of the last group. Alternatively, configure
the removed agent unit with an empty group and let it command the server once to
clear the group from that channel.
• Make a short measurement on a location where all agents have data connection.
Note that the grouping on the Nemo Server side stays valid until an automatic
service restart takes place at 3:00 am. A new configuration command executed by
the field unit is required daily. This is needed also when VQD service is stopped or
started or when the Nemo Server is shut down or rebooted.
275
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Call sequencer settings

Note that Call Sequencer is automatically disabled when automated testing
mode is enabled in Settings | General but Nemo Walker Air unit is not assigned
to a manual project via Nemo Cloud.
Enable Activate Call Sequencer to activate the call sequencer.
Address defines the server address.
Password defines the server password.
Tap the Menu button ( ) and select Call Sequence Editor to create, remove, edit and
select sequences.
Enter a phone number and select an existing sequence file from a list under Current Sequence
File. To change the call sequence file, select another sequence file from the list, tap and hold
the file name and tap Load from the opening dialog. You are also able to edit, delete, and
rename the file in the same dialog. To edit or unload a file under Call Sequence Settings, tap
and hold the file name.
To create a new sequence, tap on the upper right corner of the screen. Enter a name for
the new call sequence file in the opening dialog and click OK. The Call Sequence Editor is
opened, allowing creating, removing, editing and selecting sequences.
Startup delay (s) defines how many seconds Nemo Walker Air waits before starting a
call. The default time is 30 seconds.
Terminating calls defines how many terminating calls are made per sequence.
Call duration defines the duration of the call in seconds, unless used with Call End
Minimum wait between calls defines the minimum wait period between calls in
seconds.
Select Show advanced settings to display advanced settings. Default values of
advanced settings has been verified in field and lab conditions for reliable
functionality. Changing these values may cause system instability i.e. call sync
issues.
Call setup timeout (default 20s, min. 5s) defines the maximum duration of
the call setup in seconds.
Call teardown timeout (default 20s, min 5s) defines the minimum wait
between calls. Note that the call teardown duration is included in the
minimum wait between calls setting so if you change the teardown duration,
it affects the minimum wait between calls setting as well.
Server request timeout (default 30s) defines the maximum duration of the
server request in seconds.
Callee start advance (default 5s, max 10s, min 0s) defines how many
seconds before the agreed time the call receiver begins to wait for the call.
Voice quality mode defines the voice quality mode:
an audio sample to uplink and the Callee (Mobile Terminating device) waits for a sync tone,
records a sample and then sends its own sync and sample to uplink. This is the default mode
sample and send its own sample to uplink. This is useful for example in
CDMA networks where MO device does not receive information on when
MT device has answered the call and call is truly connected. Select this
option with CDMA calls. After selecting a sample file, you can save the
sample to Nemo Server if needed by selecting the Save sample checkbox.
276
Nemo Handy
User Guide
VQMon: sample play, when selected, the Caller sends an audio sample without a
sync tone.
Sample file (visible when On: caller initiated (default)/On: callee initiated/VQMon:
sample play is selected) defines the voice sample file used in the voice quality
testing. There are two types of samples: wideband and narrowband. If the sample
filename has wb as postfix, the sample is wideband. Otherwise the sample is
narrowband.
MOS threshold (visible when On: caller initiated (default)/On: callee initiated/VQMon:
sample play is selected) can be used to limit the number of samples saved to the
After selecting a sample file, you can save the sample to Nemo Server if necessary
by selecting the Save sample option.
sample.
Uplink volume (visible when On: caller initiated (default)/On: callee initiated/VQMon:
sample play is selected) defines the uplink volume level. When selecting Default, the
default volume level is used. Selecting Define enables the user to set the volume
level.
2.4/POLQA 3.0).
Nemo Cloud settings

it.
Note that this functionality is available only in controller.
Nemo Cloud with Nemo Walker Air can be purchased as Basic (with file synchronization) or
Premium (with file synchronization and automation).
Storage defines which files Nemo Walker Air uses when files are uploaded, that is, from which
file the file content is displayed when uploading files, and the location where new created files
are saved. The options of the storage preference are Ask always, when Nemo Walker Air
asks the storage location every time files are uploaded or saved; Local, when files are
uploaded and saved locally; and Nemo Cloud, when files are uploaded and saved in Nemo
Cloud. The preference can be changed later in Nemo Cloud settings in Nemo Walker Air. The
Storage button is disabled when no active project is received from the server.
Walker Air is connected to WiFi. If the WiFi connection drops, the file synchronization stops
and resumes when Nemo Walker Air reconnects to WiFi.
When tapping the Login Cloud button, the Nemo Cloud login view is displayed.
Login/Logout is displayed according to the current status, that is, when you are logged in to
Nemo Cloud, the Logout option is displayed here. The summary displayed below Login/Logout
is the latest message sent from Nemo Cloud. Please note that possible error messages sent
from Nemo Cloud are displayed in this summary.
277
Nemo Handy
User Guide
OTA updates
Nemo Walker Air will automatically search for updates by using OTA (Over-the-air) if Check
for updates is tapped.
Nemo Walker Air will also check for updates when the application is started. To disable
checking for updates at startup, disable Check at Startup.
In Nemo Walker Air agents under OTA updates you can also check for Nemo
Browser/Navigation App updates and install a new Nemo Browser/Navigation App version if
there is one available through tapping Check for Nemo Browser updates/Check for Navigation
App Updates.
Nemo Walker Air settings

When Upload one by one is switched on, measurements will be uploaded from agents one by
one.
When Battery notifications is switched on, a battery low notification (an audio and a popup
message) is displayed on the controller unit screen when the battery level reaches the limit
defined in the Battery low notification limit setting.
When Log file time split (controller only) is switched on, Nemo Walker Air splits measurement
files when the measurement duration reaches the maximum time defined in the Log file length
setting. When the limit is reached, the controller unit forces the script to stop scripting in all
units, then stops the measurements and starts them again. Note that renaming log files is not
supported when log file time splitting is enabled.
When Delete log file from agent is switched on, log files are deleted from the Nemo Walker Air
agents after the files have been sent to the controller unit.
When Synchronize before stop is switched on, Nemo Walker Air waits for all ongoing calls to
finish and all agents to reach the next synchronization point before stopping logging.
When Agent autostart (agents only) is switched on, the agents will start automatically when the
device is restarted.
E911 settings
Note that E911 settings are available only with the E911 licensing option.
GSM Script enables the user to define which script is used or whether no script is used.
UMTS Script enables the user to define which script is used or whether no script is used.
LTE Script enables the user to define which script is used or whether no script is used.
Individual agent settings enable selecting the system used in each agent.
Scanner settings
Note that Scanner settings are only available in agents.
Scanner devices enables you to select a scanner in a dialog box.

Scanner enabled (ON/OFF) enables the scanner.
Feedback
Tap Give Feedback from the home screen to open a feedback form. Enter you name
(optional) and feedback and tap SUBMIT. Please note that you will not receive a reply to your
278
Nemo Handy
User Guide
feedback. If you have feedback that requires response, please contact Nemo Technical
Support.
Scanner measurements with Nemo Walker Air

Please refer to “DRT4311B Scanner”, “PCTEL Gflex/HBflex/IBflex Scanners”, and
“Rohde & Schwarz TSMA6 Scanner” for further instructions.
Ending Measurements
To end the measurements:
1. Stop all calls and data connections.
2. Stop the measurement by tapping Stop on the Control Center. You can keep, rename
or delete the resulting log file. If you wish to upload the measurement file, indoor map
file, a packet capture file, audio sample, or BTS file on a server, select the respective
options and tap Send. See Chapter “Uploading log files on server” for more information
on the connection settings.
Note that if one or more of the agent devices are in offline state when the measurement
is being stopped you will need to verify whether to stop the measurement. A dialog box
displaying a list of the offline devices appears, and you need to verify whether to stop
the measurement session.
• If you select Yes, the measurement session is stopped normally.
• If you select No, the controller device continues to wait for the agent devices, and
the measurement session is finalized when all agent connections are re-
established.
3. To exit Nemo Walker Air, select Menu | Exit.
Nemo Instant Report

See “Nemo Instant Report” for more information.
279
Nemo Handy
User Guide
16 Exporting Files
Measurement files can be exported by uploading them to a server or copying them over USB.
Uploading log files on server

You can upload measurement log files directly from Nemo Walker Air after stopping a
measurement or through the File Explorer. Select Menu | File Explorer. Select the log file(s)
and tap Menu ( ) | Upload.
On the Selected configuration page, use the previously defined settings (configuration) and tap
SEND or load another configuration by tapping SELECT CONFIRMATION.
Select one of the existing configurations and tap SELECT. If there are no existing
configurations, tap the CREATE NEW button on the toolbar. For more information on creating
new configurations, see Chapter “Defining measurement upload configurations”.
After the files have been uploaded, Nemo Walker Air will ask if you would like to send a
notification of the uploaded files. You can send an email or an SMS. To send an email, you
need to have an email account set up on your mobile. The notification contains a link to the
server from where the files can be downloaded. Tap DELETE SENT FILES to delete the
uploaded files from the Nemo Walker Air terminal.
Exporting files manually

Connect the data cable to the mobile and to a USB port on a PC. Windows will automatically
detect the USB device. Select Disk drive\Media device (MTP) as the mode on your Nemo
Walker Air device. The measurement files will be on the internal memory card in folder
sdcard\Nemo\Walker Air\Results in a zip mode. Copy and save the files on the PC where you
have installed Nemo File Manager.
Exporting and Converting Files

Measurement files can be uploaded to FTP server or collected manually from the agents.
Gathering log files from agents to controller using Bluetooth

Start logging. When logging is stopped, a popup window opens. Select Download log file to
controller.
A screen appears informing that the file downloading is completed.
There is also an alternative way to gather log files from agents via Bluetooth: when a
measurement is stopped, select Keep. The measurement can be found in Nemo Walker Air
File Explorer. Select the measurement, and then select Menu | Collect.
When sending small measurement files (under one megabyte in size) from agents, you can
send the all the files at the same time. When sending larger measurement files, it is
recommended to send the files one by one or to transfer them directly to Nemo Cloud, any of
the post-processing systems over the air or manually collected files using an USB cable.
Nemo Walker Air Backpack

An optional Nemo Walker Air backpack offers a carrying solution for the whole system. The
backpack includes three 12,800mAh Anker USB batteries, and can be used as a standalone
system without an external power source. The runtime of the complete system is up to 10
280
Nemo Handy
User Guide
hours, making it possible to use Nemo Walker Air a complete working day without having to re-
charge. The backpack also includes one 12/220/110v charging cable for the whole system.
• Backpack operating temperature is 0°C to 35°C (32 to 95°F).
• In the high end of the temperature range, the zipper must be left open for 5cm at the
top to improve the ventilation.
• Charging time of empty battery pack is ~12h + terminal batteries.
• If batteries are unused for long period, or in case of overheating, they may switch off.
• The batteries can be turned on from the button next to USB connectors (see the
picture).
Note: While connected to a power supply, batteries need to reach certain voltage
level before they start charging phones. If the phones are not charging, it means that
the level has not been reached yet and the charger must stay connected for longer.
Tips and Hints

This section gives some tips and hints for using Nemo Walker Air.
File locations
The various files associated with Nemo Walker Air have specific file locations. When adding
files to Nemo Walker Air, you should only use these specified folder locations for the files.
281
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Measurement data files are saved to sdcard\Nemo\WalkerAir\Results folder on the memory

card of your Nemo Walker Air terminal by using for example a Bluetooth connection or a cable
connection.
The following are the file locations where Nemo Walker Air related files should be saved.
Measurement data (.nmf)
• sdcard\Nemo\WalkerAir\Results
Display configurations (.xml)
• Display configurations are installed to the "\sdcard\Nemo\WalkerAir\Config" directory.
Using the GPS receiver

If you move too far away from the external Bluetooth GPS receiver or the receiver battery goes
flat, the GPS state in the Nemo Walker Air GPS view switches to Not connected. In such a
case, you do not need to restart Nemo Walker Air, just check that you have chosen the correct
GPS port in settings.
If you want to change to another Bluetooth GPS receiver, you need to delete the pairing
between the existing GPS receiver and Nemo Walker Air first.
282
Nemo Handy
User Guide
17 APPENDIX 2: Nemo Handy IoT User Guide
During Measurements
Open the Nemo Handy app on your device. Accept all permission before the application
launches. If you are unable to accept all permissions, please contact our technical support.
To start recording manually, tap Start Measurement on the Control Center. You can
browse the different views by dragging your finger horizontally across the screen. If a view
has several pages, you can move between the pages by dragging your finger vertically
across the screen. Pause or stop the measurement by tapping Pause or Stop on the
Control Center. After pausing you can continue the measurement by tapping Resume
Measurement. You can keep, rename or delete the resulting log file. Export the
measurement file for post-processing.
When logging, you can draw a route on the map by placing markers along the route by
tapping on the toolbar. When a marker is added, a pop-up message displaying the
marker sequence number appears on the screen. You are also able to see the marker
sequence number later by tapping on the marker.
Settings
Page settings
Select Settings | Page Settings settings to define page settings.
General Settings
Select Settings | General to define general settings.
Send crash reports, if selected, Nemo Handy IoT will send crash reports.
Write debuglog defines whether debug log is written.
Device Label allows naming the device.
Import/export settings option enables importing and exporting settings. With this feature you
can share settings with other users and device models from your Nemo Handy IoT terminal.
Keep backup, when selected, keeps a backup of measurement files in the measurement unit´s
they can be recovered from the measurement unit.
Screenshot resolution enables you to define the resolution of screenshots (original, medium, or
small) you take from the Nemo Handy IoT user interface.
Screenshot format defines in which format (.pgn or .jpg) the captured screenshot will be saved.
Screenshot timestamp, if selected, leaves a timestamp on the captured screenshot.
Screenshot all views, if selected, captures a screenshot of all views. Ask, when selected,
prompts Nemo Handy IoT to ask whether to take screenshot of all views whenever the user is

In Nemo Handy IoT, select Settings | Display & Sound to define the display settings.
Display config file defines which views are displayed. Selecting Default uses the default
configuration, while Select Configuration File enables you to open a customized
configuration file.
283
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Units defines the measurement units used when defining the Nemo Handy IoT maps
(Metric/Imperial).
Throughput prefix defines in which unit throughput units are shown (Kilo/Mega/Giga)
Notification volume sets the volume level for voice notifications.
Notifications enables you to select which notification icons and/or notification audio files are in
use. See Chapter “Notifications” for more information on notifications.
Notifications
There are four types of notifications: audio, icon, popup, and wearable. Audio notifications will
play an audio file when triggered. Notifications with icons will appear as icons on the
measurement route on a map and in line graphs. A popup message can be selected for both
types of notifications. The popup appears briefly at the bottom of the screen. If you have a
smartwatch or other wearable with an Android operating system, you can select wearable to
display notifications on your wearable device.
Custom notifications
It is possible to edit existing notifications and create new notifications.
created.
audio file.
Default action defines how you will be notified. The options are audio, icon, popup or wearable.
You can also select all four.
To create a new notification, tap Add New at the top right corner of the Notification settings
page.
created.
audio file.
as well.
Default action defines how you will be notified. The options are audio, icon, popup, or
284
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Logging Settings
In Nemo Handy IoT, select Settings | Logging to define the logging settings.
Log file prefix allows you to define your own prefix for log file name.
Note that if the Debuglog (.nbl) option is selected you cannot access or use the .nbl
logging file as such. It is recommended not to select the Debuglog option unless
prompted by Keysight Technologies.
Measurement upload allows you to save connection settings into configurations that can be
used when uploading files on a server. See Chapter “Defining measurement upload
configurations” for more information.
Initial marker, when selected, a dialog will be displayed when logging begins, in which the user
can define a measurement description.
Predefined marker allows user to define the marker before starting logging.
Select one of the existing configurations or create a new one by tapping Create New.
First select the protocol used for the transfer.
On the Connection configuration page, define settings needed for the file upload. Once you
(for example /handy) and tap Create and Verify. If the path is correct, a Path verification
Remote address defines the target path for the uploaded files when HTTP or HTTPS protocol
is used. Type in the address, tap Verify Remote Address, and the target path will be
checked. If the path is correct, a Verification successful message is displayed.
custom prefix.
New.
17.2.4.1.1 (S)FTP Connection Settings
Host defines the FTP host address.
editor when defining FTP logon settings and when defining settings for manual FTP transfers
17.2.4.1.2 HTTP(S) Connection Settings
HTTPS protocols.
285
Nemo Handy
User Guide

Select the Authenticate Server option (for HTTPS) to authenticate the HTTPS server.
17.2.4.1.3 Dropbox Connection Settings
field (for example /handy) and tap Create and Verify. If the path is correct, a Path verification
custom prefix.
GPS settings
clock can be synchronized. If logging is started and there is no GPS fix, Nemo Handy IoT will
go into "Waiting state" during which Nemo Handy IoT cannot be used.
GPS source defines the GPS source.
Please note that this option affects the system clock in Nemo Handy IoT. Not the
clock in the Android terminal.
Map settings
Show notifications on map (Yes/No) defines whether notifications appear on the map.
Idle route, (on/off) when activated, allows Nemo Handy to continue drawing the route and
Import GPX route enables you import a GPX file. Tap Import GPX Route and select a .gpx file
from the list. Note that you need to ensure that you have copied the GPX file to your Nemo
Handy device before you can import the file.
Show GPX route, when selected, displays the GPX route on top of the map.
Select Nemo Navigation Assistant enables you to select a GPS navigation device to be used
alongside Nemo Handy IoT. Tapping Select Nemo Navigation Assistant opens the Select
device dialog which shows paired devices. Select the correct device from the list. If the device
you wish to select is not displayed, select Show all paired devices.
Google Map type defines whether normal or satellite map is used. Using Google Map may
require updating the Google Play services. In this case, when Google Map is selected as the
map type Nemo Handy asks you to update the Google Play services. Tap Update.
286
Nemo Handy
User Guide
the Nemo Handy application.
HTTP map loading (with Open Street Map selected) defines when Nemo Handy IoT is allowed
to load a map (Always/When not logging/Never).
Indoor settings
Floorplans displays a list of .tab files that have been loaded in Nemo Handy.
Import iBwave maps enables importing iBwave map files (see Chapter “Importing iBwave
maps” for more information).
iBwave map files. The zone layer information is stored in the iBwave project file. Zones are
used for example for drawing areas for DAS antenna groups to graphically show where a
certain cell is transmitting.
BTS settings
into the phone’s BTS folder (phone/ Nemo/ Handy/ BTS), from where they are listed in the
Encrypt BTS files enables you to encrypt the BTS files. After encrypting a BTS file a password
is required to open the file. The encrypted .nab file can be transferred to a PC via USB cable
or Bluetooth without a password. A message is displayed if there are no BTS files to encrypt.
Switch on the Use BTS File option to view the BTS icons on the map and to define BTS cells
settings.
Show BTS file cells defines whether BTS icons are displayed on the map. Also, select a BTS
file on the BTS settings page.
then switch on the Use BTS option. Select the information you would like to view on a map.
See Chapter “BTS information on a map” for more information.
Nemo Handy IoT OTA (Over-the-air) updates settings

Nemo Handy IoT checks at every startup whether there is a newer version available. Notice
that your Technical Support agreement needs to be valid before a newer version will be
detected. To disable Nemo Handy from checking for newer version at every startup, deselect
Check at Startup in the OTA updates settings (Settings | OTA Updates).
To check for available updates, go to OTA update settings in Nemo Handy IoT and tap Check
for Updates. If a newer version is detected, you can choose to download and install it. Please
note that unit-specific OTA update settings made in Nemo Cloud overrule OTA updates
settings made in Nemo Handy IoT, i.e. if in the Nemo Handy IoT unit´s OTA Updates settings
Update automatically is disabled but in Nemo Clouds´s Resources | Units section OTA
updates are enabled for the unit, OTA updates will take place.
287
Nemo Handy
User Guide
To enable silent install, i.e. automatically update the software version when a new software
update is released, select Update Automatically.
Version downgrades, i.e. updating Nemo Handy IoT to an older version, can be performed in
Nemo Cloud, however this causes all settings to reset. Note that silent install does not work
when downgrading. After downgrade, start Nemo Handy IoT manually and accept all usage
rights that Nemo Handy IoT asks for. For more information, see Nemo Cloud User Guide.
IoT settings
IoT Devices enables selecting which IoT dongle you are using.
Operation Modes enables selecting which operation mode is used.
Forcing features
Nemo Handy IoT supports band locking when using Know You 5737 modem. Support for the
lock is terminal-specific, so please refer to the Nemo Handy data sheet to see which locks are
supported by your test device. Please note that unless you deactivate forcing features, they
will stay active even if you exit Nemo Handy IoT.
Select Settings IoT Forcing to open the Forcing page opens with field band lock.
Note that some of these functionalities are available only if your Nemo Handy device
or the IoT dongle supports them.
17.2.10.1.1 Band lock
Select a band and/or system from the Band lock dialog box.
All supported bands from the systems supported by the terminal are displayed. However, the
terminal does not necessarily support all the listed bands. If you are trying to lock the phone to
a band that the phone does not support, the phone will revert back to default. Band lock
overrides the system lock when used simultaneously. For example, if you lock to the WCDMA
2100 band, you cannot choose the GSM system lock.
Tap Save to confirm the selection.
After adding band lock, you must exit Nemo Handy IoT, disconnect and reconnect the IoT
modem and finally restart Nemo Handy IoT. After this, continue using Nemo Handy IoT as
usual.
Please note that the lock is not released by rebooting the device or by exiting Nemo
Handy IoT. The lock can only be released with Nemo Handy IoT. If the device
requires a reboot, a notification is displayed automatically.
eDRX Settings enables selecting values for WB-S1 Mode eDRX Cycle NB-S1 Mode eDRX
Cycle.
Nemo Cloud settings

Nemo Cloud with Nemo Handy can be purchased as Basic (with file synchronization)
or Premium (with file synchronization and automation). Please note that if you do not
purchase one of these two options purchased you cannot use Nemo Cloud.
Storage defines which files Nemo Handy uses when files are uploaded, that is, from which file
the file content is displayed when uploading files, and the location where new created files are
saved. The options of the storage preference are Ask always, when Nemo Handy asks the
288
Nemo Handy
User Guide
storage location every time files are uploaded or saved; Local, when files are uploaded and
saved locally; and Cloud, when files are uploaded and saved in Nemo Cloud. The preference
can be changed later in Cloud settings in Nemo Handy. The Storage button is disabled when
no active project is received from the server.
Handy is connected to WiFi. If the WiFi connection drops, the file synchronization stops and
resumes when Nemo Handy reconnects to WiFi.
When Sync when logging (ON/OFF) is selected, Nemo Handy synchronizes files by default.
When disabled, Nemo Handy stops the file synchronization during measurements and
synchronizes the files automatically when the measurement ends
To log in to Nemo Cloud, first tap the Login button. Next, define the following:
Next, tap Login. The summary displayed below Login/Logout is the latest message sent from
Nemo Cloud. Please note that possible error messages sent from Nemo Cloud are displayed
in this summary.
Nemo Handy IoT Measurement Views

Below are presented the various measurement views available in Nemo Handy IoT. Subset of
the available pages is visible by default. Full list of Views, and ability to hide/show individual
pages is available at Settings | Page Settings.
To create a new page, select Settings | Page Settings, tap New page at the bottom of the
dialog box and select a page from the existing pages list. Name the page and add splits if you
wish. Tap the menu icon at the top-right of the screen to select how pages are sorted (All
visible/A-Z/Non-alphabetical/Reset to default).
The scales in the bar and line graphs will change according to the selected parameter.
Selected parameter can be changed from the Parameter menu that opens by tapping and
holding on the value of a parameter on chart legend. You can also add and hide default
parameters from existing graphs to existing views. Select Settings | Page Settings, select a
page to open
You can browse through the different pages by dragging your finger horizontally across the
screen. If a page has several views, you can move between the views by dragging your finger
vertically across the screen.
page dialog box. From the list, tap a page to move the view to that page. Scroll up and down
by dragging your finger vertically across the dialog box.
It is also possible to split screens by selecting Settings | Page Settings and selecting from the
list the page you want to split. A dialog box of the view opens. Tap Add split and select a
page from the Select pages list. You are also able to select a smaller split if you wish by
selecting the Small splits option, with which the split is about a third of the screen whereas a
normal split is half of the screen. To remove split, tap the trash can button.
From the same dialog box, you are able to hide and make visible pages by selecting/clearing
Show page.
From the Page settings menu it is also possible to add new pages, make all pages visible, or
reset pages to default state.
page dialog box. From the list tap a page to move the view to that page. Scroll up and down by
dragging your finger vertically across the dialog box.
289
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Status View
System time displays the ongoing time of the day in the device.
Logging status displays the current recording status.
Log file size displays the size of the measurement file in bytes.
Log file name displays the measurement file name.
Log file path displays the location where the measurement files are stored on the memory
card.
Free storage displays the available storage in the internal memory.
Free memory displays the current amount of free RAM.
Heap size displays the amount of memory that Nemo Handy currently occupies in the
operating system.
Battery temp displays the battery temperature.
Script status displays the current status of the script.
Script file displays the name of the script file.GPS status displays the status of the GPS
receiver.
IMEI displays the International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) number of the mobile
terminal. The IMEI number is used by the GSM network to identify valid devices.
IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity) displays a unique number associated with all
GSM and UMTS network mobile phone users. It is sent by the phone to the network.
Band lock displays the band lock status.
GSM BCCH Lock displays the GSM BCCH lock status.
WCDMA Cell Lock displays the WCDMA cell lock status.
LTE Cell Lock displays the LTE cell lock status.
APN, PDP Type, Interface, Address, Gateway, DNS, NSAPI display information about the
current access point.
GPS View
Source defines the GPS source.
Latitude/Longitude displays the latitude/longitude coordinates.
Altitude displays the current elevation in meters.
Heading displays the direction in which a person or vehicle is moving.
Speed displays the current velocity of the test unit in kilometres per hour.
GSP time displays the time from the GPS. This feature can be enabled and disabled by
selecting Settings | GPS | Use GPS Time.
Satellites displays the number of satellites currently visible.
Speed displays the current speed in km/h.
Notification History View

The notification history view displays a list of notifications and their timestamps.
To display the Notification history view, go to Settings | Page Settings | Notification History,
select Show Page and tap the Back key of the device. To hide a notification, select it from the
notification list by tapping, then select Hide from the opening dialog. Tap OK to confirm the
selection. Clear notification list by tapping the Clear Notification button that appears when
tapping and holding a notification.
You can use filters in the Notification view. Tap the Filter icon ( ) to display a search bar and
290
Nemo Handy
User Guide
notifications are displayed in the view accordingly. If you erase the filter from the Filter text
field, all signal messages are displayed on the view.
Signaling View
Signaling messages view displays a list of signaling messages. Tap an individual message to
view the timestamp for that message or L3 messages in decoded form. To return to the
signaling main view, tap on the upper right corner of the message details view or
anywhere on the touchpad.
To hide a signalling message, select it from the signalling messages list by tapping and
holding, then select Hide from the opening dialog. Tap OK to confirm the selection.
You can use filters in the Signaling view. Tap the Filter icon ( ) to display a search bar and
messages are displayed in the view accordingly. If you erase the filter from the Filter text field,
all signal messages are displayed on the view.
Summary View for IoT

System displays the current cellular system, for example, GSM 1800.
• CONNECTING
• CONNECTED
• SUSPENDED
• DISCONNECTING
• DISCONNECTED
• UNKNOWN
Cell ID displays the E-UTRAN cell global ID (ECGI).
eNodeB/CID displays the eNodeB ID and cell ID.
RNC/CID displays radio network controller ID and cell ID.
TAC displays the tracking area code.
EARFCN displays the radio frequency channel number in use.
Carrier RSSI displays the carrier RSSI value. Values range from -120 to -10.
Serving SNR displays the SNR (signal to noise ratio) for the serving channel in dB.
Serving RSRQ displays the reference signal received quality for the serving channel in dB.
Serving RSRP displays the reference signal received power for the serving channel in dBm.
Serving PCI displays the physical channel identifier number for the serving channel.
Detected RSRQ displays the detected reference signal received quality.
Detected RSRP displays the detected reference signal received power.
Detected PCI displays the detected physical channel identifier numbers.
EMM State displays the LTE EPS Mobility Management state.
EMM Substate displays the LTE EPS Mobility Management substate.
Transmission Mode displays the current MIMO configuration set for the terminal.
PDSCH BLER displays the block error rate for the PDSCH (physical downlink shared channel)
in percentage.
PDSCH Throughput displays the downlink data throughput for the PDSCH in bps.
291
Nemo Handy
User Guide
PDSCH Rank 2 Percentage displays the percentage of TTIs (transmission time intervals, 1ms)
during the reporting period where Rank 2 (MIMO 2x2) has been used in PDSCH channel.
PDSCH Modulation Codeword 0 displays the PDSCH modulation for codeword 0. This is the
modulation order as defined by 3GPP TS 36.213 subclause 7.1.7.
The available values are
• 1 = QPSK
• 2 = 16QAM
• 3 = 64QAM
PDSCH Modulation Codeword 1 displays the PDSCH modulation for codeword 1. This is the
modulation order as defined by 3GPP TS 36.213 subclause 7.1.7.
CQI Wideband Codeword 0 displays the wideband channel quality indicator value for
codeword 0. This is the average wideband CQI calculated over the reporting period. See
3GPP TS 36.213 subclause 7.2. Values range from 0 to 15.
CQI Wideband Codeword 1 displays the wideband channel quality indicator value for
codeword 1. This is the average wideband CQI calculated over the reporting period. See
3GPP TS 36.213 subclause 7.2. Values range from 0 to 15.
PDSCH PRB Allocation displays the number of allocated physical resource blocks for the
PDSCH.
The downlink modulation ratio displays the relative ratio of uplink QSPK, 16QAM and 64QAM
modulation activity for codeword 0 and codeword 1.
PDSCH Rank displays the percentage of TTIs (transmission time intervals, 1ms) during the
reporting period where Rank has been used in PDSCH channel.
Bandwidth indicates the DL bandwidth of the active carrier in MHz.
TX Power PUSCH displays the TX power level for the PUSCH (physical uplink shared
channel) in dBm. Values range from 30 to -120.
TX Power PUCCH displays the TX power level for the PUCCH (physical uplink control
channel) in dBm. Values range from 30 to -120.
PUSCH Modulation displays the PUSCH modulation for codeword 0. This is the modulation
order as defined by 3GPP TS 36.213 subclause 7.1.7.
PUSCH Rank defines how many data streams are used for the data transmission. The value
of the parameter is zero when data is not transmitted. Possible values are 0 and 1.
PUSCH MCS Modulation displays the PUSCH MCS index for codeword 0. The value defines
the modulation and the amount of coding used. See 3GPP TS 36.213 subclause 7.1.7. Values
range from 0 to 31.
Timing Advance displays the timing advance value for the serving channel. Timing advance is
used to adjust uplink transmission timing in a way that allows node B to receive transmissions
from all UEs simultaneously. Values range from 0 to 1282.
Cyclic Prefix defines the type of signal the terminal is set to measure. With Autodetect
selected, the terminal will automatically detect the appropriate signal type.
RRC State displays the state of RRC connection.
RACH Type displays the RACH (random-access channel) message type. The possible values
are contention based and non-contention based.
RACH Result displays the RACH message result. The possible values are succeeded,
aborted, and failed.
RACH Maximum Allowed Preambles displays the maximum allowed number of RACH
preambles. See 3GPP 136.133 subclause 6.3.2 and 3GPP 136.321 subclause 5.1. Values
range from 3 to 200.
RACH Number of Trans. Preambles displays the number of preambles that were sent during
the RACH procedure.
RACH Initial TX Power displays the initial TX power level for the RACH.
RACH Succ. Preamble Power Level displays the power level for a successful RACH preamble.
RACH PUSCH Power displays the power level for simultaneous RACH and PUSCH
procedures.
292
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Statistics Views
The statistics views display statistics for various measurement events. The statistics views
display voice and video call related and application testing related statistics. To save the
current statistics to a .csv file, select Menu | Save Statistics. The saved statistics can be
found in Result folder. The file name format is Statistic_date_time.csv.
Statistics views in Nemo Handy IoT are:

• HTTP statistics (with Exelonix SARA-R4/N4 and KnowYou SIM7080 modems)
• UDP Echo statistics (with Exelonix SARA-R4/N4 and KnowYou 5737 modems)
• Ping statistics (with KnowYou 5737 and KnowYou SIM7080 modems)
IoT Parameters View
Test round defines which test round (repeat), e.g. 1/10, is taking place.
Last Ping RTT displays the latest Ping round-trip time (Minimum value: 0 Unit: ms)
Last UDP RTT displays the latest UDP round-trip time (Minimum value: 0 Unit: ms)
Operation Mode defines the operation mode (100 = Inband same PCI 101 = Inband different
PCI 102 = Guardband 103 = Standalone)
Power Save Mode displays the power save mode.
DCI Repetitions displays the DCI repetitions (Range: 1 – 2048)
DCI Count displays the DCI count (Minimum value: 0)
DCI Format displays the DCI format (2000 = N0 2010 = N1)
RACH Preamble Repetitions displays the number of times the preamble is repeated to
improve coverage. When multiple CE levels were used during the RACH procedure this is the
last used repetitions (Range: 1 – 128).
RACH CE Level displays the last used coverage enhancement level. CE level defines the
parameter set that is used for preamble sending (Range: 0 – 3).
293
Nemo Handy
User Guide
RSRP (Reference signal received power) line graph displays the linear average of the power
contributions of the resource elements that carry cell-specific reference signals within the
considered measurement frequency (Range: −160 – 0 Unit: dBm)
IoT Measurements View
The IoT Measurements view features line graphs and has two splits.
Upper split
The upper split of the IoT Measurements view identical for all dongles and contains the
following parameter graphs:
RSRP (Reference signal received power) displays the linear average of the power
contributions of the resource elements that carry cell-specific reference signals within the
considered measurement frequency (Range: −160 – 0 Unit: dBm).
Serving SNR displays the signal-to-noise ratio for the serving cell.
Bottom split
The bottom split is selected according to the supported dongles. The bottom split may also
contain sub pages:
• When using KnowYou 5737 and Exelonix BG77 modem
Ping RTT displays the Ping round trip time (Minimum value: 0 Unit: ms).
improve coverage (Range: 1 – 128).
UDP Echo RTT (available with Exelonix modem) displays the UDP echo round trip time
RACH.
294
Nemo Handy
User Guide
• When using KnowYou 6336 modem
Ping RTT displays the Ping round trip time (Minimum value: 0 Unit: ms).
• When using Exelonix SARA-R4/N4 modem
UDP Echo RTT (available with Exelonix modem) displays the UDP echo round trip time
RACH.
IoT Config View

When using Know You 5737 or Exelonix BG77 modem, you can perform UDP echo and PING
testing
• To test Ping, define remote address, the amount to repeats, timeout, delay from reply
to request and access point (please follow the terminal manual to define access point)
and tap Start.
• To test UDP echo, define remote address, port, repeat count, data count, timeout,
interval and access point (please follow the terminal manual to define access point)
and tap Start.
When using KnowYou 6336 modem, you can perform HTTP data transfer and Ping testing.
• To test Ping, define remote address, the amount to repeats, timeout, delay from reply
to request and Access point (please follow the terminal manual to define access point)
and tap Start.
• To test HTTP data transfer (HTTP GET), define the remote address, repeat count,
timeout, delay from reply to request, and access point.
When using Exelonix SARA-R4/N4 modem, you can perform HTTP data transfer and UDP
echo.
• To test UDP echo, define remote address, port, repeat count, data count, timeout,
interval and access point (please follow the terminal manual to define access point)
and tap Start.
• To test HTTP data transfer (HTTP GET), define remote address, port, repeat count,
timeout, delay from reply to request, and access point.
• To test HTTP data transfer (HTTP PUT) define remote address, port, repeat count,
data count, timeout, interval, and access point. Tap Start.
IoT AT Messages View

To display the IoT AT Messages view, go to Settings | Page Settings | IoT AT Messages
and select Show Page.
Enter a command in the AT command field at the bottom of the view and tap Send.
Results are shown in the same view. Blue arrow indicates a user-sent AT command, while a
red arrow indicates AT responses from the IoT dongle.
295
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Map View
To display the Map view, go to Settings | Page Settings | Map, select Show Page, and tap
Select between Google Map and OpenStreetMap in Settings | Map | Map Select. Both maps
support the same functions.
Indoor maps (floorplans) are viewed as layers on top of the map. To view floorplans, go to
Settings | Indoor, where you can select between floorplans and iBwave maps to be uploaded
as layers on top of the map.
You can zoom in and out by “pinching” the screen using two fingers (for example, thumb and
index finger) to zoom in or zoom out when viewing a map. Tap to focus on your current
location.
You can also rotate the map/floorplan by placing two fingers on the screen and turning the
fingers in a circular movement on the screen.
The compass on the upper left-hand side of the screen indicates the cardinal directions and
tapping on the compass turns the map back into upright position.
You can view the measured route with color-coded parameter values in real-time on live map.
More Actions Menu
Tap More Actions button on the top right corner of the map view to open the More Actions
menu.
296
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Swipe Allowed, when selected, enables swiping pages. This is the default selection.
Swipe Locked, when selected, disables swiping pages.
Map Locked, when selected, locks the map in its position while maintaining the possibility to
scroll.
You can select whether GPS or inserted markers are used in marking the measurement route
on the map by tapping the More Actions button ( ) and by selecting/deselecting Show
GPS and Show Markers. When Show GPS is selected, Nemo Handy uses GPS for route
marking (recommended for outdoor measurements). When Show Markers is selected, Nemo
Handy uses inserted markers to mark the measurement route (recommended for indoor
measurements).
Tap CLEAR ROUTE to remove route markings from the map.
Tap ADD KLM(S) and add KML layers to display KML files on top of the Google maps. See
“KML files displayed on a map” for more information.
Tap OPEN BTS EDITOR to open BTS Editor view. See BTS Editor view for more information.
Tap OPEN ROUTE PLAN EDITOR to open Route Plan Editor view.
BTS View
To display the BTS view, go to Settings | Page Settings | BTS, select Show Page, and tap
Site name displays the name of the active base station.
Distance displays the distance in kilometers to the active base station.
BTS CI displays the cell identity of the active base station.
The Secondary Cells are also displayed alongside active and neighbor cells. The Cell IDs are
taken from the BTS file.
297
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Transaction Log View

To display the Transaction log view, go to Settings | Page Settings | Transaction Log and
select Show Page.
All transactions that can be made with Nemo Handy are shown in a log window, row per
transaction, with key information, such as status (success/failure), average data throughput,
and whether the voice call was mobile terminated (MT) or mobile originated (MO).
To clear the transaction list, select Menu | Clear transactions.
Nemo Cloud View

To display the Nemo Cloud view, go to Settings | Page Settings | Nemo Cloud and select
Show Page. If you haven´t logged into Nemo Cloud yet, you must do so by tapping Login
Cloud in Nemo Cloud settings. Logging into Nemo Cloud activates automated testing mode.
Note that when creating a project in Nemo Cloud, Nemo Handy IoT device must be assigned
to a manual project for IoT measurement files to correctly sync to Nemo Cloud.
When logged in to Nemo Cloud, the Nemo Cloud view displays the username of the Nemo
Cloud account, server address, the active project or work order (if received), and/or the unit
name defined by the user in Nemo Cloud and or the unit ID (the IMEI of the Nemo Handy IoT
device), time of the last synchronization, and most recent activity.
Stop sync button ( ) manually stops file syncing to Nemo Cloud.
Event log button ( ) opens the Nemo Cloud Event Log view that displays the event
history.
Logout button ( ) logs Nemo Handy out from Nemo Cloud.

When logged out from Nemo Cloud, the Nemo Cloud view displays the login settings. When
logging in to Nemo Cloud, you can configure your Nemo Handy IoT unit’s Cloud settings either
directly in the Nemo Cloud view, or through Settings | Nemo Cloud.
298
Nemo Handy
User Guide
18 APPENDIX 3: Nemo IoT Meter

If this is the first time you are performing indoor measurements with Nemo IoT Meter, you will
need to import an indoor map (that is, a floorplan) to Nemo IoT Meter as an image file. The
supported formats are .jpg, .jpeg, .gif, and .png.
Transfer the image file (for example Floorplan.jpg) to the phone/Nemo/Handy/Maps folder on
the internal memory card of your Nemo IoT Meter terminal by using for example a Bluetooth
connection, or a cable connection.
You can also take a photo, for example, of an emergency exit plan with the Nemo IoT Meter
device camera and use that as an indoor map.
In Nemo IoT Meter, select Settings | Indoor | Floorplans and tap Add to choose or import a
map or take a picture to be used as floorplan. A dialog box prompting whether you want to
copy floor position from another floorplan is displayed. Select No/Yes.
If this is the first time you are performing indoor measurements, Nemo IoT Meter will generate
a MapInfo file (.tab) based on the image file. Next time you make measurements and use the
same map, Nemo IoT Meter will use the .tab file automatically. A MapInfo map always consists
of two files: a MapInfo .tab file and an image file.
floors of a building. Select a file and tap Up and Down to rearrange to order of the floors on
in the following manner: “Floor 1”, “Floor 2”, etc. If there is already added floors with different
names that do not match with the map file name and Use map name as floor name is
selected, a dialog prompting whether the user wants to change the floor names to match the
map file names appears. By clicking Yes, all added floor names will be renamed.
Select a floorplan and tap Edit.
299
Nemo Handy
User Guide
On the Floorplan settings page, you can define the dimensions of the floorplan and select a
route plan.
Layer name defines the floorplan name. The name can be edited.
Select the Display route plan option to display a route plan on the indoor map.
Route plan defines the route plan file (.rpf) displayed on the indoor map.
File type defines whether the floorplan dimensions are defined in meters (width/height) or in
geodetic coordinates.
Width defines the floorplan width in meters. Nemo Handy enters a default value (number of
Height defines the floorplan height in meters. Nemo Handy enters a default value (number of
Longitude defines the geodetic coordinates of the left and right sides of the map. Enter
coordinates in decimal degrees (for example, 25.4714).
Latitude defines the geodetic coordinates of the top and bottom sides of the map. Enter
coordinates in decimal degrees (for example, 25.4714).
300
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Nemo IoT Meter Settings

Open the Nemo IoT Meter settings by tapping the Menu button ( ) and select Settings.
IoT Devices
IoT Devices enables selecting which IoT dongle you are using.
Test Settings
Ping Settings opens the Ping Settings view. To test Ping define remote address, the
amount to repeats, delay from reply to request, and timeout.
301
Nemo Handy
User Guide
UDP Echo settings opens the UDP Echo Settings view. To test UDP echo define
remote address, port, repeat count, data count, delay from reply to request, and
timeout.
HTTP GET Settings opens the HTTP GET Settings view. To test HTTP GET define
remote address, port, repeat count, delay from reply to request, and timeout.
302
Nemo Handy
User Guide
HTTP PUT Settings opens the HTTP PUT Settings view. To test HTTP PUT define
remote address, port, data count, repeat count, delay from reply to request, and
timeout.
IoT USB dongle settings

Access Point enables selecting the access point that will be used in the data
measurement.
Operation Modes enables selecting which operation mode is used when performing
measurements.
Band lock enables selecting which bands are locked. Nemo IoT Meter supports band
locking when using KnowYou 5757 modem. Support for the lock is terminal specific.
Please note that unless you deactivate forcing features, they will stay active even if you
exit Nemo IoT Meter.
WB-S1 Mode eDRX Cycle enables defining values for WB-S1 Mode eDRX Cycle.
NB-S1 Mode eDRX Cycle enables defining values for NB-S1 Mode eDRX Cycle.
303
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Report settings
Device name enables defining a name for the Nemo IoT Meter device which will be
used when Nemo IoT Meter sends test results via email.
Email for Reports enables defining an email address to which Nemo IoT Meter will send
test results.
UDP Echo Success Rate (%) Rating Limits enables defining rating limits for UDP Echo
Success Rate.
Map settings
Map select enables selecting between Google Map and OpenStreetMap (Google Map
Google Map type defines whether normal or satellite map is used.
Indoor map settings
Floorplans displays a list of .tab files that have been loaded into Nemo IoT Meter.
Password settings
Tap Change Password to define password settings.
General settings
Write Debug Log defines whether debug log is written.
Show Serving Info displays/hides the serving channel information on every page.
304
Nemo Handy
User Guide
During Measurements
Starting a Measurement
Define measurement details (this can also be done later) and select measurement testing
location on the map view.
In the Control Center, i.e. the sliding component on the screen, select EDIT to define the
measurement details.
• Customer and User allow defining names for the customer and user which will be
displayed in the generated measurement report.
• Under Additional information you can add information about the measurement
location.
305
Nemo Handy
User Guide
Center the map on your current location by tapping .
When logging, you can draw a route on the map by placing markers along the route by tapping
and holding your finger on top of the map in the desired location or by positioning the green
cross on top of the location you wish to add the marker and tapping the Add Marker button
( ). You can add a photo to a marker by adding a marker on the screen and tapping the
add photo marker ( ) button to open the camera preview screen. Tap the shutter icon to
capture an image. An image preview is displayed. Tap OK at the top of the view to confirm
capturing the image or tap RETRY to dismiss the image and capture a new one. A dialog
prompting you to enter photo name is displayed. Enter photo name and tap OK. The image is
added to the selected location.
306
Nemo Handy
User Guide
In the Control Center, tap Start Test to open the measurement type menu in which you can
select which measurement type is used.
Measurement Results View
The measurement results view displays the latitude and longitude of each test location and
parameters related to serving cell and to the test type.
To perform several tests, e.g. transactions or different locations, during the same
measurement session, tap New Test.
To stop the test, tap Finish Testing. Tap Create report to generate a report based on the
measurement results. Note that the measurement details have to be defined by this stage.
307
Nemo Handy
User Guide
You can also share the results by tapping Send Results.
308
Nemo Handy
User Guide
19 Technical support
If you have questions on or beyond this documentation about Nemo tools, please contact our
technical support service through Nemo Support Portal at http://nemo.support.keysight.com,
call us or send us an email at nemo.support@keysight.com. Note that for full support you need
to have the Maintenance Agreement.
Nemo Support Portal

Nemo Support Portal is a web interface for technical support, product-related questions, and
RMA requests. It offers a fast and convenient way to reach our technical support team and
submit repair, warranty repair, and calibration requests. Customers can open a support ticket,
follow the status of existing tickets, and request technical support 24/7/365. Furthermore, the
Nemo Support Portal includes a Knowledge Base for the most frequent and latest topics on
Nemo Products. Submitting a ticket via Nemo Support Portal ensures that our technical
specialists have all the necessary information available to solve your support case, resulting in
faster response times.
Please go to http://nemo.support.keysight.com to access the portal and click Request access
to obtain a password to the system.
Phone and email support

During the warranty period, the phone support related to potential software errors is free of
additional charge. Registered users with a valid Maintenance Agreement are entitled to full
support. For a list service location, please visit http://www.keysight.com/find/assist Nemo
Support Portal is the preferred channel for technical support requests, but you can also send
us an email. When emailing, please let us know the number of your Software Maintenance and
Support Agreement. You can also contact us via email (nemo.support@keysight.com).
Locations for Keysight Technologies

Online assistance: http://www.keysight.com/find/assist
309
This information is subject to change without notice.
© Keysight Technologies Finland, Ltd. 2019-2022
Published in USA, May 30, 2022
NTH00000A-90018
310

Nemo Handy-Walker Air 4.51 User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Nemo Handy-Walker Air 4.51 User Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Nemo Handy-Walker Air 4.51 User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Keysight Nemo Handy

Is the software of your Nemo Handy up-to-date?

Keysight Nemo Handy ................................................................................................................................... 0

Manual Instagram testing ......................................................................................... 44

Scripted LinkedIn testing .......................................................................................... 76

GERAN/GSM carrier lock .......................................................................................... 96

Map View ........................................................................................................... 142

IPerf for WCDMA ..................................................................................................... 154

NR cell table ............................................................................................................ 171

Installing Mps Scanner Service license ................................................................. 196

Scanning results...................................................................................................... 217

Indoor measurements ......................................................................................... 238

Scanner settings.................................................................................................. 278

BTS View .............................................................................................................. 297

Using Nemo Handy:

3 Nemo Handy System Overview

Low data throughput with Android applications

4 Nemo Handy Setup

Installing Nemo Handy using SD card

Installing Nemo Handy:

Installing Nemo Handy from Keysight Software Manager (KSM)

Installing Nemo Handy from KSM:

Nemo Handy OTA (Over-the-air) update

Installing Nemo Handy license

Selecting Nemo Handy license:

1. In Nemo Handy, go to Menu | About | License and tap Browse licenses.

Temporary airplane mode on VoLTE devices

Connecting an external GPS

Manual application testing

Manual voice call testing

Manual video call

Manual SMS testing

Manual SMS receiving testing

Manual MMS testing

Manual HTTP testing

Manual HTML browsing testing

URL defines the URL of the page that will be browsed.

Manual FTP testing

Manual SFTP testing

Manual ICMP Ping

Host defines the ping host address.

Manual TWAMP testing

Tap Start Test on the Control Center and select TWAMP.

Host defines the host address.

Tap Start to start the test.

TWAMP traffic profiles

Manual IPerf testing

Manual IPerf 2 testing

Tapping RECENT show transfers initiated from manual transaction.

Manual IPerf 3 testing

Tapping RECENT show transfers initiated from manual transaction.

Manual Facebook testing

Setting up a Facebook developer account for Facebook testing

1. Go to Facebook and create a new Facebook account.

2. After you have created an account, go to https://developers.facebook.com/ and

9. Return to the Facebook for Developers site (https://developers.facebook.com/)

10. Select Graph API Explorer.

Renewing the access token

3. Select Graph API Explorer.

6. In the User or Page field, select your Facebook page.